Documentación Técnica - Evaporador de Doble Efecto PDF

PIGNAT SAS Tel : 00 33 4-78-90-50-03
6 Rue Calmette Fax : 00 33 4-78-90-63-88

E-mail :pignat@pignat.com
69 741 GENAS Cedex Site Web : www.pignat.com
FRANCE
ARCHIVO : 214 12 247
EVAPORADOR DOBLE EFECTO
EVV/2000
DOCUMENTACIÓN
TÉCNICA
PIGNAT S.A.
6 rue Calmette BP11 Date de création : 31/08/2005
69 741 GENAS cedex France
Tél. : (33) 478 905 003 Document N° : MPEVV2000_es_B
Fax. : (33) 478 906 388
E-mail : pignat@pignat.com

Ref. EVV/2000
MANUAL
B MAJ YS YS Utile
Traduction E.ESPI MM UTILE
A Création DF DF Utile
Indice Action Rédaction Vérification Etat
Version
Total páginas : 60 MPEVV2000_es_B
PIGNAT s.a. 6 Rue Calmette BP 11 69741 GENAS France

Document N° MPEVV2000_es_A
Liste des modifications
Indice Date Page Modifications et motifs
Version
A 31/08/05 1-58 Traduction en espagnol de la version A du manuel français
B 14/02/13 Modification coffret.
página : 2
SUMARIO
1. PRESENTACIÓN TÉCNICA ................................................................. 5

1.1. OBJETIVOS PEDAGÓGICOS...................................................................... 6
1.2. ESTUDIO PROPUESTO ............................................................................... 6
2. INFORMACIONES SEGURIDAD ......................................................... 7

2.1. RESPONSABILIDADES ............................................................................... 8
2.2. RIESGOS ....................................................................................................... 9
3. REPASOS TEÓRICOS .......................................................................... 10

3.1. GENERALIDADES SOBRE LA EVAPORACIÓN ................................... 11
3.2. LOS EVAPORADORES A EFECTOS MULTIPLES................................. 14
3.3. CALCULO DE LOS EVAPORADORES ................................................... 16
4. MONTAJE, INSTALACIÓN Y PUESTA EN MARCHA.................. 20

4.1. SOPORTE DE LA UNIDAD ....................................................................... 21
4.2. MANTENIMIENTO DE LA UNIDAD ....................................................... 21
4.3. MONTAJE ................................................................................................... 21
4.4. NORMAS DE INSTALACIÓN ................................................................... 22
4.5. CONEXIONES A LOS SERVICIOS ........................................................... 22
4.6. PUESTA EN MARCHA .............................................................................. 23
5. PRESENTACIÓN DE LA UNIDAD ..................................................... 24

5.1. FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LA UNIDAD ..................................................... 25
5.2. ESQUEMA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO ....................................................... 27
5.3. DESCRIPCIÓN TÉCNICA.......................................................................... 28
5.4. MEDIDAS .................................................................................................... 30
5.5. VÁLVULAS................................................................................................. 30
5.6. MATERIAL ADICIONAL NECESARIO PARA LA OPERACIÓN ......... 31
5.7. PREPARACIÓN DE LA DISOLUCIÓN INICIAL ..................................... 32
5.8. MÉTODO DE ANÁLISIS............................................................................ 32
5.9. CALIBRACIÓN DE LA BOMBA DOSIFICADORA ................................ 34
5.10. PUESTA EN VACÍO DE LA UNIDAD ...................................................... 36
5.11. MEDIDA DE LOS CAUDALES ................................................................. 38
5.12. PREPARACIÓN DE LA UNIDAD ............................................................. 40
5.13. CONFIGURACIÓN PARA EL MODO SIMPLE EFECTO ....................... 41
5.14. CONFIGURACIÓN PARA EL MODO DOBLE EFECTO ........................ 42
5.15. VACÍADO DE LA INSTALACIÓN ........................................................... 46
5.16. LIMPIEZA DE LA INSTALACIÓN ........................................................... 47
5.17. PARO DE LA INSTALACIÓN ................................................................... 48
5.18. ALMACENAMIENTO DE LA UNIDAD ................................................... 48
página : 3
6. CONCENTRACIÓN DE UNA DISOLUCIÓN ACUOSA AZUCARADA

49
6.1. CONDICIONES DE TRABAJO .................................................................. 50
6.2. RESULTADOS EXPERIMENTALES ........................................................ 51
6.3. EJEMPLO DE CÁLCULOS ........................................................................ 52
6.4. ANÁLISIS Y CONCLUSIONES ................................................................. 56
6.5. CONCLUSIÓN ............................................................................................ 56
7. ANEXOS .................................................................................................. 57
7.1. DATOS EXPERIMENTALES .................................................................... 59
7.2. CÁLCULOS ................................................................................................. 60
página : 4

Ref. EVV/2000
MANUAL DE USO
1. PRESENTACIÓN TÉCNICA
página : 5
1.1. OBJETIVOS PEDAGÓGICOS
La unidad permite estudiar la tecnología y el principio de funcionamiento de un evaporador con

lámina ascendante para un modo de evaporación simple o de doble efecto.
Los dos evaporadores están constituidos por un recipiente de vidro para la circulación con
funcionamiento en serie a co corriente.
Con la unidad también se puede llevar a cabo la evaporación simple efecto a presión atmósferica.
La instalación de evaporación doble efecto permite determinar la influencia de los siguientes

parámetros sobre la calidad de la solución concentrada :
caudal de alimentación
presión operativa de evaporación
presión atmosférica
presión reducida
Un estudio sobre los diferentes caudales así como sobre las concentraciones obtenidas permite
establecer balances de materia globales.
Un balance térmico puede establecerse a nivel del intercambiador sobre los condensados salidos del
segundo evaporador.
1.2. ESTUDIO PROPUESTO

Estudio de una operación unitaria a presión atmosférica y a presión reducida.
Evaluación de la eficiencia de la evaporación en cada caso estudiado.

· observación de la concentración de las soluciones salidas de cada etapa de evaporación.
· determinación de la influencia de los siguientes parámetros sobre la calidad de condensados
:
caudal de alimentación
presión operatoria de evaporación : atmosférica o reducida
Balance materia.
Estudio del intercambio térmico.
página : 6

Ref. EVV/2000
MANUAL DE USO
2. INFORMACIONES SEGURIDAD
página : 7
2.1. RESPONSABILIDADES
2.1.1. Responsabilidad del fabricante
La unidad de evaporación doble efecto en continuo al vacío es una unidad didáctica.
Está destinada por tanto a la enseñanza de los procedimientos de concentración por evaporación del
solvente de soluciones acuosas en modo continuo a la presión atmosférica o al vacío.
La planta presenta los mismos riesgos que los encontrados en la industria con la diferencia que los
volúmenes reaccionales aportados son más pequeños.
Su utilización debe estar bajo control de los profesores y en un local apropiado según las
características indicadas por el fabricante.
Ver el capítulo del presente documento « utilización ».
Toda utilización de esta unidad fuera de las recomendaciones técnicas suministradas no compromete
la responsabilidad de la empresa en caso de incidentes ó accidentes ocurridos durante las
manipulaciones no especificadas.
2.1.2. Responsabilidad del usuario.
El profesor a la hora de realizar una práctica con los alumnos con la unidad, deberá respetar a las
normas de utilización contenidas en la documentación técnica entregada con la unidad.
Deberá igualmente tomar las precauciones necesarias para el trabajo en un laboratorio de química
tales como :
una vestimenta correcta :
bata de algodón
gafas de seguridad
guantes contra quemaduras térmicas
durante las manipulaciones de productos químicos.

una actitud correcta :
no correr, no fumar, ...
almacenado de productos químicos en lugar apropiado.

utilización de cantidades de productos proporcionados al volúmen útil de la unidad.
Esta lista no es definitiva y deberá ser completada por el equipo pedagógico en función de las
necesidades específicas.
página : 8
2.2. RIESGOS
2.2.1. Los productos utilizados
Para el estudio de la evaporación doble efecto se sugiere utilizar como producto a concentrar una
solución acuosa de azúcar.
Estos productos no presentan riesgos químicos particulares.
Sin embargo, es importante para los manipuladores conocer los riesgos relacionados a su utilización.
Es especialmente aconsejado :
leer la ficha de datos de seguridad de los diferentes reactivos a utilizar
de llevar elementos de protección personal :
bat de algodón, gafas de seguridad, guantes de protección durantes las sesione de trabajo y para las
manipulaciones de productos químicos,
de respetar las normas indicadas en el modo operativo.
anotar en un cuaderno todas las operaciones realizadas sobre la planta.
2.2.2. La instalación
La unidad presenta los riesgos generales de las unidades químicas.
Con el fín de asegurarse una utilización de la unidad sin riesgos, se han llevado a cabo varias
protecciones en la unidad.
Protecciones personales contra las quemaduras térmicas
Los riesgos de quemaduras térmicas son localizadas en de la canalización de circulación del vapor
primario (obtenido de la caldera), y en las piezas en vidrio en contacto con la solución azucarada.
El circuito vapor es equipado de válvulas con prolongador térmico, las canalizaciones de circulación
de vapor van calorifugadas.
Los ciclones y los recipientes no van protegidos.
Por ello es importante informar a los operadores del riesgo de quemaduras en este lugar de la planta, espeialmente
durante las operaciones de toma de muestras.
Protección mecánica
El circuito vacío va dotado una válvula de descarga automática que permite poner automáticamente a
la presión atmosférica a la unidad, a fin de no someter a presión las piezas en vidrio.
Sobre la canalización de introducción de la fase concentrada en el ciclón C1, la válvula de descarga

permite limitar la presión en el evaporador EVP1 en caso de mal posicionamiento de la válvula de
alimentación de vapor.
Los riesgos residuales

Varios pictogramas indican los riesgos de quemaduras térmicas y van ubicados en los lugares donde
se encuentran los contactos de las partes calientes o frias.
página : 9

Ref. EVV/2000
MANUAL DE USO
3. REPASOS TEÓRICOS
página : 10
3.1. GENERALIDADES SOBRE LA EVAPORACIÓN
La evaporación es un método de concentración de una solución que contiene :

- un constituyente no volátil
- un solvente volátil (o mucho más volátil que el constituyente)
La concentración de las soluciones por evaporación parcial (o total) de un solvente es un

procedimiento corrientemente utilizado en las industrias :
· farmacéutica
· química
· alimenticia
· cosmética y perfumería
Esta evaporación permite por lo tanto la regeneración del solvente y su reciclado en un

procedimiento, tal como una extracción sólido líquido. Por ejemplo.
El solvente es en la mayoría de los casos el agua.
Con otros tipos de solventes será conveniente operar con todas las condiciones necesarias de
seguridad ( límite de explosividad, punto de encendido y de autoinflamación, toxicidad de los
solventes considerados, etc...)
Ejemplo de soluciones :
· agua / azúcar
· agua / sal
· agua / menta
Otros solventes :
Podemos encontrar, particularmente en los casos de extracción de aromas naturales o de los aceites
esenciales.
· hexano / constituyente.
· ciclohexano / constituyente.
· etanol / constituyente.
· acetona / constituyente.
página : 11
3.1.1. Principio de funcionamiento de un evaporador

El procedimiento de evaporación rápida utiliza generalmente el calor como fuente de energía de
evaporación ( a la excepción de las evaporaciones naturales llamadas lentas : marismas salinas) a la
presión atmosférica o bajo presión reducida.
El principio del evaporador consiste generalmente en aumentar la superficie de contacto de la

solución a evaporar sobre la parte calefactora, por creación de una película líquida, disminuyendo el
espesor de ésta.
La formación de una película líquida tiene por objetivo aumentar las transferencias térmicas y
aumentar la velocidad de evaporación.
La creación de esta película puede efectuarse :

Naturalmente :
· por derrame gravitario a lo largo del tubo , película descente.
· por emulsión generada por una ebullición en el tubo, película ascendente .
Artificialmente :
· por un sistema mecánico : rotores a paletas
evaporador a capa delgada
La evaporación es un procedimiento particularmente adaptado al tratamiento de productos

termosensibles.
El dominio y el conocimiento de los siguientes parámetros permiten disminuir los tiempos de

contacto y operar bajo condiciones de temperatura óptimas :
· temperatura de calefacción
· temperatura de evaporación
· temperaturas de permanencia de los productos ( velocidad de flujo ) por circulación natural
o por circulación forzada
Influencia de la presión reducida

Operando sobre presión reducida, se conjugan dos efectos :
· disminución del punto de ebullición
· crecimiento de la diferencia de temperatura entre el fluido calefactor y el producto tratado
Ventajas
· aumento de la transferencia térmica
· aumento del caudal de evaporación
· bajada de la temperatura de evaporación
· disminución de la temperatura del fluido calefactor
página : 12
3.1.2. Propiedades físicas de los productos

Para definir y conducir una evaporación, es necesario conocer las constantes fisico-químicas de los
productos a tratar, particularmente :
El solvente
· la curva de tensiones de vapor
· la densidad
· el calor latente de vaporización para diferentes temperaturas
· el calor específico
· los límites de explosividad, si es necesario
El concentrado
· la estabilidad térmica ( temperatura de degradación )
· viscosidad de las soluciones en el solvente a diferentes temperaturas
3.1.3. Diferentes tipos de evaporadores

Evaporador a haz tubular
· a película descendente
· a película ascendente
· a circulación forzada por bomba
Evaporador rotativo de lecho delgado
Evaporador a múltiples efectos
página : 13
3.2. LOS EVAPORADORES A EFECTOS MULTIPLES

El vapor de calentado alimenta un primer evaporador. El vapor emitido por la evaporación de la
solución es utilizado para calentar otro evaporador idéntico funcionando a una temperatura inferior.
3.2.1. Los métodos de alimentación
3.2.1.1.Alimentación en paralelo
Cada evaporador es alimentado separadamente por el líquido en cantidad suficiente para compensar
la evaporación del solvente.
Este tipo de evaporación es raramente utilizado, salvo en el caso de los evaporadores de sal.
Su principal ventaja es la comodidad de utilización.
3.2.1.2.Alimentación a corrientes paralelas

Agua evaporada
Vapor
Solución alimentación Solución concentrada
Soluciones evaporadas
Es el método más utilizado.

La solución a concentrar es introducida en primer efecto ( ó etapa ) y los efectos siguientes son
alimentados por la etapa precedente.
La extracción de la solución concentrada es realizada en la etapa final.
La ventaja de este procedimiento es que la solución circula en el mismo sentido del vapor.
La circulación de las soluciones de una etapa a la otra se efectúa naturalmente por caída de presión.
El inconveniente de esta alimentación es que es necesario recalentar la solución a la temperatura de la

primera etapa para no reducir su eficacidad.
página : 14
3.2.1.3.Alimentación a contra-corriente
Agua evaporada
Vapor
Solución alimentación
Solución concentrada Soluciones

evaporadas
La circulación a contra-corriente consiste en introducir la solución a evaporar en la última etapa,

haciendola progresar de etapa en etapa con la ayuda de una bomba para que la solución concentrada
salga en la primera etapa.
La ventaja de esta alimentación es su utilización para las soluciones muy viscosas.
El hecho de tener las soluciones más concentradas en el punto más caliente favorece su
derramamiento por la disminución de su viscosidad.
3.2.2. Comparación de los métodos

La elección de un método de alimentación depende de las condiciones de funcionamiento :
· temperatura de alimentación
· viscocidad de las soluciones
· sensibilidad de las soluciones
· elevación del punto de ebullición
3.2.3. Número de etapas económicas

La elección del número óptimo de etapas es simplemente un problema económico
El precio de coste de un evaporador depende de cinco variables escenciales :
· cargas fijas : amortización y mantención
· mano-de obra
· coste de producción del vapor
· coste del agua de condensación
· coste de la energía
página : 15
3.3. CALCULO DE LOS EVAPORADORES

3.3.1. Balances de materias
3.3.1.1.Balance de materia global
El balance materia de un evaporador es relativamente simple de establecer.
La ecuación que rige el balance global es la siguiente :

Solución de alimentación = solución concentrada + agua evaporada
Qma = Qmc + Qme (1)
Qma = caudal másico de alimentación

Qmc = caudal másico de concentración
Qme = caudal másico de evaporación
3.3.1.2. Balance materia en el constituyente

El balance materia que se puede establecer sobre el constituyente es el siguiente :
constituyente disuelto en la solución inicial = constituyente disuelto en el

concentrado + constituyente disuelto en los condensados
Qma × Ca = Qmc × Cc + Qme × Ce (2)
Ca =concentración en constituyente de la solución de alimentación

Cc = concentración en constituyente de la solución concentrada
Ce = concentración en constituyente de la solución evaporada
Los balances materias son siempre establecidos en peso de manera a evitar los errores debidos a las
variaciones de densidad de los volúmenes.
página : 16
3.3.2. Balance energético

El balance energético de un evaporador recae sobre la relación siguiente :
la cantidad de energía aportada por los elementos entrantes es igual a la de los elementos salientes.
3.3.2.1.En el evaporador
solution
Solución évaporée
evaporada
Circuito de solution
Solución concentrée
concentrada
circuit de
calentado
chauffe
solution
Solución ded'alimentation
alimentación
E1 energía de la solución de alimentación
E1 = Qma × Cpa × Ta (3)
E2 energía de la solución evaporada
E2 = Qme ( Cpe × Teb + Lv ) (4)
E3 energía de la solución concentrada
E3 = Qmc × Cpc × Tc (5)
E4 energía del vapor
E5 energía de las pérdidas térmicas sobre las paredes del evaporador
En nuestro caso, la ecuación se convierte en la igualdad siguiente :
E1 + E4 = E2 + E3 + E5
página : 17
3.3.2.2. En el condensador
sortie froide
Salida TfS
fría TfS
entréecaliente
Entrada chaudeT eE
TeE
sortiech
Salida audeTeTe
caliente SS
Entrada fría TfE

entréefroideTfE
E6 energía del agua condensada
E6 = Qme × Lve (6)
E7 energía del agua de enfriamiento a la entrada del condensador
E7 = Qmf × Cpf × TfE (7)
E8 energía perdida por la solución evaporada
E8 = Qme × Cpe × TeS (8)
E9 energía del agua de enfriamiento a la salida del condensador
E9 = Qmf × Cpf × TfS (9)
E10 energía de las pérdidas térmicas en las paredes del condensador
En nuestro caso, la ecuación se convierte en la igualdad siguiente :
E6 + E7 + E8= E9 + E10
Otros elementos que pueden intervenir en este balance térmico :

· energía total de la sal precipitada
· energía de cristalización
· energía de concentración de las soluciones
· energía de recalentado del vapor evaporado
página : 18
3.3.2.3.Evaluación del coeficiente de intercambio global

La relación que define el coeficiente global es :
Φ = K S ∆Tmlog
Φ Potencia intercambiada a nivel del condensador

S Superficie de intercambio del condensador
K Coeficiente de intercambio global
Evaluación de la potencia intercambiada sobre el condensador
Φ = Potencia del fluido caliente + Potencia del fluido frío

2
cálculo de la diferencia de temperatura promedio ∆Tmlog
∆T1 - ∆T2
∆Tmlog = ln
∆T1
∆T2
En realidad es ∆Tmlog = (∆T1-∆T2)/(Ln(∆T1/∆T2)
∆T1 diferencia de temperatura en la extremidad donde ésta es más elevada
∆T1 diferencia de temperatura en la extremidad donde ésta es menos elevada
página : 19
Ref. EVA/2000
MANUAL PEDAGÓGICO
4. MONTAJE, INSTALACIÓN Y
PUESTA EN MARCHA
página : 20
Advertencia
Todas las reparaciones que se lleven a cabo en las unidades deben efectuarse bajo la
responsabilidad de un técnico PIGNAT.
4.1. SOPORTE DE LA UNIDAD

La concepción de las unidades PIGNAT es de tipo autoportado es decir, que todos los equipos van
montados sobre el bastidor inox.
Sin embargo, es importante fijar el bastidor al suelo o a una pared con el fin de asegurar su
estabilidad.
La elección entre la fijación al suelo o a la pared se deja a criterio del cliente.
4.2. MANTENIMIENTO DE LA UNIDAD

Existen dos tipos de plantas :
Las fijas
Las móviles
Plantas fijas :
Van dotadas de una barra desmontable situada por el frente que facilita su desplazamiento.
Los pies son regulables permitiendo su nivelación.
Plantas móviles :
La movilidad de las plantas se realiza mendiante 4 ruedas con dos con frenos.
Durante su funcionamiento es importante bloquear los frenos.
Durante el mantenimiento, es importante verificar que la unidad no esté conectada a los servicios
(principalmente electricidad, agua y vapor).
4.3. MONTAJE
Montaje en fábrica :
Las plantas viene montadas en la fábrica por técnicos especializados.
Este premontaje permite realizar los ensayos de validación de las plantas antes de su utilización final
por el cliente.
Montaje en destino :
El montaje en destino es normalmente supervisado por técnicos PIGNAT.
La validación del montaje es realizada durante las pruebas de hermeticidad hidráulica es realizada por
un técnico.
página : 21
4.4. NORMAS DE INSTALACIÓN

La unidad debe ser ubicada en un laboratorioo destinado a trabajos prácticos de química,
lo cual implica las condiciones siguientes :
 Ventilación del puesto : los vapores emitidos durante el funcionamiento, la carga y los
vaciados de la unidad deben ser captados y extraídos rápidamente. Un sistema de
captación de vapores lo más próximo de la fuente de emisión es especialmente
aconsejado.
 Alumbrado del puesto de trabajo : La utilización del puesto es compatible con un alumbrado
ambiental conveniente. Es importante verificar que la unidad esté situada en un lugar con
una iluminación correcta.
 Emisión del ruido : El nivel sonoro originado por la unidad no sobrepasa los 70 dB. La
emisión de ruido es producidad por los motores de las diferentes bombas.
 Normas de seguridad : Las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la utilización de la
unidad deberán serán estar visibles . La planta va dotada de pictogramas que señalan los
riesgos potenciales.
4.5. CONEXIONES A LOS SERVICIOS

La conexión se efecturá a las diferentes tomas situadas en la proximidad de la unidad, dispopniendo
de las correspondientes válvulas y dispositivos de corte de seguridad.
La unidad está equipada de sus propias válvulas de aislamiento, accesibles facilmente por el
operador.
Conexión eléctrica :
La conexión eléctrica es realizada mediante una toma normalizada.
Es necesario disponer en la red eléctrica de una protección diferencial general de alta sensibilidad
30mA.
página : 22
4.6. PUESTA EN MARCHA

4.6.1. Comprensión de la instalación
Antes de comenzar toda operación, es importante comprender el funcionamiento de la instalación.
Con la ayuda del esquema de funcionamiento :
Seguir las canalizaciones y estudiar las diferentes posibilidades de circulación de los fluidos.
En el cuadro el sinóptico :
Ubicar las diferentes indicaciones dadas sobre el sinóptico.
4.6.2. Comprobación de las conexiones.
4.6.3. Comprobar las conexiones de agua del intercambiador térmico ECH.
Comprobar la conexión del circuito vapor.
Comprobar la toma del desagüe de las canalizaciones del circuito de vapor y del agua de
refrigeración.
Poner bajo tensión el cuadro de mandos mediante el interruptor general : el piloto luminoso blanco
indicará que la unidad está conectada .
Conectar la caldera de vapor y remitirse a las condiciones de funcionamiento proporcionadas por el
fabricante.
4.6.4. Reglaje de las válvulas
Regulación de los caudales de trasiego :
Verificar la posición de válvula V3 en función del modo de funcionamiento de la instalación :
Simple efecto : el vapor procedente de la caldera de vapor debe alimentar el evaporador EV2.
Doble efecto : el vapor procedente de la caldera de vapor debe alimentar el evaporador EV1.
Todas las válvulas están cerradas.
página : 23

Ref. EVV/2000
MANUAL DE USO
5. PRESENTACIÓN DE LA UNIDAD
página : 24
5.1. FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LA UNIDAD

5.1.1. Descripción general
Evaporadores :
Los dos evaporadores están constituidos por :
Un tubo interno de acero inoxidable para circulación del vapor.
Una columna de vidrio para circulación de la disolución a concentrar.
El líquido a concentrar se introduce a través de la parte inferior del evaporador y se pone a hervir
como resultado del contacto con la pred caliente del evaporador.
A causa de la ebulición, el líquido empieza a ascender por la superficie del tubo de acero y formando
una película líquida.
El disolvente se evapora lentamente.
La mezcla líquido gas obtenida en cabeza del evaporador es traspasada a un ciclón.
Ciclón :
La mezcla de líquido y gas saliendo del evaporador llega a la periferia superior del ciclón.
La velocidad de mezcla resulta reducida rapidamente : la fase líquida concentrada cae al fondo del
ciclón mientras los vapores del disolvente salen por la abertura superior del ciclón.
Evacuación
vapor
Entrada mezcla
liquido / vapor
Evacuación
líquido
Condensador :
El condensador está compuesto por :
Un serpentín interno de acero inoxidable con superficie 0,2 m² para la circulación del agua de
refrigeración.
Un recipiente de vidrio.
Los vapores llegan a la cabeza del condensador y se condensan en toda la superficie del serpentin
acero y derraman hacía la base del condensador.
En la base del recipiente de vidrio (cuerpo del condensador), hay una graduación que permite medir
el caudal de los condensados por volumen y medición del tiempo.
Las temperaturas en la entrada y en la salida para el vapor y el agua fría son medidos para aceder a los
balances térmicos en el condensador.
página : 25
5.1.2. Funcionamiento en modo simple efecto

El funcionamiento en modo simple efecto utiliza el primer nivel de evaporación EVP1.
En este modo, se conecta directamente la salida de vapor del ciclon C1 a la entrada de vapores en el
condensador.
La disolución a concentrar se prepara en la depósito R1. La bomba P1 alimenta el evaporador EVP1
con un caudal regulable según las condiciones experimentales.
El evaporador resulta calentado a causa de los vapores.
El agua de la disolución a concentrar se evapora en contacto con la pared caliente del tubo interno de
acero y se separa la mezcla en el ciclón C1.
Los vapores de agua pasan al condensador ECH donde condensan y se enfrian antes de almacenarse
en el recipiente R3.
El líquido concentrado se trasiega a la base del ciclón y se almacena enel recipiente R2.
La evaporación simple efecto se puede llevar a cabo a presión atmosférica o a presión reducida
utilizando la bomba de vacío P2.
5.1.3. Funcionamiento en modo doble efecto

El funcionamiento en modo simple efecto utiliza el primer nivel de evaporación EV1 y luego el
segundo nivel EV2.
El evaporador EV1 trabaja a presión atmosférica y el evaporador EV2 a presión reducida.
La disolución a concentrar se prepara en el depósito R1. La bomba P1 alimenta el evaporador EV1.
El agua de la disolución a concentrar se evapora en contacto con la pared caliente del tubo interno de
acero y se separa la mezcla en el ciclón C1.
Los vapores de agua obtenidos permiten el calentamiento del segundo evaporador EV2.
El líquido concentrado en el primer evaporador sirve de alimentación para el segundo evaporador
EV2.
La electroválvula EV1 permite alimentar en continuo EV2 por medio de un detector de nivel en el
ciclón.
El evaporador EV2 funciona de la misma manera que EV1 y produce una disolución aún más
concentrada que se separa en el ciclon C2 y se almacena en el depósito R2.
Los vapores de agua se pasan al condensador ECH donde se condensan y se enfrian antes de
almacenarse en el depósito R3.
página : 26
5.2. ESQUEMA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO
ECH3
P1
ECH2
página : 27
5.3. DESCRIPCIÓN TÉCNICA

5.3.1. Descripción de los números
EVP1 primer nivel de evaporación.
EVP2 segundo nivel de evaporación.
C1 ciclón de separación Gas- Líquido del primer evaporador.
C2 ciclón de separación Gas- Líquido del segundo evaporador.
ECH1 condensador con serpentin de acero y cuerpo de vidrio.
P1 bomba dosificadora para la alimentación del primer nivel de evaporación.
P2 bomba de vacío.
R1 depósito de alimentación, capacidad 60 litros.
R2 depósito de almacenamiento de la fase concentrada, capacidad 10 litros.
R3 receta de almacenamiento de la fase evaporada, capacidad 10 litros.
PR1 purgador de vapor para el primer nivel.
ECH2 liebig de enfriamiento de los condensados saliendo del tubo de calentamiento de EVP1
ECH3 liebig de enfríamiento de los condensados saliendo del tubo de calentamiento de EVP2
página : 28
5.3.2. Panel de control

Un interruptor general.
Una puesta en funcionamiento y 1 paro de emergencia.
uno interruptor Marcha/Paro para la bomba dosificadora
Un selector dos vías para el funcionamiento de la electroválvula en modo AUTOMATICO o
MANUAL con lámpara luminosa.
Una pantalla táctil: 6 indicaciones digitales de temperaturas a través del sinóptico de la pantalla táctil.
Adquisición de datos (USB).
Pantalla táctil: Ver la noticia de utilización (Doc Tecnico)
página : 29
5.4. MEDIDAS
5.4.1. Indicación de temperaturas
T1 temperatura de la disolución de alimentación del primer evaporador.
T2 temperatura de salida de la disolución concentrada en el primer nivel de evaporación.
T3 temperatura de salida de la disolución evaporada en el segundo nivel de evaporación.
T4 temperatura de salida de los condensados del condensador.
T5 temperatura de entrada de agua fría en el condensador.
T6 temperatura de salida de agua fría en el condensador.
5.4.2. Indicación de presiones

PI1 presión del circuito vapor en la entrada del primer evaporador.
PI2 presión reducida en el circuito de vacío.
5.4.3. Indicación de caudales

FI1 caudal del agua de enfriamiento en el condensador.
5.4.4. Indicación de nivel

LL1 nivel de trasiego automático del primer ciclón para funcionamiento en modo doble efecto.
5.5. VÁLVULAS
V1 vacíado del circuito de alimentación de EV1
V2 orientación de la fase concentrada saliendo de EV1 hacía el depósito de almacenamiento para
modo simple efecto.
V3 selección del circuito fase concentrada para el funcionamiento en modo doble efecto.
V4 vacíado del circuito de fase concentrada de EV1.
V5 orientación de la fase concentrada saliendo de EV2 hacía el depósito de almacenamiento R2
para modo doble efecto.
V6 muestreo de la fase concentrada.
V7 para medición del caudal de la fase concentrada.
V8 vacíado del depósito R2.
V9 para medición del caudal de la fase evaporada.
V10 vaciado del depósito R3.
V11 regulación de la presión reducida
V12 aislamiento de vacío de los depósitos R1 y R2.
V13 venteo para los depósitos R1 y R2.
V14 aislamiento de la alimentación de agua fría
página : 30
V15 regulación del caudal de agua fría en el condensador

V16 alimentación en agua fría de los liebigs
V17 aislamiento de la alimentación de vapor
V18 regulación del caudal de vapor de calefacción.
V19 vaciado del depósito R1.
EV1 electroválvula de regulación del trasiego en el primer evaporador
5.6. MATERIAL ADICIONAL NECESARIO PARA LA

OPERACIÓN
Una balanza de tipo industrial, carga máxima 50 Kg.
Un bidón de 30 litros.
Dos vasos de de 5 litros.
Una probeta de 1 litro.
Un agitador manual (por ejemplo de varilla).
Frascos para muestras, 50 ml.
Dos cronómetros.
Un refractometro de laboratorio.
Curva de calibración del indice de refracción de la disolución de azúcar en función de la
concentración.
página : 31
5.7. PREPARACIÓN DE LA DISOLUCIÓN INICIAL

5.7.1. Concentración de la disolución inicial
La solución a evaporar es una mezcla de azucar y agua.
La concentración inicial es :
10 g de glucosa por 100 g de agua desmineralizada.
Esta solución puede ser obtenida a partir de agua desmineralizada y azucar
cristalizado
5.7.2. Preparación de la disolución

Pesar 30 kg de agua demineralizada.
Verter el agua en el depósito R1 cuidando que esté limpio y completamente vacío.
Pesar 3000 g de azucar cristalizado.
Verter en un recipiente de plástico 4 litros del agua del depósito R1.
Disolver en éste 1kg de zucar.
Vaciar la solución obtenida en el depósito R1 evitando vaciar el azucar no disuelto.
Proceder de esta manera varias veces hasta disolver todo el azucar.
Homogeneizar la solución azucarada obtenida mediante un agitador manual (tipo cocina)
Tomar una muestra de esta solución.
Medir su indice de refracción y , mediante la curva de calibración, comprobar la concentración en
azúcar obtenida.
5.8. MÉTODO DE ANÁLISIS

5.8.1. Técnica de analisis
El análisis de las muestras se realizará mediante la medida del índice de refracción.
Este análisis se hará con un refractómetro de laboratorio termostatizado a 20ºC. procurando que ésta
sea la temperatura ambiente en el laboratorio.
5.8.2. Curva de calibración
La curva de calibración permite conocer directamente la concentración de la muentra de la solución
azucarada mediante la medida de su índice de refracción.
En el anexo de la documnetación figura una curva de calibración de la concentración de la solución
en función del índice de refracción.
Realización de la curva de calibración :

Preparar una decena de soluciones de concentración de azucar a partir de glucosa y agua
desmineralizada.
Las concentraciones irán desde 0 a 50g de azúcar en 100g de agua.
Medir el índice de refracción de cada solución hecha.
página : 32
Trazar en un gráfico la curva del índice de refracción en función de la concentrción de azúcar.
página : 33
5.8.3. Metodo de muestreo

Abriendo la válvula de toma de muestras, dejar fluir durante 4 o 5 segundos la solución en un vaso de
100ml a fin de eliminar el volumen de retención de la válvula.
Verter en un frasco limpio el volumen de solución necesario para la medida.
Dejar enfriar la solución muestra.
Toma de muestras.
Las toams de muestras se realizan a través de las válvulas.
concentración de la solución de alimentación : V1.
concentración de la solución concentrada evaporador 1º :V4.
concentración de la solución concentrada evaporador 2º :V6.
concentración global de la fase concentrada del depósito R2 : V8.
concentración global de la fase evaporada del depósito R3 : V10.
Atención :
Después de un funcionamiento bajo presión reducida, no es posible tomar muestras en modo
contínuo.
Las muestras deberán ser tomadas al final de la operación, después de haber puesto la unidad a
presión atmoférica.
5.8.4. Análisis de las muestras.

Medir el índice de refracción de cada muestra obtenida.
Anotarr la concentración de azúcar de la muestra en la curva de calibración
5.9. CALIBRACIÓN DE LA BOMBA DOSIFICADORA

5.9.1. Objetivo
El caudal de alimentación de la solución a concentrar es uno de lo parámetros importantes.
Cada evaporador tiene una capacidad máxima de evaporación dependiente de las condiciones de
calentamiento (caudal de vapor, superficie de intercambio)
Así, en función del valor del caudal de alimentación, los resultados variarán.
5.9.2. Modo operativo
Es preferible utilizar la solución de alimentación para conocer el caudal exacto.
Este puede variar en función de la viscosidad y de la densidad del producto.
Técnica de medida del caudal por volumetría :

Llenar el depósito R1 con la solución de alimentación.
Abrir la válvula V1 y colocar debajo un vaso de 5 litros
Conectar la bomba en el cuadro de mandos
Actuar sobre la bomba regulando su caudal máximo hasta que el líquido salga por la
válvula,comprobando que el tubo de alimentación esté libre de burbujas.
Parar la bomba.
Colocar una probeta de un litro en la salida de la válvula V1
Ajustar el caudal de la bomba al 10%
Conectar la bomba en el cuadro de mandos y poner en marcha el cronómetro.
Medir el tiempo necesario para obtener 1 litro de líquido en la probeta.
página : 34
Calcular el caudal mediante la relación :
volumen
Qv =
tiempo
Realizar diferentes medidas volumétricas con diversos ajustes de la bomba desde 0 a 100%.
En la gráfica trazar la curva Caudal=f (% de regulación).
Esta curva viene representada en el anexo del documento.
página : 35
5.10. PUESTA EN VACÍO DE LA UNIDAD

5.10.1.Nota :
La bomba P2 permite crear el vacio en la unidad.
En modo de simple efecto: el evaporador funciona a presión atmosférica o con presión reducida.
En modo de doble efecto : el primer evaporador funciona a presión atmosférica y el segundo a
presión reducida.
Advertencia:
La puesta en vacío debe preferentemente :
• Ser realizada en el inicio del proceso de forma de evitar los riesgos que comportan las soluciones
concentradas con el vapor por efecto de la evaporación flash
Si sin embargo se llevase a cabo una regulación después del inicio del proceso, es aconsejable
realizar pequeños cambios de presión antes de alcanzar la presión final.
• Ser realizada cuando los depósitos R2 y R3 estén vacíos. En efecto, el vaciado de estos depósitos
no es posible sin perturbar el valor de vacío.
5.10.2. Puesta en vacio

Cerrar las válvulas de vaciado : V8, V10, V1, V4, V6
Cerrar la válvula V13 y abrir completamente las válvulas V12 y V11
Conectar la bomba de vacío P2 en el cuadro de mandos.
Cerrar lenta y progresivamente la válvual V11 para ajustar la presión en el manómetro PI2.
La apertura de la válvula V11permite crear un escape continuo de aire equilibrando así el excedente
de vacío proporcionado por la bomba.
Límites posibles :
Para el proceso en modo de simple efecto : la presión mínima es 300 mBars Abs.
Para el proceso en modo de doble efecto : la presión mínima es 500 mBars Abs.
5.10.3.Puesta en presión atmosférica P2.

Apagar la bomba P2
Abrir la válvula V13 para que la presión en la unidad vuelva al valor de la presión atmosférica leida
en el manómetro P12.
página : 36
5.10.4.Aislamiento de la unidad durante el proceso de evaporación

5.10.4.1.Advertencias
Debido a un error de operación podría ser necesario el vaciado de los depósitos R2 y R3 durante el
proceso.
El vaciado es posible sin perturbar la presión del proceso si el volumen de líquido en los depósitos es
inferior a 3 litros. Más allá de esa cantidad habrá riesgos de taponamiento en el condensador y en la
extracción de la fase concentrada.
Atención :
Vigilar durante toda la operación los niveles en las ampollas volumétricas del condensador y de
extracción de la fase concentrada.
Debido a la puesta bajo presión de las ampollas, vigilar que la presión del proceso en P12 permanezca
constante a fin de no desequilibrar las condiciones del proceso de evaporación.
5.10.4.2.Método
Aislar los dos depósitos cerrando las válvulas V7, V9 y V12.
Poner a presión atmosférica los depósitos abriendo la vávula V13.
Puesto que los depósitos están a presión atmosférica, abrir las válvulas de vaciado V8 y V10.
Verter la solución en el depósito R1 si se desea regenerar la solución, o bien vaciarla en
recipientes separados.
Cuando los depósitos estén vacios, cerrar V8 y V10, y depués V13.

Abrir debilmente la válvula V12 hasta que la presión se reestablezca en PI2.
página : 37
5.11. MEDIDA DE LOS CAUDALES

5.11.1.Definición
Los diferentes caudales son determinados mediante medida volumétrica.
La volumetría viene definida por la relación :
volumen
Qv =
tiempo
volumen de producto obtenido durante el tiempo medido.
Se definen dos categorías de caudales :

Caudal instantáneo : medido en un momento dado.
Caudal global : medido a todo lo largo de todo el proceso.
5.11.2.Medida instanstánea de los caudales
5.11.2.1. Medida fase condensada (en el condensador)
Esta medida permite conocer el caudal de los condensados en el intercambiador
Método :
Proveerse de un cronómetro
Cerrar la válvula V9.
Poner en marcha el cronómetro cuando el líquido alcance la primera marca de nivel de la ampolla en
la base del condensador..
Parar el cronómetro cuando el líquido alcance la segunda marca de la ampolla.
Abrir la válvula V9.
Calcular el caudal en función de la relation indicada abajo.

Nota :el volumen de líquido entre las dos marcas figura en la ampolla.
5.11.2.2.Medida de caudal de la fase concentrada

Esta medidad permite conocer el caudal de la fase concentrada final.
Método :
Proveerse de un cronómetro.
Cerrar la válvula V7.
Poner en marcha el cronómetro cuando el líquido alcance la primera marca de nivel de la ampolla
volumétrica.
Parar el cronómetro cuando el líquido alcance la segunda marca.
Abrir la válvula V7.
Calcular el caudal en función de la relación anterior.
Rem :e l volumen de líquido entre las dos marcas de la ampolla viene indicado en ésta.
página : 38
5.11.2.3.Medida caudal condensados vapor

Este caudal puede ser medido si la opción de refrigeración está incluida en la unidad.
Proveerse de un cronómetro.
Colocar una probeta de 1 litro debajo del refrigerante y abrir la válvula de toma volumétrica.
Poner en marcha el cronómetro.
Parar el cronómetro cuando el nivel de los condensados en la probeta alcance un volumen de 500ml.
Calcular el caudal mediante la fórmula arriba indicada.
Hay dos caudales de condensados de vapor a medir.

Caudal de condensados provenientes del vapor de calentamiento EV1
Caudal de condensados de vapor provenientes de EV2 correspondiente al caudal de vapor
evaporado en EV1.
5.11.3.Medida global de caudales

El caudal global se calcula en relación con los depósitos R2 y R3.
En la hoja de datos de ensayo obtenidos, anotar el tiempo y los volúmenes de líquido en los
depósitos.
Deducir los caudales mediante la fórmula anterior.
página : 39
5.12. PREPARACIÓN DE LA UNIDAD

5.12.1. Comprobación de las conexiones
5.12.1.1.Conexiones eléctricas
Conectar el interruptor general en el cuadro de mandos, se encenderá el piloto blanco.
Poner la unidad en conexión mediante el botón « puesta en tensión », se encenderá el piloto verde.
El indicador de temperatura quedará en funcionamiento e indicará la temperatura definida por el
selector multicanal.
5.12.1.2.Conexiones con agua de refrigeración.

Comprobar que el tubo flexible de evacuación del agua en la salida del condensador está situado en el
desagüe.
Abrir la válvula de corte general de agua del laboratorio.
Abrir la válvula V14 y ajustar el caudal a 250 L/h mediante V15 en el caudalímetro FI1.
5.12.1.3.Conexiones del vapor
Protejer las manos con guantes de protección térmica.
Comprobar que las válvulas V17 y V18 están cerradas

Abrir completamente el presostato (sentido de apertura marcado en la llave).
Abrir la válvula del generador de vapor.
Abrir la válvula de corte V17 y después lentamente la válvula V18.
Purgar los vapores condensados cerrando progresivamente el presostato a fin de ajustar la presión a
0,5bar relativo.
Dejar purgar los condensados mediante el purgador PR1.
Cuando el vapor comience a salir por el purgador, cerrar la válvula V17
5.12.2.Comprobaciones antes de comenzar las operaciones.
Los depósitos R1-R2-R3 deben estar vacios y limpios
Los evaporadores EV1 y EV2 y los ciclones C1 y C2 deberán estar vacios y limpios.
página : 40
5.13. CONFIGURACIÓN PARA EL MODO SIMPLE EFECTO

En función de la elección el proceso a estudiar en simple o doble efecto, la configuración de la planta
será diferente.
La modificación de la configuration de la planta piloto deberá ser realizada cuando ésta esté
fría y vacía.
5.13.1.Conexión ciclón C1/Intercambiador
Realizar la conexión entre la salida del vapor del ciclón C1 y el condensador ECH mediante el tramo
derecho de vidrio.
A fin de facilitar el paso de los vapores, la pendiente de esta canalización deberá ser orientada hacia
el condensador.
Colocar la sonda T3 en la toma disponible en el tramo derecho.
5.13.2.Configuración de las válvulas

En el cuadro de mandos, poner en posición 0 el botón de accionamiento de la electroválvula EV1
Válvulas cerradas :
V17 y V18 en el circuito de vapor.
V14, V15 y V16 en el circuito de agua de refrigeración.
V1, V3, V4, V5, V6, V8, V10, V12 en el circuito del proceso.
Válvulas abiertas :
V2, V7, V9 en el circuito circuito de proceso.
V11 y V13 en el circuito de vacío.
5.13.3.Alimentación del evaporador EV1

Preparar la solución de alimentación en el depósito R1 (ver el capítulo correspondiente)
Sumergir la canalización de aspiración de la bomba en el depósito R1 así como los tubos flexibles de
vaciado de los dos depósitos.
Volver a colocar la tapa del depósito R1
Conectar la bomba P1 y ajustar el caudal al valor deseado sirviéndose de la curva de calibración.
Hacer una medida volumétrica del caudal de alimmentación mediante la apertura de la válvula V1,
utilizando la probeta de 1 litro (ver el capítulo de calibración de la bomba de alimentación).
Este valor de caudal de alimentación es importante para el cálculo de los balances de materias.
Después de la medida volumétrica del caudal de alimentación, cerrar V1 a fin de llenar el evaporador
EV1 hasta alcanzar el nivel detectado por el transmisor L1 en el ciclón C1.
Parar la bomba, sin modificar su ajuste, antes de poner el evaporador a régimen.
página : 41
5.14. CONFIGURACIÓN PARA EL MODO DOBLE EFECTO

En función de la elección del proceso a estudiar, simple o doble efecto, se realizará la modificación
de la planta.
La modificación de la configuración de la planta deberá realizarse cuando ésta esté fría y vacía.
5.14.1.Conexión al ciclón C1/EVP2
Realizar la conexión entre la salida de vapor del ciclón C1 a la entrada de la toma inox. del segundo
evaporador, mediante el codo de vidrio.
5.14.2.Conexión al ciclón C2/ECH
Faire la conexión entre la salida de vapor del ciclón C2 y la entrada del condensador mediante el codo
de vidrio.
Nota : los codos no son idénticos y se distinguen facilmente por el tipo de conexión.
5.14.3.Configuración de las válvulas
Poner en poición AUTO el botón de accionamiento de la electroválvula EV1.
Válvulas cerradas :
V17 y V18 en el circuito de vapor.
V14, V15 y V16 en el circuito de agua de refrigeración.
V1, V2, V4, V6, V8, V10, V12 en el circuito de proceso.
Válvulas abiertas :
V3, V5, V7, V9 en el circuito de proceso.
V11 y V13 en el circuito de vacío .
5.14.4.Alimentación de los evaoradores EVP1 y EVP2.

La alimentación del segundo evaporador está ligada al funcionamiento del primero.
El caudal de alimentación de EVP2 corresponde al caudal de la solución concentrada en la base del
ciclón C1.
La alimentación se realiza en función de la detección del nivel LL1 en el ciclón C1 que produce la
apertura de la electroválvula EV1.
En el evaporador EVP2 al estar con presión reducida, la solución es aspirada y entra en la base del
EVP2 para sufrir un segundo proceso de evaporación.
Seguir con el modo operativo para llenar EVP1.
página : 42
FUNCIONAMIENTO
5.14.5. En el comienzo de cada experimentación.
(para cada etapa del experimento, consultar los capítulos relacionados con éste)
Conprobación de la instalación :
 Elegir la configuración SIMPLE EFECTO o DOBLE EFECTO y posicionar las válvulas
en su configuración.
 Comprobar que los depósitos estén limpios y vacios.
 Preparar la solucion a concentrar con 10g de azúcar / 100 g de agua, pesar la masa de la
solución así preparada.
Comprobación de los servicios :

 Conectar el cuadro de mandos.
 Llenar el depósito de la caldera con 20 litros de agua desmineralizada .
 Conectar la caldera de vapor sin abrir las vávulas V17 y V18.
 Comprobar que los tubos flexibles de evacuación (condensador, liebig, vaciado) estén
situados en el sumidero.
 Abrir las válvulas V14 y V15 y ajustar el caudal de agua en el condensador a 200l/h
 Abrir ligeramente la válvula V16 para alimentar de agua de rifregeración a los dos
liebigs.
Alimentación de los evaporadores :

 Situar la canalización de aspiración de la bombaa de alimentación P1 en el depósito R1.
 Conectar la bomba P1 en el cuadro de mandos.
 Poner en marcha la bomba regulando el caudal al máximo.
 Ajustar el caudal en función :
50 % si la configuración es en simple efecto.
70 % si la configuración es en doble efecto.
Efectuar la medida del caudal de alimentación por volumetría abriendo la válvula V1.
 Rellenar los evaporadores hasta sus niveles de desbordamiento.
para EVP1 : hasta el nivel LL1.
para EVP2 : hasta que la solución desborde en la ampolla de dosificación. Es necesario
poner la apertura de EV1 en la posición 1 .
Regulación de la presión de trabajo :

Para el proceso en modo de simple efecto : la presión mínima es de 300 mBars Abs.
Para el proceso en modo de doble efecto : la presión mínima es de 500 mBars Abs.
 Conectar la bomba de vacío P2.
 Crear un venteo mediante la válvula V11 para establecer la presión en el proceso.
Alimentación con vapor

 Protegerse las manos con guantes adecuados.
 Abrir la válvula V14 y después lentamente la V15.
 Dejar purgar los condensados en la salida del purgador PR1.
 Regular la presión de vapor en el manómetro PI1 a 0,5 bar relativo.
El valor de la presión de entrada del evaporador no debe ser excesiva, debiendo ser inferior a un bar relativo a fin de
evitar el taponado de la primera etapa de evaporación.
página : 43
Cuando todos los parámetros operacionales indicados anteriormente estén ajustados, poner en marcha
el cronómetro y comenzar los trabajos experimentales para controlar el proceso.
5.14.6.Puesta a régimen del evaporador
La puesta a régimen de la evaporación se llevará a cabo cuando las condiciones operativas sean
estables.
Esta puesta a régimen es del orden de 15 minutos.
5.14.7.Control del proceso

Las condiciones operativas deben ser vigiladas y ajustadas según las condiciones definidas en el
protocolo operativo.
las condiciones operativas constantes :

caudal de alimentación : % de la bomba.
presión de proceso para los dos evaporadores
presión de vapor.
caudal de agua fría : FI1
El control del proceso se realiza para seguir los parámetros operativos que deberán ser
obtenidos cada 20 minutos y anotados en la hoja de prácticas incluida en el anexo.
Los datos experimentales son los siguientes :
la duración despues del comienzo de la evaporación.
las temperaturas :
T1 : alimentación en la base del evaporador
T2 : salida de la mezcal líquido-vapor en la salida del evaporador
T3 : salida o entrada de vapor en el intercambiador.
T4 : salida de condensados del intercambiador.
T5 : entrada de agua fría en el condensador.
T6 : salida de agua fría en el condensador.
los volúmenes :
Volumen en el depósito R2.
Volumen en el depósito R3.
Volumen de condensados en la salida del elemento calefactor de salida de EVP2. (medida en
continuo)
les caudales : medidos por volumetría
Caudal de vapor de calentamiento de EVP1.
Caudal de vapor de calentamiento de EVP2.
Caudal de la solución concentrada en la salida de EVP2.
Caudal de condensados en la salida del condensador ECH1.
Proseguir con la evaporación mientras el depósito R1 contenga solución.
página : 44
5.14.8.Fin de la operación
 Cerrar las válvulas V17 y V18 del circuito de vapor (provistos de guantes de protección)
 Apagar la caldera de vapor.
 Apagar la bomba de vacío.
 Abrir las válvulas V11 y V13 a fin de poner a presión atmosférica el circuito.
 Cerrar las válvulas V14-V15-V16 en los circuitos de refrigeración del condensador y
liebig cuando las temperaturas TI2 y TI3 sean inferiores a 60 °C.
 Vaciar los depósitos R1 y R2 en los vasos y pesar la masa de las soluciones obtenidas.
 Pesar la masa de la solución depositada en R1.
 Tomar una muestra de cada solución y determinar su concentración.
5.14.9.Paro de la operación :
 Vaciar completamente la unidad.
 Enjuagar el evaporador con agua desmineralizada. (muy importante, a fin de evitar el
desarollo bacteriano en el interior de los evaporadores y depósitos)
 Parar la unidad.

5.14.10.Estudio de los resultados
 Determinación de los balances globales en el soluto.
 Determinación del balance témico del condensador.
 Determinación del balance térmico de los evaporadores (por aproximación).
 Determinación del rendimiento de la evaporación.
página : 45
5.15. VACÍADO DE LA INSTALACIÓN
5.15.1.Vacíado durante la operación

Definición :
En el curso de la operación, los condensados de vapor en la salida del segundo evaporador del liebig
(en configuración de doble efecto), la solución almacenada en el depósito R2 y la solución evaporada
almacenada en el depósito R3, pueden ser vaciados en el depósito R1 permitiendo así la regeneración
de la solución preparada inicialmente.
Precaución :
Esta regeneración se puede realizar en el curso de una operación a fin de reducir los volúmenes de
solución a preparar, pero se desaconseja del todo regenerar una solución azucarada de una sesión de
trabajo a otra a fin de evitar el desarrollo bacteriano.
Procedimiento :
Vaciar los depósitos R2 y R3 en el R1 utilizando las válvulas V8 y V10.
Vaciar el vaso que contiene los condensados de vapor del segundo EVP2 del liebig.
Homogeneizar bien la solución obtenida con un agitador manual.
Tomar una muestra de esta solución y medir su índice de refracción.
Deducir su concentración mediante la curva de calibración.
Medir su volumen bien mediante pesada o por medida precisa del volumen.
Si fuese necesario, añadir una cantidad de agua desmineralizada para volver a la concentración inicial
de 10g. de azúcar por 100g. de agua.
5.15.2.Vacíado al final de la operación

Esperar a que las soluciones se enfríen a temperatura ambiente : T° < a 35 °C
Vaciar los depósitos R1 y R2 en el R1 abriendo las válvulas V8 y V10.
Vaciar R1 abriendo la válvula V19 y utilizando un vaso de precipitados.
Verter la solución al desagüe.
Limpiar el depósito con agua a fin de eliminar la presencia de agua azucarada.
Proceder a la limpieza del evaporador.
Proceder al paro del evaporador.
página : 46
5.16. LIMPIEZA DE LA INSTALACIÓN

5.16.1.Objetivos
Es imperativo proceder al enjuagado de la unidad por las siguientes razones :
Cristalización del azúcar en las canalizaciones.
Desarrollo bacteriano en las diferentes partes de la unidad.
Dificultades de puesta a régimen de la unidad.
Los circuitos de proceso serán enjuagados con agua desmineralizada.

Según las concentraciones de fase obtenidas, será necesario hacer uno o varios lavados a fin de
eliminar toda presencia de azúcar.
5.16.2.Método
Llenar el depósito R1 con agua desmineralizada.
Elegir la configuración de doble o simple efecto (en función del proceso utilizado)
Regular el caudal de la bomba P1 a 15 l/h (100 %) y ponerla en marcha.
Alimentar el evaporador convapor y regular la presión inferior a 1 bar relativo.
Alimentar el condesador con agua fría y ajustar el cauda a 250 l/h.
Poner el circuito a presión reducida encendiendo la bomba P2 y ajustar la presión a 500 mBars
absolutos.
Dejar evaporar el agua contenida en el depósito R1 tomando muestras en los circuitos de las fases de
alimentación y concentrado (poner la unidad en situación de venteo para facilitar las tomas de
muestras).
Medir el índice de refracción de las muestras para comprobar la eficiencia del lavado del circuito ,
éste debe ser igual a 1,333, es decir el del agua desmineralizada.
Parar la unidad cuando toda el agua haya sido evaporada, utilizando el procedimiento de parada final
del proceso.
Volver al procedimiento de enjuagado del circuito si las medidas de índice de refracción muestran la
presencia de azúcar (valor superior a 1,333).
5.16.3.Limpieza externa
Es necesario limpiar los elementos exteriores y si ello fuese necesario, limpiar las zonas exteriores del
evaporador en las que pueden haber caido gotas de solución azucarada.
Utilizar un paño mojado con agua desmineralizada.
Limpiar así mismo el suelo en la proximidad de la unidad a fin de eliminar los residuos de solución
azucarada.
página : 47
5.17. PARO DE LA INSTALACIÓN

5.17.1. Paro durante el proceso o paro de emergencia
 Cerrar la válvula de alimentación general de vapor V17.

 Apagar la bomba P1.
 Apagar la bomba P21.
 Poner en venteo la unidad mediante la válvula V13.
 Vigilar la circulación de agua fría en el condensador cuando las temperaturas sean
superiores a 55ºC.
 Esperar a que las temperaturas de las soluciones sean inferiores a 45ºC antes de actuar en
la unidad, particularmente para las opeeraciones de vaciado.
5.17.2. Paro al final del proceso.-

Vaciar completamente la unidad (ver el capítulo correspondiente)
Enjuagar los circuitos de la unidad (ver el capítulo correspondiente)
Proceso de paro :
 Cerrrar la vávula de alimentación general de vapor V17 así como la válvula de corte de
la caldera.
 Apagar la caldera.
 Apagar la bomba de alimentación P1.
 Apagar la bomba de vacío P2
 Poner la unidad en situación de venteo mediante la válvula V13.
 Cerrar la circulación de agua frría mediante las válvulas V14, V15 y V16 así como la
válvula de corte de la red de agua del laboratorio.
 Apagar el cuadro de mandos mediante el interruptor general
 Dejar abiertas las válvulas siguientes :
 V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, V7, V8, V9, V11, V12, V13.
5.18. ALMACENAMIENTO DE LA UNIDAD

La unidad deberá ser guardada en las siguientes condiciones:
Con los circuitos enjuados
Vacía
Puesta en situación de paro
Después de haber efectuado una limpieza exterior.
Cerrar las vávulas de corte de los diferentes servicios : agua, vapor.

Cortar la alimentación eléctrica.
página : 48

Ref. EVV/2000
MANUAL DE USO
6. CONCENTRACIÓN DE UNA
DISOLUCIÓN ACUOSA
AZUCARADA
página : 49
6.1. CONDICIONES DE TRABAJO
6.1.1. Evaporación simple efecto

• Naturaleza de la solución a concentra : agua/azúcar
• Volumen inicial de soluión : 30 Litros
• Concentración de la solución inicial : 10 g / 100 g de solvente
• Caudal de alimentación : 50 % aprox. 9 l/h.
• Presión del proceso : P atm.
• Presión de vapor : 1,4 bars absolutos
• Caudal de agua fría : 250 l/h
6.1.2. Evaporación doble efecto

• Naturaleza de la solución a concentrar : agua/azúcar
• Volumen inicial de solución : 30 Litros
• Concentración de la solución inicial : 10 g / 100 g de solvente
• Caudal de alimentaión : 70 % aprox. 10 l/h.
• Presión del proceso EVP1: P atm.
• Presión de proceso EVP2 : 500 mBars Absolutos
• Presión de vapor : 1,4 bars absolutos
• Caudal agua fría : 250 l/h
página : 50
6.2. RESULTADOS EXPERIMENTALES
6.2.1. Evaporación doble efecto
Presión vapor : 0,5 bars relativo
Caudal alimentación : 70 % volumen : 850 ml en 5 min.
Caudal agua fría : 200 L/h
Presión reducida EVP2 : 500 mbars abs.
Tiempo Températura en °C solución solución Vapor de Condensados

concentrada evaporada calentado en salida
min.
R2 L R3 L EVP1 L EVP2 L
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Volumen Volumen Volumen Volumen
0 18,6 19,6 23,6 15,3 10,3 11,2 0 0 0 0
10 18 98,4 79,5 20,8 10,5 24,1 0,6 0,5 1 0,5
20 17,3 98,3 78,8 17,6 10,5 20,1 0,9 1,4 2,6 1,4
30 17,4 98,8 79,5 17,2 10,5 19,6 1,5 2 3,6 1,9
43 16,9 97,9 79,5 17,0 10,5 19,4 2,4 2,9 5 2,3
60 16,8 98,3 79,2 17,7 10,5 19,7 3 4,8 6,3 3,2

6.3. EJEMPLO DE CÁLCULOS
Ls resultados experimentales son llevados a la tabla inferior

Los ejemplos de cálculo son definidos por el punto de foncionamiento siguiente :
Configuración : doble efecto
Duración total de evaporación : 43 minutos
6.3.1. Cálculo de los balances de masa

Calculo de caudales másicos :
V×ρ
Qm =
t
V volumen total de solución a partir del tiempo "cero"
t duración de la evaporacíón
ρ masa de volumen de la solution (asimilada a la del solvente puro)
Los diferentes caudales son :
Caudal de alimentación EVP1 :

0,85
Qva = X60 = 10,2 L/h soit 10,2 kg/h
5
caudal solución concentrada en salida EVP2 :
2,4
Qvc = X60 = 3,34 L/h soit 3,34 kg/h
43
caudal solución evaporada en salida EVP2 :
2,9
Qve2 = X 60 = 4 L/h soit 4 kg/h
43
caudal solución evaporada en salida EVP1 :
2,3
Qve1 = X 60 = 3,2 L/h soit 3,2 kg/h
43
Cálculo del balance de materia global
La ley de conservación de masa es observada.

El caudal másico de la solución de alimentación es igual a la suma de los caudales másicos de dos
partes evaporadas y de la solución concentrada :
Qma = Qme1 + Qme2 + Qmc

10,2 = 3,2 + 4 + 3,34
este cálculo es un primer resultado aproximado que debe se confrontadp con los cálculos sobre el
soluto (medida de concentraciones y densidades de diferentes fraciones ).
6.3.2. Cálculo de los balances térmicos

6.3.2.1. Balance térmico en condensador
Cálculo de la energía cedida por los condensados : E6
E6 = Qme ( Cpe × (TeE - Tebe) + Lve + Cpe × (TebE - TeS)) (6)

Qme : caudal másico de la solución evaporada 3,2 kg.h-1
Cpe : calor másico de la solución evaporada 4,18 kJ.°C-1.kg-1
Te E : temperatura de la solución evaporada en entrada de evaporador 79,5°C
Tebv : temperatura de la solución evaporada en su punto de rocío 79,5°C
Te S : temperatura de la solución condensada en salida del condensador 17°C
Lve : calor de vaporización de la solución evaporada 2257 kJ.kg-1
E6 = Qme (Lve + Cpe × (TebE - TeS)) = 3,2 (2257 + 4,18 (79,5 - 17)) = 8059 kJ.h -1 sean 2,238 kWatt
Cálculo de la energia recibida por el agua de refrigeración : E7
E7 = Qmf × Cpf × ( TfS - TfE) (7)

Qmf : caudal másico del agua fría 200 kg.h-1
Cpf : calor másico del agua fría 4,18 kJ.°C-1.kg-1
Tf E : temperatura del agua fría a la entrada del evaporador 10,5 °C
Tf S : temperatura del agua fría a la salida del evaporador 19,4 °C
E7 = Qmf × Cpf × ( TfS - TfE) = 200 × 4,18 (19,4 - 10 ,5 ) = 7440 kJ.h -1 sean 2, 06 kWatt
La diferencia entre estas dos energias corresponde a las pérdidass térmicas a lo largo de la pared del
condensador.
página : 53
Evaluación del coeficiente global de intercambio K :

La relación que define el coeficiente global es :
Φ = K S ∆Tmlog
Φ Potencia intercambiada en el condensador

S Superficie de intercambio del condensador
K Coeficiente de intercambio global
evaluación de la potencia de intercambio en el condensador
Potencia fluido caliente + Potencia fluido frio

Φ=
2
2238 + 2060
Φ= = 2150 Watt
2
cálculo de la desviación de temperatura media ∆Tmlog
∆T1 - ∆T2
∆Tmlog =
ln ∆T1
∆T2
(79,5 - 19,4) - (17 - 10,5) 60,1 - 6,5
∆Tmlog = = = 24 °C
Ln (79,5 − 19,4) Ln 60,1
(17 − 10,5) 6,5
Cálculo del coeficiente de intercambio global K
Φ 2150
K= = = 448 Watt.m - 2 .°C -1
∆Tmlog × S 24 × 0.2
Esta evaluaciónn permite estimar este coeficiente. El valor calculado corresponde a los datos teóricos
para los condensadores funcionando en las mismas condiciones operativas.
6.3.3. Balance térmico de EVP1

Energiea recibida por la solución de alimentación
E1 = Qma × Cpa × (Teb - Ta) (3)
Qma : caudal másico de la solución de alimentación 10,2 kg.h-1

Cpa : calor másico de la solución de alimentación 4,18 kJ.°C-1.kg-1
Teb : temperatura de ebullición de la solución de alimentación 97,9 °C
Ta : temperatura de la solución dealimentación en entrada del evaporador 16,9°C
E1 = Qma × Cpa × (Teb - Ta) = 10,2 × 4,18 × (97,9 - 16,6) = 3466 kJ.h -1 sean 962 kWatt
página : 54
energía necesaria para evaporar el solvente
E2 = Qme Lv (4)
Qme : caudal másico del solvente 3,2 kg.h-1

Lv : calor de vaporización de la solución évaporada 2257 kJ.kg-1
E2 = Qme Lv = 3,2 × 2257 = 7224 kJ.h -1 sean 2 kWatt

energia cedida por el vapor de calentamiento
E3 = Qmv × Lv v (5)
Qmv : caudal másico del vapor 6,9 kg.h-1

Lv v : calor de vaporización del vapor 2257 KJ.Kg-1
E3 = Qmv Lvv = 6,9 × 2257 = 15746 kJ.kg -1 = 4,37 kWatt
El balance está represento por E3 = E1 + E2 + pérdidas térmicas

4,37 = 2 + 0,96 +pérdidas
El balance sobre el evaporador da una idea de los intercambios en el primer evaporador.
Las pérdidas térmicas no son despreciables.
página : 55
6.4. ANÁLISIS Y CONCLUSIONES

6.4.1. Comparacion de los modos de evaporación
Estas comparaciones se realizan sobre un análisis cualitativo de la concentración final de la
solución de glucosa.
Evaporación a simple efecto la evaporación a doble efecto

Podemos remarcar entre estos modos de funcionamiento que el aumento del número de efectos en
una evaporación conduce a una mayor eficacia en la concentración.
Así, con un simple efecto concentramos de un 5 a un 10% de máximo, mientras que mediante el
doble efecto la concentración final puede alcanzar el 25%.
Condiciones de presiones
La disminución de la presión en el segundo evaporador favorece la evaporación con un aporte de
energía relativamente importante por la produción de vapor en el primer efecto y por la caida de la
temperatura de ebullición en esas condiciones de presión
6.5. CONCLUSIÓN
El modo de funcionamiento de una evaporaión depende de las propriedades físico-químicas de la
solución que se desea evaporar.
Para la optimización de los parámetros de funcionamiento es preciso realizar ensayos para mejorar la
calidad de producción de los condensados, si bien es cierto que resulta dificil reunir un aumento de la
concentración con una producción importante y un coste bajo de energía.
página : 56

Ref. EVV/2000
MANUAL DE USO
7. ANEXOS
página : 57
CURVA DE CALIBRACION PARA DOSIFICACION DE LA GLUCOSA EN

EL AGUA
Ejemplo de resultados Pignat
Etalonnage de la concentration en sucre
1.41
1.4
1.39
1.38
Indice de réfraction
1.37
1.36
1.35
1.34
1.33
1.32
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Concentration g/100g eau
página : 58
7.1. DATOS EXPERIMENTALES
Configuración de la evaporación :
Presión vapor de calentamiento : bars relativos
Caudal de alimentación : % volumen : ml en min.
Caudal agua fría : L/h
Presión reducida EVP2 : mbars abs.
Tiempo Temperatura en °C solución solución Vapor de Condensados

concentrada evaporada calentado en salida
min.
R2 L R3 L EVP1 L EVP2 L
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Volumen Volumen Volumen Volumen
Masa inicial solución alimentación : g Masa final solución alimentación : g

Masa final solución concentrada : g concentración :
Masa final solución evaporada EVP1 : g concentración :
Masa final solución evaporada EVP2 : g concentración :
7.2. CÁLCULOS
Genas le 29-04-2015
21412247
214122 47 EVV/2000 V001
EVOPORADOR DOBLE EFECTO CON PANTALLA TACTIL Y ADQUISICION
0005817/000.
000581 7/000.B
B
001 10.127.001.3924
10.127.001.3 924 CORPS D'EVAPORATEUR POUR BOUGIE INOX Ø33,7 EVV/2000 0005817/006.A
0005817/006. A
CUERPO EVAPORADOR PARA BUJIA Ø 33,7 EVV/2000
002 10.127.001.3198
10.127.001.3 198 EVAPORATEUR TUBULAIRE DN50 ISO S=0,15M2 E:3/8"GF S:1/2"GM 0003928/033.A
0003928/033. A
EVAPORADOR TUBULAR DN50 ISO S=0,15M2 E:3/8"GF S:1/2"GM
003 10.128.001.3927
10.128.001.3 927 PROTECTION DE TUBES D' EVAPORATEUR EVV/2000 0005817/011.B
0005817/011. B
PROTECCION EVAPORADOR EVV/2000
004 10.127.001.3922
10.127.001.3 922 CYCLONE DN80 A GL45 POUR DETECTEUR DE NIVEAU 0005817/004.A
0005817/004. A
CICLONO DN80 A GL45 PARA DETECTOR DE NIVEL
005 10.127.001.3923
10.127.001.3 923 CYCLONE Ø80 CONIQUE A GL45 A NIVEAU LATERAL 0005817/005.A
0005817/005. A
CICLONO Ø80 CONICO A GL 45 A NIVEL LATERAL
007 10.127.001.3921
10.127.001.3 921 CORPS D'ECHANGEUR A SERPENTIN NW60 ET GL VOLUME 100ML GRADUE 0005670/008.A
0005670/008. A
INTERCAMBIADOR SERPENTIN INOX NW60 S=0,2
008 10.127.000.2575
10.127.000.2 575 ECHANGEUR SERPENTIN INOX COMP. NW60 S=0,2 M2 34 SPIRES LG:510 0003946/023.B
0003946/023. B
INTERCAMBIADOR SERPENTIN INOX NW60 S=0,2 M2 34 SPIRES LG:510
009 10.127.000.2953
10.127.000.2 953 BALLON SPHERIQUE DE 10L GAUCHE GRADUE AU LITRE + SURLYN 0003928/007.E
0003928/007. E
MATRAZ ESFERICO DE 10L IZ GRADUADO POR CADA LITRO
010 10.127.000.2954
10.127.000.2 954 BALLON SPHERIQUE DE 10L DROIT GRADUE AU LITRE + SURLYN 0003928/022.C
0003928/022. C
MATRAZ ESFERICO DE 10L DERECHA GRADUADO POR CADA LITRO
011 10.127.000.2578
10.127.000.2 578 REDUCTION RTX 25/41 F CANNELE Ø 17 H:45 0003928/004.A
0003928/004. A
REDUCCION RTX 25/41 F
012 10.127.001.3935
10.127.001.3 935 POT Ø25 GRADUE 75ML GL18/DN15P 0005630/012.D
0005630/012. D
POTE DN 25 GRADUADO 75ML
013 10.127.000.2579
10.127.000.2 579 ALD RTX 25/41 F Ø:32 LG: 100 AVEC T8 0003928/006.A
0003928/006. A
ALD RTX 25/41 F Ø:32 LG: 100 CON T8
014 10.127.000.2952
10.127.000.2 952 ALD RTX 25/41 F Ø:32 LG: 400 0003928/005.B
0003928/005. B
ALD RTX 25/41 F Ø:32 LG: 400
015 10.127.000.2547
10.127.000.2 547 COUDE A 90° RTX 25/41 M Ø:32 115X115 0003928/010.A
0003928/010. A
CODO 90° RTX 25/41 M-F Ø:32 115X115
016 10.127.001.3926
10.127.001.3 926 COUDE A 90° ROTULEX M 25/41 X GL45 0005817/008.A
0005817/008. A
CODO 90° ROTULEX M 25/41 X GL45
017 10.127.000.2549
10.127.000.2 549 COUDE A 90° RTX 25/41 M-F Ø:32 115X100 0003928/008.A
0003928/008. A
CODO 90° RTX 25/41 M-F Ø:32 115X100
018 10.127.000.2576
10.127.000.2 576 ALD RTX 25/41 M Ø:32 LG: 270 0003928/011.A
0003928/011. A
ALD RTX 25/41 M Ø:32 LG: 270
019 10.127.001.3925
10.127.001.3 925 LONGUEUR DROITE EXCENTREE GL45 X RTX F41/25 X T8 0005817/007.A
0005817/007. A
TUBERIA RECTA GL45 X RTX F41/25 X T8
020 30.353.001.3898
30.353.001.3 898 POMPE DOSEUSE 16L/H 220V/110V TETE PVC AVEC LOT ACCESSOIRE
BOMBA DOSIFICADORA 16L/H 3B 4/20MA CABEZA AN PVC
021 20.241.001.3896
20.241.001.3 896 LOT ACCESSOIRE PVC/PE COMPLET CANNE INJECTION REGLABLE 9X12
(01_PV_BVC1PVL9P) LOTE DE ACCESSORIO PVC/PE
022 30.353.001.4567
30.353.001.4 567 POMPE A VIDE MEMBRANE PTFE 30L/MIN 160MBAR 115V 60HZ
(057017/055162) BOMBA DE VACIO PTFE 30L/MIN 160MBAR 115V 60H
SN : 7841223
023 30.303.001.1188
30.303.001.1 188 DETECTEUR A LAME VIBRANTE INOX RAC.1/2"GM 10-35VDC IP65-67
(FTL20-0020) DETECTOR A CUCHILLA VIBRANTE INOX CON.1/2"GM 10-35VDC
SN : K2245301092
Page 1/...
Genas le 29-04-2015
21412247
214122 47 EVV/2000 V001
0005817/000.
000581 7/000.B
B
025 20.241.000.1437
20.241.000.1 437 CAPTEUR PT100 SANS TETE GAINE LG:100 Ø 6 INOX 1/3D PTFE 6M
SENSOR PT100 OHM SIN CABEZA LG:100 Ø 6 INOX 1/3D PVC 6M
026 30.351.000.1965
30.351.000.1 965 EV 1/4"GF Ø:6 DELTAP:0,5 B CORPS:316L JTS:PTFE 24V DC
(SP055757) EV 1/4"GF Ø:6 DP:0,5B CUERPO:316L GASKET:PTFE 24VDC
SN : W21ME
027 30.351.001.4030
30.351.001.4 030 EV 1/2" F INOX NF CDE ASSISTEE 0,3-10B+BOB.HT 24VCC +CON.T30
(21260) EV 2/2 INOX NF CONTROLADA 0,3-10B+ SOLENOIDE AT
028 20.241.001.0682
20.241.001.0 682 SOUPAPE DE SURETE M1/2"-M1" 1,5B LAITON+LEVIER+CERT.TARAGE
(203015/21-1,5B) VALVULA DE SEGURIDAD M1/2"-M1" 1,5B
SN : 014318767
029 20.241.000.1143
20.241.000.1 143 CLAPET ANTI RETOUR Ø 6X 8 PFA
(CAR0608UP) VALVULA ANTI RETORNO Ø 6X 8 PFA
030 20.245.001.2088
20.245.001.2 088 DEBITMETRE 40L/H- 400L/H DFM170 DN:15 Ø:20 RAC.PVC 60°C
(47507) CAUDALIMETRO 40-400L/H DFM DN:15 Ø:20 RAC.PVC 60°C
032 20.241.001.0002
20.241.001.0 002 DETENDEUR VAPEUR 1/2G"F AVEC RESSORT VERT 0,14 A 2,0B
(2910 15/21-1) REDUCTOR DE PRESION 1/2"GF CON RESORTE VERDE 0,14 A 1,7 B
033 20.241.001.0171
20.241.001.0 171 FILTRE TAMIS 1/2"GF VAPEUR CORPS BRONZE TAMIS INOX
(1651G-15/21) FILTRO TAMIS 1/2"GF VAPOR CUERP BRONCE TAMIS INOX
034 20.241.000.1413
20.241.000.1 413 PURGEUR THERMOSTATIQUE TYPE3 INOX 304L 1/2"GF FAIBLE DEBIT
(2446T.15/21) PURGADOR TERMOSTATICO TIPO3 INOX 304L 1/2"GF PEQUEÑO FLUJO
SN : YH30784
035 20.241.000.1414
20.241.000.1 414 DETENDEUR D'EAU 1/2"G FEMELLE AVEC MANO Ø 50 10B L/N
(2805M-15/21) REDUCTOR DE PRESION DE AGUA 1/2"GH CON MANOMETRO Ø63
036 20.245.000.2441
20.245.000.2 441 MANOMETRE Ø 63 -1/+0 B VERTICAL AVEC EKT ET JOINT ALU
(MEXD63 -1 0) MANOMETRO DE AGUJA Ø63 -1/+0B JUNTAS ALUMINIO
037 20.241.000.1381
20.241.000.1 381 MANOMETRE Ø 63 0/+2,5B BH VERTICAL AVEC EKT ET JOINT ALU
(MEXD63H 0+2,5) MANOMETRO Ø 63 0/+2,5B BH VERTICAL CON EKT Y GASKET ALU
039 20.241.000.3999
20.241.000.3 999 ECHANGEUR SPIRALE I316L H01 RAC.A/B 1/2"BSP ELECTROPASSIVE
(H01.10.EP.PI1) INTERCAMBIADOR DE CALOR TUBULAR I316L H01
040 20.234.000.1183
20.234.000.1 183 CAPUCHON GL 45 EN PBT AVEC PASSAGE Ø 34
(292271007) TAPON GL 25 EN PBT CON HOYO Ø 34
041 20.234.000.1454
20.234.000.1 454 JOINT TORIQUE SILI/FEP NW 60 75,00X4,00 70 SHORE
(01 0267 0754) JUNTA TORICA SILICONA/FEP NW60
042 20.241.000.1463
20.241.000.1 463 FERMETURE RAPIDE NW 60 INOX AVEC 3 COQUILLES DE MAINTIEN
(290713407) CIERRE RAPIDO NW60 EN INOX
043 20.234.000.1978
20.234.000.1 978 JOINT ROTULEX 41/25 SOUPLE
(R041) GASKET ROTULEX 41/25 FLEXIBLE
044 20.241.000.1520
20.241.000.1 520 PINCE ROTULEX 41/25 RC41
(SA0260040) PINZA ROTULEX 41/25 RC41
045 20.234.000.1181
(292270902) TAPON GL 25 EN PBT CON HOYO Ø 15
046 20.234.000.1180
(292270602) TAPA GL18 EN PBT CON PASO Ø11
047 10.125.000.2150
10.125.000.2 150 EMBOUT I316L DN25 SCH-P 1/2"GF 0003769/027.B
0003769/027. B
ADAPTADOR INOX DN25 SCH-P 1/2"GH
Page 2/...
Genas le 29-04-2015
21412247
214122 47 EVV/2000 V001
0005817/000.
000581 7/000.B
B
048 20.231.000.0484
20.231.000.0 484 VANNE A BOULE MONOBLOC 1/2"G PAS.INTEGRAL I316 ATEX CADENNA
(625I.15/21) VALVULA DE BOLA 1 PIEZA 1/2"G PASO INTEGRAL I316L
049 20.231.000.0002
20.231.000.0 002 VANNE A BOULE MONOBLOC 3/8"G PAS.REDUIT I316 CADENASSABLE
(VM06FF 12) VALVULA DE BOLA 3/8"G PASO REDUCIDO I316
050 20.231.000.0001
20.231.000.0 001 VANNE A BOULE MONOBLOC 1/4"G PAS.REDUIT I316 CADENASSABLE
(5811/458113-8) VALVULA DE BOLA 1/4"G PASO REDUCIDO I316
051 20.231.001.3352
20.231.001.3 352 VANNE A BOULE MONOBLOC 3/8"G PAS.INTEG.I316 ATEX SS CADENNA
(625I 12/17) VALVULA DE BOLA 3/8"G PASO INTEGRAL I316L
052 20.240.000.0473
20.240.000.0 473 VANNE A BOULE MONOBLOC 1/2"G PASSAGE INTEGRAL L/N
(505 15/21) VALVULA DE BOLA 1 PIEZA 1/2"G PASO INTEGRAL LATON NICKEL
054 20.231.000.0460
20.231.000.0 460 VANNE POINTEAU I316L Ø3 1/4"G TIGE + POINTEAU EN I316L
(76GG08/13) VALVULA PUNZON I316L 1/4"G EJE + PUNZON EN I316L
056 20.240.001.3007
20.240.001.3 007 VANNE A SOUPAPE DI. PTFE 1/2"G BRONZE
(31.015/21) VALVULA DI, PTFE 1/2"G BRONCE
058 10.125.000.2035
10.125.000.2 035 EMBOUT INOX DN15 SCH-P 3/8"GF 0002881/036.B
0002881/036. B
ADAPTADOR INOX DN15 SCH-P 3/8" GH
060 20.232.000.1226
20.232.000.1 226 FLEXIBLE PTFE Ø 12X14
(PTFE 12X14) FLEXIBLE PTFE Ø 12X14
061 20.232.000.1225
20.232.000.1 225 FLEXIBLE PTFE Ø 10X12
(PTFE 10X12) FLEXIBLE PTFE Ø 10X12
062 20.232.000.1223
20.232.000.1 223 FLEXIBLE PTFE Ø 6X 8
(PTFE 6X8) FLEXIBLE PTFE Ø 6X 8
066 20.238.000.1263
20.238.000.1 263 FLEXIBLE VINYL ARME Ø 15X21 -15°C À +60°C
(TA 393015) FLEXIBLE VINIL ARMADO Ø 15X21
067 20.238.000.1254
20.238.000.1 254 FLEXIBLE VINYL ARME Ø 12.5X18 -15°C À +60°C
(TA 393012) FLEXIBLE VINIL ARMADO Ø 12X18
068 20.238.000.1261
20.238.000.1 261 FLEXIBLE ALIMENTAIRE Ø 16X26 BLEU -30°C +160°C
(5652422T) FLEXIBLE ALIMENTARIO Ø 16X26 AZUL -30°C +160°C
069 20.238.000.1784
20.238.000.1 784 FLEXIBLE ALIMENTAIRE Ø 13X23 BLEU -30°C +160°C
(5652412M) FLEXIBLE PARA ALIMENTOS Ø 13X23 BLEU -30°C +160°C
071 20.238.000.1241
20.238.000.1 241 FLEXIBLE STARKLER Ø30X40 20 BAR -40°C A 100°C
(TO181030) FLEXIBLE THERMIDOR Ø 30X40
074 60.625.000.2149
60.625.000.2 149 TUBE INOX 316L S/S Ø 8 EPAI:1 ETIRE A FROID ASPECT BRILLAND
(EN10216.51.4404) TUBO INOX 316L S/S Ø 8 GROS:1
075 60.625.000.3106
60.625.000.3 106 TUBE INOX 316L S/S Ø12 EPAI:1 ETIRE A FROID ASPECT BRILLAND
(EN10216.51.4404) TUBO INOX 316L S/S Ø12 GROS:1 ESTIRADO A FRIO +EXTRA ALEACIO
076 20.239.001.3955
20.239.001.3 955 ARMAFLEX GAINE ANTI UV NOIR EP:19MM Ø:22MM -40°C A +130°C
(SO 19X22B) ARMAFLEX ANTI UV NEGRO GR:20MM Ø:22MM -50°C A +150°C
077 20.247.000.1891
20.247.000.1 891 EPROUVETTE GRADUEE DE 500ML EN PMP
(5660036) PROBETA GRADUADA DE 500 ML EN PMP
078 20.247.000.1931
20.247.000.1 931 CUVE CYLINDRIQUE DE 90 LITRES AVEC COUVERCLE AMOVIBLE EN PED
(CP 90 -1248) TANQUE CILINDRICO DE 90 LITROS CON TAPA AMOVIBLE EN PED
080 20.233.000.0402
20.233.000.0 402 BOUCHON MALE TH 1/2"G I316L
(652263-15) TAPON MACHO TH 1/2"G I316L
090 30.355.001.4029
30.355.001.4 029 CHAUDIERE A VAPEUR M510 GAK18 18KW,220V 3 PHASES 60HZ 25LT
(M510) CALDERA DE VAPOR M510 GAK18 18KW,220V 3 FASES 60HZ
Page 3/...
Genas le 29-04-2015
21412247
214122 47 EVV/2000 V001
0005817/000.
000581 7/000.B
B
SN : 15069001
105 20.233.000.1977
20.233.000.1 977 FLEXIBLE INOX 316L LG: 500MM AVEC 2 EMBOUTS LISSE 21,3X25
FLEXIBLE INOX 316L LG:1000MM CON 2 CONTERAS LISAS 21,3X25
106 20.233.001.4622
20.233.001.4 622 FLEXIBLE INOX 316L LG:2000MM AVEC 2 EMBOUTS LISSE 21,3X50
FLEXIBLE INOX 316L LG:2000MM CON 2 CONTERAS LISAS 21,3X50
Page 4
NORMES :
UL / CSA C MAJ POMPE A VIDE 09/02/2015 GRS
INDICE MODIFICATION DATE DESSINE VERIFIE APPROUVE
DSA DEVRAINE
147, AVENUE MARCEL MERIEUX
69530 BRIGNAIS
Tel: +33.(0)4.78.05.69.70 PLAN N°: PF1974-1
Fax: +33.(0)4.78.05.02.36
AFFAIRE N°: FF3826
E-mail: info@dsa-devraine.fr
PIGNAT
BP 11- Z.I. REVOISSON
69741 GENAS CEDEX - FRANCE
EVAPORATEUR DOUBLE EFFET
EVV/2000
PAGE DE GARDE
DOCUMENT N° : 5835/60/C 1 / 14
CE DOCUMENT EST NOTRE PROPRIETE. IL EST REMIS A TITRE CONFIDENTIEL.
IL NE DOIT PAS ETRE REPRODUIT OU COMMUNIQUE A DES TIERS SANS NOTRE AUTORISATION ECRITE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
N° MODIFICATIONS N° MODIFICATIONS
DESIGNATION DESIGNATION
FOLIO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FOLIO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 PAGE DE GARDE C
2 LISTE DES FOLIOS C
3 REPERES FILERIE C
4 ETIQUETTES C
5 LABELS C
6 ETIQUETAS C
7 PUISSANCE C
8 COMMANDE C
9 INSTRUMENTATION C
10 INSTRUMENTATION C
11 IMPLANTATION C
12 Bornier : X1-1 X3-2 X1,X2,X3 - 1/0 C
13 BORNIERS C
14 Nomenclature matériel C
=
+
N° DE PLAN :
EVAPORATEUR DOUBLE EFFET FOLIO
PIGNAT PF1974-1 EVV/2000
2
N° D'AFFAIRE :
C 09/02/2015 MAJ POMPE A VIDE GRS 1 3
FF3826 INDICE DATE MODIFICATION DES.
Document n° : 5835/60/C LISTE DES FOLIOS Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
COULEURS FILERIES:
- Circuits de puissance (courant alternatif ou continu) : NOIR

- Circuits de commande alimentés en courant alternatif : ROUGE
- Commun des bobines : IVOIRE ou BLANC
- Circuits de commande alimentés en courant continu : BLEU FONCE
- Source (ou circuit d'asservissement venant d'un autre compartiment)
non coupée par le dispositif de sectionnement général de l'armoire considérée : ORANGE
Repères des fils WEIDMULLER TMI12/TMI15
=
+ A01
N° DE PLAN :
3
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C REPERES FILERIE Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
ETIQUETTE DILOPHANE 27X18 ECRITURE H=3 NOIR SUR FOND BLANC
ARRET MODBUS
SOUS TENSION ARRET MARCHE
MANU AUTO 0 1
Nombre : 1 Nombre : 1 Nombre : 1 Nombre : 1 Nombre : 1

Fond : BLANC Fond : BLANC Fond : BLANC Fond : BLANC Fond : BLANC
Texte : NOIR Texte : NOIR Texte : NOIR Texte : NOIR Texte : NOIR
Remarques : 8H0 Remarques : 8S0.8S2.8S5 Remarques : 8S1.8S3.8S6 Remarques : 8S4 Remarques : 9S7
COUPURE GENERALE
Nombre : 1
Fond : BLANC
Texte : NOIR
Remarques : 7Q1
POMPE VIDANGE POMPE

GENERAL MODBUS
ALIMENTATION EVAPORATEUR A VIDE

Remarques : 8S0.8S1 Remarques : 8S2.8S3 Remarques : 8S4 Remarques : 8S5.8S6 Remarques : 9S7
=
+ A01
N° DE PLAN :
4
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C ETIQUETTES Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
OFF MODBUS
ON LINE STOP START
FORCED AUTO 0 1

MAIN SWITCH
Nombre : 1
Fond : BLANC
Texte : NOIR
Remarques : 7Q1
FEEDING DRAINING VACCUUM

GENERAL MODBUS
PUMP EVAPORATOR PUMP

=
+ A01
N° DE PLAN :
5
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C LABELS Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PARO MODBUS
BAJO TENSION PARO MARCHA
FORZADO AUTO 0 1

INTERRUPTOR GENERAL
Nombre : 1
Fond : BLANC
Texte : NOIR
Remarques : 7Q1
BOMBA VACIADO BOMBA DE

GENERAL MODBUS
ALIMENTACION EVAPORADOR VACIO

=
+ A01
N° DE PLAN :
6
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C ETIQUETAS Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A
L
I
M
E
N
T
A
T
I
O
N
1
1
5
V
~
+
T
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
1
1
5
V
~
+
T
A
L
I
M
E
N
T
A
C
I
O
N
1
1
5
V
~
+
T
X1 1 X1 2
7L1
1 3 5
7Q1
25A
2 4 6
7L2
1 7FU0
10A
10x38
2 GR
n
o
i
r
n
o
i
r
7L3
b
l
a
n
c
b
l
a
n
c
7N1
1 7FU1 1 7FU3 1 7FU4

2A 2A 2A
10x38 10x38 10x38
2 GR 2 GR 2 GR
7L4
7L5
7L7
N L
7U1 1 3 1 3
7N1
7N1
PULS 8KM1 8KM2
ML50.100 8-8 8-17
+/+ -/- 2 4 2 4
é
c é
c
n
o n
f o
f
u u
1
e
l e
l
b b
7L6
7L8
1
2
7FU2
2A 2
10x38
GR
1 1
X1 3 X1 4 X1 5 X1 6
8-2
8-2
9N1:+
8H0:X2
= Y O N W P N A E W P O
I
V LD O
I 5 M O
I R D
I 0 M C
4 PN
T 7 U C O V 0 U A
2 P
UA V
P A D 4 P V
N SM A 5 G T A A V M E
L T 1 N
I N C
I
E 0 U D
O
I N 1 S E F
I 1 U
T O
T E O M
I S P 1 C
A
A
B
A N M
I E D L
A
O M V M
T O
C L S G A
D O O
N A U N
I B P B
E E D M
M E S E O
I
L P O E
F B
A M D
O
= P
+
NOTA : FILERIE UL
N° DE PLAN :
7
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C PUISSANCE Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
RAPPEL : TENSION 24V=

sous 7FU1 / 7U1 / 7FU2
1 1 1
+
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
7-5 9-1
+
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
7FU2:2 9N1:+
X1 21
7
ASSERVISSEMENT 8KA0
EVENTUEL 8-5
22 24
POSSIBLE SWITCH
SERVO POSIBLE X1
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
8 6
3
21 21
ARRET
MANU
AUTO
6
21 8S2 8S4 8S4 8S5
10-16
10N6
A
u
t
o
M
a
n
u
8S0 ROUGE 8-11 8-11 ROUGE
22 8-13 22
ARRET ARRET
22 8-11 10N6
ARRET
10-16
10-15
4 7 X1 11
13 11 13 13 9 13 13
1
8S1 8KA0 8S3 8KM1 8S6 8KM2
10
2
9
VERT 8-5 VERT 8-8 VERT 8-17
14 12 14 14 14 1 X1 14 14
MARCHE MARCHE MARCHE
8-6 8-10 LL
11
35
3
X1
10
12
5
8
X1 X1
2
12 14
1 1
8EV2 8V1
24V 2 24V 2
X1 A1 X1 A1 X1 X1 A1 X1
X1 X1
8H0 8KA0 8S1 8KM1 8S3 8H1 8KM2 8S
BLANC 24V A2 VERT 24V A2 VERT 13 VERT 15 24V A2
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
2 24V 24V 2
-
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
7-6 9-1
-
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
7U1:-/- 14 12 i 11 8-6 8-5 1 j 2 7-9 8-8 1 j 2 7-13 9N1:-

24 22 i 21 8-8 3 j 4 7-9 3 j 4 7-13
13 a 14 8-10 13 a 14 8-18
N L E N E R E E E G O E
O A L O P U H F D N I
P
BAJO TENSION
VALVULA VACIADO EVAPORADOR
VALVULA DE DRENAJE DE CONTROL DEL CALOR

I I
MARCHA BOMBA
ON LINE
I
GENERAL ON
F
BOMBA ALIMENTACION
DRAINING VALVE EVAPORATOR

PUMP RUNNING
C
GENERAL
MARCHA GENERAL
MARCHA
FEEDING PUMP
MARCHA BOMBA
A
DRAINING VALVE CONTROL OF THE HEAT

GENERAL
ON
PUMP RUNNING
S R T M E C U V N A M
N E R A O T R N V
O
N E T P E A A A A U E
E E N N D R M H E
R D P
T G E E E C P P A E
S G E H O E M B H
U M
I C N P A
L M U M
E L R N A D O P O C
O H A A A V E E P M B R
S C V E N D U A A
R E M O E N E U H M
A P R G A N H C
A C
M T N V O
I C V R
A
M O C T R
P E A O A A M
L D
I R L M
E V T U
C G
E E
L
E R
NOTA : FILERIE UL
=
+
N° DE PLAN :
8
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C COMMANDE Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
R
A
P
P
E
L
:
T
e
n
s
i
o
n
2
4
V
=
s
o
u
s
7
F
U
1
/
7
U
1
/
7
F
U
2
1 1
+
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
+
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
8-19
7FU2:2
+
b
r
u
n
5
13
-
b
l
a
n
c
4
TFT LCD 7" 15
MMI-8070SL
9N1
1
KEP
MMI-8070SL 9N2
+
1
REGULATEUR
-
ASCON D9-5350-0100
2
21
0 I
1
1
1
0
1
5
1
4
1
3
9
9S7
SUR DIN
22
9-12
9-13
9-13
LINE-OUT
USB LPT
14
16
+
LINE-IN
ETHERNET
MIC
- PS/2
VGA RS232 RS232
USB
17
18
FG KB MS
B1
A1
20
22
21
19
S
U
B M
D A
9 L
p
t
s
1
E
6
2
7
3
c e e c e e
8
4
1 2 3
- +
9X2 g g
9
g
n u g n u
5
a o
l u a
l o u
b r o
r b r o
r
9X1 RJ45 X2 1 X2 2
PT100
PT100
+
-
R
é
s
e
a
u
m
o
d
b
u
s
USB
2 2
-
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
-
b
l
e
u
f
o
n
c
é
8-19
X1:11 1 1 1 2 2 2
T T T T T
E
T
E E R E R
B O B O
D O S D O S
N R
P
N
E N R
P
N
E
O S O S
S S
B
A
U
D
6 O 1 8 2
9
0
0 N
P
A
R
I
T
E
E
B
I
T
S
T
O
P
B
I
T
D
O
N
N
E
E
A
D
R
E
S
S
E
P
A
R
A
M
E
T
R
A
B
L
E
P
A
R
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
E
R
E
X
P
L
O
R
E
R
A
V
E
C
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
I
S
S
E
U
R
R
S
4
8
5
NOTA : FILERIE UL
=
+
N° DE PLAN :
9
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C INSTRUMENTATION Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
R
A
P
P
E
L
:
T
e
n
s
i
o
n
2
4
V
=
s
o
u
s
7
Q
2
/
7
U
1
38
39
10N3 10N4 10N5 10N6

REGULATEUR REGULATEUR REGULATEUR REGULATEUR
ASCON D9-5350-0100 ASCON D9-5350-0100 ASCON D1-5155-0100 ASCON D1-5155-0100
8-15
1
1
1
0
9
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
1
1
0
9
1
5
1
4
1
3
3
4
1
5
1
4
1
3
5
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
s A B
é
d
a
s
r
o
T
35
6
29
24
26
28
30
34
37
23
25
27
33
36
1 2
31
32
c e
X3 X3
g e c e
c e e e c e e n c c e e é é c e e
n g g n u g g
n u g g
n u g u n g
n u g c c n g g
a
l u u l o u
a a
l o u a
l o u r a
l a
l o u n n a
l u u 1
b o
r o
r b r o
r b r o
r b r o
r b b b r o
r o
f o
f b o
r o
r
u u
e
l e
l
b b
X1
PT100
PT100
PT100
PT100
PT100
PT100
R=120 Ohm
35
16 17 2
Vers 1/4W
Folio 8 S T S
U E
8-15
U
8-15
X1:14
L
B T B
D
D U
O O
3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 E A 8 8 8 1 1 1 7
I 7 7
I O N M
T T T T T T T T T T T T S
P
M R T T T
R V V V
E E T
I
T T M I
A D
E
E E R E E R
E E R
E E R U U O E E
B O E 8 8
E
E R
U M R
D
B O
D
B
O
O
S D
B O
D
B O
E P D
D O S 8 B O
A S A
O S
N R N
O S O S
S G A
C N R N D O
R S
E U D
N R
P
N
E P E N R
P
N
E N R
P
N
E N
I I P E N P N
E B I
L
O S O S O S O S O S F
I O S
O S S D A
S S S S D O S
O S S E O
M
S
E
D
L D R
P O
R
A
B E
I
M T M T
O N
O
O
B R
P C E O
E J
A S
G T
A O
L
T I
P
O
6 O 1 8 4
9
0
0 N
6 O 1 8 5
9
0
0 N
6 O 1 8 6
9
0
0 N
6 O 1 8 3
9
0
0 N
B
A
U
D
B
A
U
D
B
A
U
D
L
B
A
U
D
I
P
N
E
N
P
A
R
I
T
E
P
A
R
I
T
E
P
A
R
I
T
E
P
A
R
I
T
E
B
I
T
S
T
O
P
B
I
T
S
T
O
P
B
I
T
S
T
O
P
B
I
T
S
T
O
P
B
I
T
D
O
N
N
E
E
B
I
T
D
O
N
N
E
E
B
I
T
D
O
N
N
E
E
B
I
T
D
O
N
N
E
E
A
D
R
E
S
S
E
A
D
R
E
S
S
E
A
D
R
E
S
S
E
A
D
R
E
S
S
E
P
A
R
A
M
E
T
R
A
B
L
E
P
A
R
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
E
R
E
X
P
L
O
R
E
R
A
V
E
C
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
I
S
S
E
U
R
R
S
4
8
5
NOTA : FILERIE UL
=
+
N° DE PLAN :
10
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C INSTRUMENTATION Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
DESSOUS
BOTTOM
DEBAJO
9X2
INTERIEUR PORTE COTE DROIT

INSIDE DOOR RIGHT SIDE
INTERIOR PUERTA LADO DERECHO
0,40 0,25
7Q1.8H0
7U1.9S7.7FU0.7FU1.7FU2.7FU3.
7FU4.7REP1
PR 4116 PR 4116 PR 4116 PR 4116 PR 4116
9N1.9X1
0,50
8KM1.8KM2.8KA0.9N2….10N6
8S1.8S3.8S5.8S6
X1.X2.X3.9S2
8S0.8S2.8S5.8S4
=
+
N° DE PLAN :
11
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C IMPLANTATION Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
+
=
1
X1
PIGNAT
W0
2
Brin 1
7N1 1 7-1
7Q1:1
ALIMENTATION 115V 60HZ Brin 2
7L1 2 7-2 7L1
Brin 3
W1 Brin 1
7N1 3 7-9
8KM1:2
3
POMPE ALIMENTATION Brin 2
7L6 4 7-9 7L6
Brin 3
W2 Brin 1
7N1 5 7-13
8KM2:2
POMPE DOSEUSE Brin 2
ALIMENTATION
7L8 6 7-13 7L8
Brin 3
4
ASSERVISSEMENT
EVENTUEL 8S0:21
1 7 8-5
W3
3 8 8-5
8S4
Brin 1
9 8-11
LL NIVEAU BAS Brin 2
10
5
8-11
Brin 3
2 11 8-12
Brin 4
W4 1 8EV2:1
YSL-JZ 3G1²
12 8-11
8EV2:2
ELECTROVANNE DE 2
2 13 2
6
8-11
VIDANGE EVAPORATEUR GNYE
PF1974-1
N° D'AFFAIRE :
N° DE PLAN :
FF3826
W5 1 8V1:1 10N6
YSL-JZ 3G1²
14 8-15
8V1:2
ELECTROVANNE DE REGULATION 2
DE LA CHAUFFE
2 15 8-15 2
GNYE
W6
7
1 10N5
YSL-JZ 3G1²
16 10-11
10N5
PILOTAGE POMPE DOSEUSE 2
17 10-11
INDICE
GNYE
C
09/02/2015
8
DATE
X2
MAJ POMPE A VIDE
9
9S7
P
R
I
S
E
S
U
R
R
E
S
E
A
U
M
O
D
B
U
S
1 10
MODIFICATION
9-13
9S7
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
O
N
M
O
D
B
U
S
M
A
I
N
2 9-13 11
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
D
E
R
E
D
M
O
D
B
U
S
10
R=120 Ohm
X3
GRS
DES.
11
1/4W
S
O
R
T
I
E
R
E
S
E
A
U
M
O
D
B
U
S
1
M
O
D
B
U
S
M
A
I
N
O
U
T
L
E
T
Document n° :
10-19
2
1
S
A
L
I
D
A
R
E
D
M
O
D
B
U
S
2 10-20
12
EVV/2000
5835/60/C
13
14
15
EVAPORATEUR DOUBLE EFFET
16
Bornier : X1-1 X3-2
17
18
19
Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
11
FOLIO
12
20
13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
D
I
R
E
C
T
D
I
R
E
C
T
D
I
R
E
C
T
D
I
R
E
C
T
D
I
R
E
C
T
D
I
R
E
C
T
D
I
R
E
C
T
D
I
R
E
C
T
S
U
R
9
N
2
S
U
R
1
0
N
4
S
U
R
9
N
2
S
U
R
1
0
N
3
S
U
R
1
0
N
3
S
U
R
1
0
N
4
S
U
R
1
0
N
5
S
U
R
1
0
N
6
c e e c e e c e e c e e c e e e
c e g e
c e g c e e
n g g n g g n g g n g g n g g n g u n g u n g g
a u
l u a u
l u a u
l u a u
l u a u
l u a u o
l a u o
l a u
l u
b o
r o
r b o
r o
r b o
r o
r b o
r o
r b o
r o
r b o
r r b o
r r b o
r o
r
1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 8 8 7
I 7 7
T T 1
T T T T T T
E
T
R T T T T T T T T T T T T
T
I
T I
T
E R E R R R E R
E E
B R E B O B O E E
B O E E
B O E E
B O E B O E E
B R
D O O
S D O
R S D O S D O S D O S D O S D O S
D O O
S
N R
P N N P N
E N R
P
N
E N R
P
N
E N R
P
N
E N R
P
N
E N R
P
N
E N R
P N
O E
S O S O S O S O S O S O S
O E
S
S S S S S S S S
=
+
N° DE PLAN :
13
N° D'AFFAIRE :
Document n° : 5835/60/C BORNIERS Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
REPERE FOLIO DESIGNATION REFERENCE FABRICANT QTE

10N3 10 REGULATEUR D9-5350-0100 ASCON 1
7FU0 7 SECTIONNEUR-FUSIBLE RM 32A 10x38 1 P 56010015 SOCOMEC 1
7Q1 7 INTERRUPTEUR SECTIONNEUR PRINC.AU 25A VCD0 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
7REP1 7 REPARTITEUR BIPOLAIRE BD 40 A, 16 CONNEXIONS 563720 ERICO 1
7U1 7 ALIMENTATION 100-240VAC/24-28VDC, 2.1A ML50.100 PULS 1
8H0 8 VOYANT LUMINEUX XB4BVB1 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8H1 8 VOYANT LUMINEUX XB4BVB3 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8KA0 8 RELAIS MINIATURE EMBROCHABLE RXM AVEC DEL 4INV 24VDC RXM4AB2BD SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8KA0 8 EMBASE AVEC CONTACTS SEPARES, RACCORDEMENT CONNECTEUR RXZE2S114M SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8KM1 8 CONTACTEUR DE PUISSANCE 3P+1NO VIS 24VDC LP1K0610BD SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8KM2 8 CONTACTEUR DE PUISSANCE 3P+1NO VIS 24VDC LP1K0610BD SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8S0 8 ARRET D''URGENCE A CLE XB4BS9442 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8S1 8 BOUTON POUSSOIR LUMINEUX VERT XB4BW33B5 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8S2 8 BOUTON POUSSOIR ROUGE XB4BA42 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8S4 8 BOUTON TOURNANT XB4BD33 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
8S5 8 BOUTON POUSSOIR ROUGE XB4BA42 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
9N1 9 PC INDUSTRIEL, ECRAN 7'' TFT LCD TACTILLE, CPU 400MHz, MEMOIRE 64MB, 12-24V MMI-8070SL KEP 1
9S7 9 BOUTON TOURNANT XB4BD21 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
9X1 9 TRAVERSEE DE CLOISON USB 4686311 RS 1
9X2 9 TRAVERSEE DE CLOISON RJ45 4481699 RS 1
- 10 RESISTANCE 0.25W 120 OHMS - RS 1
COFF 13 COFFRET UNIVERSEL AVEC PORTE PLEINE ET CHASSIS PLEIN 500x400x250, IP66, RAL NSYS3D5425P SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 1
=
+
N° DE PLAN :
14
N° D'AFFAIRE :
C 09/02/2015 MAJ POMPE A VIDE GRS 13
Document n° : 5835/60/C Nomenclature matériel Logiciel SEE v. 4.10
Data Sheet E 224
Diaphragm Pumps for Air, Gases and Vapours

LABOPORT®
Mini Diaphragm
Vacuum Pumps
Technical features:
왎 100% oil-free transfer
왎 Pure transferring and evacuation of gases
왎 Version for slightly aggressive or corrosive gases
and vapours
왎 Maintenance-free
왎 Environmentally friendly
With fine control valve
and vacuum gauge (.45) 왎 High level of gas tightness.
Series LABOPORT®
N 816.1.2 K_.18 Pumps
Series N 816.1.2 diaphragm pumps are double-head, dry-run- Technical data: N 816.1.2 KN.18 N 816.1.2 KT.18
ning devices used in a wide range of laboratory applications. N 816.1.2 KN.45.18 N 816.1.2 KT.45.18
They transfer and pump down without contamination. Delivery (l/min)1) 30 30
The heart of these very compact pumps is a KNF structured Ultimate vacuum
diaphragm. This patented diaphragm was stress-optimized (mbar abs.) 100 160
using the Finite Elements method. As a result, we were able Operating pressure
(bar g) 0.5 0.5
to make the pumps smaller while increasing the service life
Connectors for tube
of the diaphragm.
(mm) ID 6 ID 6
The pumps are available in various versions differing in the
Permissible gas and
materials which contact the media. ambient temperature +5...+40 °C +5...+40 °C
Mains 230V/50Hz 230V/50Hz
Motor protection IP 20 IP 20
Power P1 100 W 100 W
Material in contact with the pumped media Operating current 0.6 A 0.6 A
Weight 3.95 kg 3.95 kg
Type/Order No. Pump head Diaphragm Valves
Dimensions
N 816.1.2 KN.18 PPS EPDM EPDM L x H x W (mm) 361/141/102 361/141/102
N 816.1.2 KN.45.18 PPS EPDM EPDM With thermal switch and power fuse
N 816.1.2 KT.18 PPS PTFE-coated FFPM
N 816.1.2 KT.45.18 PPS PTFE-coated FFPM Motors with other voltages and frequencies on request.
.45 = Pump with fine control valve and vacuum gauge 1) at atm. pressure
Accessories and spare parts

Description Details Order No.
Fine control valve with vacuum gauge suction side 056547
Spares kit for N 816.1.2 KN 056315
Spares kit for N 816.1.2 KT 056316
KNF reserves the right to make changes. KNF 01/2013 Produced in Germany
Data Sheet E 224
Dimensions and performance characteristics

Pump down time for 20 l receiver Performance
N 816.1.2 KN.18 N 816.1.2 KN.18

Vacuum atm. Press.
30
1013
25
Flow capacity l/min

800
20
(Litre at STP)
600
15
mbar
400
10
200 5
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 200 400 600 800 1013
min mbar
Pump down time for 20 l receiver Performance
N 816.1.2 KT.18 N 816.1.2 KT.18

Vacuum atm. Press
30
1013
25
Flow capacity l/min
800
20
(Litre at STP)
600
15
mbar
400
10
200 5
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 200 400 600 800 1013
min mbar
Dimensions (mm)
approx. 102
132.5
141
for tube ID 6
5
275
approx. 361
KNF Neuberger GmbH, Alter Weg 3, D-79112 Freiburg, Tel. ++49(0)7664/5909-0, Fax ++49(0)7664/5909-99, www.knf.de, E-Mail: info@knf.de
KNF reserves the right to make changes. KNF 01/2013 Produced in Germany
KNF offers a wide range of high-quality KNF. GLOBALLY ACTIVE.
pumps and systems for moving both
liquids and gases. Whether they are used Germany Korea
KNF Neuberger GmbH KNF Neuberger Ltd.
as built-in OEM pumps, in process appli-
D-79112 Freiburg 130-090, Seoul
cations or in laboratories, KNF products Tel. +49 7664 5909 0 Tel. +82 2 959 0255
offer high performance, precision, and info@knf.de knf@knfkorea.com
www.knf.de www.knfkorea.com
reliability. We offer all of our customers
Benelux Netherlands Sweden, Finland, Denmark, Norway
expert and personal advice. Contact us KNF Verder B.V. KNF Neuberger AB
today to discuss how we can assist you NL-3451 GG Vleuten SE-117 43 Stockholm
Tel. +31 30 677 92 40 Tel. +46 8 744 51 13
with your next project! info@knf-verder.nl info@knf.se
www.knf-verder.nl www.knf.se
Benelux Belgium and Luxemburg Switzerland
The KNF production sites worldwide:
KNF Verder N.V. Sales
B-2630 Aartselaar KNF Neuberger AG
Tel. +32 3 871 96 24 CH-8362 Balterswil
info@knf.be Tel. +41 71 973 99 30
www.knf.be knf@knf.ch
www.knf.ch
China
KNF Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Switzerland
Shanghai 201203 Production Liquid Pumps
Tel. +86 21 5109 9695 KNF FLODOS AG
info@knf.com.cn CH-6210 Sursee
KNF Neuberger GmbH, Germany www.knf.com.cn Tel. +41 41 925 00 25
info@knf-flodos.ch
France, Marocco, Tunisia, Algeria
www.knf-flodos.ch
KNF Neuberger SAS
F-68128 Village-Neuf Switzerland
Tel. +33 389 70 35 00 Production Micro Pumps
info@knf.fr KNF Micro AG
www.knf.fr CH-6260 Reiden
Tel. +41 62 787 88 88
UK
info@knf-micro.ch
KNF Neuberger U.K., Ltd.
www.knf-micro.ch
KNF Micro AG, Switzerland Witney, Oxfordshire OX28 4FA
Tel. +44 1993 77 83 73 Taiwan
info@knf.co.uk KNF Neuberger Ltd.
www.knf.co.uk Taipei City, 11490
Tel. +886 2 2794 1011
India
info@knftwn.com.tw
KNF Pumps + Systems (India)
www.knf.com.tw
Pvt. Ltd.
Hinjewadi, Pune 411 057 USA, Canada, Latin America
KNF reserves the right to make technical changes without notice. 09/2014
Tel. +91 20 640 13 923 KNF Neuberger, Inc.
+91 20 640 08 923 Trenton, New Jersey 08691-1810
info@knfpumps.in Tel. +1 609 890 8600
KNF Flodos AG, Switzerland
www.knfpumps.in knfusa@knf.com
www.knfusa.com
Italy
KNF ITALIA S.r.l. Latin America
I-20132 Milano Tel. +1 609 649 1010
Tel. +39 02 272 03 860 gb@knf.com
info@knf.it www.knf.com/es
www.knf.it
Japan
KNF Japan Co.Ltd.
KNF Neuberger SAS, France Tokyo 104-0033
Tel. +81 3 3551 7931
info@knf.co.jp
www.knf.co.jp
KNF Neuberger, Inc., USA

Operating Instructions
Read and observe these Operating Instructions!
®
Laboport Mini Laboratory Pumps
N816.1.2 KN.18 N816.3 KN.18 N816.1.2 KN.45.18 N816.3 KN.45.18

N816.1.2 KT.18 N816.3 KT.18 N816.1.2 KT.45.18 N816.3 KT.45.18
N838.1.2 KN.18 N838.3 KN.18 N838.1.2 KN.45.18 N838.3 KN.45.18
N838.1.2 KT.18 N838.3 KT.18 N838.1.2 KT.45.18 N838.3 KT.45.18
Contents Page
1. About this document..................................................................3
2. Use ............................................................................................4
3. Safety ........................................................................................5
KNF Neuberger GmbH 4. Technical Data ..........................................................................7
Alter Weg 3 5. Design and Function ...............................................................16
D-79112 Freiburg 6. Installation and connection......................................................19
Germany 7. Operation.................................................................................20
Phone +49-(0)7664 / 5909-0 8. Servicing..................................................................................23
Fax +49-(0)7664 / 5909-99 9. Troubleshooting.......................................................................30
E-Mail: info@knf.de
10. Spare parts and accessories...................................................32
www.knf.de
11. Decontamination Declaration ..................................................34
KNF 121446-121449 11/12

Translation of original Operating Instructions, english Keep for future use!
Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18 About this document
1. About this document

1.1. Using the Operating Instructions
The Operating Instructions are part of the pump.
 Carefully study the Operating Instructions before using a
pump.
 Always keep the Operating Instructions handy in the work
area.
 Pass on the Operating Instructions to the next owner.
Project pumps Customer-specific project pumps (pump models which begin with
“PJ” or “PM”) may differ from the Operating Instructions.
 For project pumps, also observe the agreed upon specifica-
tions.
1.2. Symbols and Markings

Warning
A danger warning is located here.

Possible consequences of a failure to observe the
warning are specified here. The signal word, e.g.
WARNING Warning, indicates the danger level.
 Measures for avoiding the danger and its conse-
quences are specified here.
Danger levels
Signal word Meaning Consequences if not observed
DANGER warns of immedi- Death or serious injuries
ate danger and/or serious damage are the
consequence.
WARNING warns of possible Death or serious injuries
danger and/or serious damage are
possible.
CAUTION warns of a possibly Minor injuries or damage are
dangerous situa- possible.
tion
Tab. 1
Other information and symbols

 An activity to be carried out (a step) is specified here.
1. The first step of an activity to be carried out is specified here.
Additional, consecutively numbered steps follow.
This symbol refers to important information.
Translation of original Operating Instructions, english, KNF 121446-121449 11/12 3

Use Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
2. Use
2.1. Proper use
The pumps are exclusively intended for transferring gases and
vapors.
Owner's responsibility
Operating parameters and Only install and operate the pumps under the operating parameters
conditions and conditions described in chapter 4, Technical data.
Make sure that the installation location is dry and the pump is
protected against rain, splash, hose and drip water.
Requirements for Before using a medium, check whether the medium can be trans-
transferred medium ferred danger-free in the specific application case.
Before using a medium, check the compatibility of the materials of
the pump head, diaphragm and valves with the medium.
Only transfer gases which remain stable under the pressures and
temperatures occurring in the pump.
Accessories Laboratory equipment or additional components connected to a
pump have to be suitable for use with the pneumatic capabilities of
the pump.
2.2. Improper use

The pumps may not be operated in an explosive atmosphere.
The pumps are not suitable for transferring dusts.
The pumps are not suitable for transferring liquids.
The pumps must not be used to create vacuum and overpressure
simultaneously.
An overpressure must not be applied to the suction side of the
pump.
4 Translation of original Operating Instructions, english, KNF 121446-121449 11/12

Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18 Safety
3. Safety
Note the safety precautions in chapters
6. Installation and connection, and 7. Operation.
The pumps are built according to the generally recognized rules of
technology and in accordance with the occupational safety and
accident prevention regulations. Nevertheless, dangers can result
during their use which lead to injuries to the user or others, or to
damage to the pump or other property.
Only use the pumps when they are in a good technical and proper
working order, in accordance with their intended use, observing the
safety advice within the operating instructions, at all times.
Personnel Make sure that only trained and instructed personnel or specially
trained personnel work on the pumps. This especially applies to
assembly, connection and servicing work.
Make sure that the personnel has read and understood the operat-
ing instructions, and in particular the "Safety" chapter.
Working in a safety- Observe the accident prevention and safety regulations when
conscious manner performing any work on the pump and during operation.
Do not expose any part of your body to the vacuum.
Open housing parts with notice sticker (see fig. 1) only after
separating mains plug from power source.
Fig. 1: Notice sticker
Handling dangerous media When transferring dangerous media, observe the safety regula-
tions when handling these media.
Handling flammable media Be aware that the pumps are not designed to be explosion-proof.
Make sure the temperature of the medium is always sufficiently
below the ignition temperature of the medium, to avoid ignition or
explosion. This also applies for unusual operational situations.
Note that the temperature of the medium increases when the pump
compresses the medium.
Hence, make sure the temperature of the medium is sufficiently
below the ignition temperature of the medium, even when it is
compressed to the maximum permissible operating pressure of the
pump. The maximum permissible operating pressure of the pump
is stated in the technical specifications (see chapter 4).
If necessary, consider any external sources of energy, such as
radiation, that may add heat to the medium.
In case of doubt, consult the KNF customer service.
Environmental protection Store all replacement parts in a protected manner and dispose of
them properly in accordance with the applicable environmental
protection regulations. Observe the respective national and inter-
national regulations. This especially applies to parts contaminated
with toxic substances.

Safety Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
Standards The pumps conform to the Directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS2).

The pumps conform to the safety regulations of the EC Directive
2004/108/EC concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility and the EC
Directive 2006/42/EC concerning Machinery.
The following harmonized standards have been used:
 DIN EN 61010-1
 DIN EN 61000-3-2/3
 DIN EN 55014-1/2
The pumps correspond to IEC 664:
 the overvoltage category II
 the pollution degree 2
Customer service and Only have repairs to the pump carried out by the KNF Customer
repairs Service responsible.
Only authorized personnel should open those parts of the housing
that contain live electrical parts.
Use only genuine parts from KNF for servicing work.

Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18 Technical Data
4. Technical Data
All pumps are secured against overheating with thermal
switches and are equipped with a mains fuse.
Pump materials
N 816.1.2 KN.18 N 816.1.2 KN.45.18
N 816.3 KN.18 N 816.3 KN.45.18
Component Pump material*
Pump head PPS
Diaphragm EPDM
Valves/Sealings EPDM
Tab. 2 *according to DIN ISO 1629 and 1043.1
N 838.1.2 KN.18 N 838.1.2 KN.45.18

N 838.3 KN.18 N 838.3 KN.45.18
Pump head PPS
Diaphragm EPDM
Valves/Sealings FPM
N 816.1.2 KT.18 N 816.1.2 KT.45.18

N 816.3 KT.18 N 816.3 KT.45.18
N 838.1.2 KT.18 N 838.1.2 KT.45.18
N 838.3 KT.18 N 838.3 KT.45.18
Pump head PPS
Diaphragm PTFE-coated
Valves/Sealings FFPM
Refer to the type plate for the pump’s electrical configuration.

Technical Data Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
N 816.1.2 KN.18
N 816.1.2 KN.45.18
Pneumatic performance
Max. permissible operating 0.5

pressure [bar g]
Ultimate vacuum [mbar abs.] 100
Delivery rate at atm. pressure 30
[l/min]*
Pneumatic connections
Hose connection [mm] ID 6

Ambient and media temperature
Permissible + 5 °C to + 40 °C
ambient temperature
media temperature
Other parameters
Weight [kg] 3.95

Dimensions: L x H x W [mm] 361 x 141 x 102
Maximum permissible ambient 80 % for temperatures up to
relative humidity 31 °C, decreasing linearly to
50 % at 40 °C
Max. altitude of site 2000
[m above sea level]
Electrical Data
Voltage [V] 100 115 230

Frequency [Hz] 50/60 60 50
Max. operating current [A] 1.4 0.9 0.6
Power consumption pump [W] 100 100 100
Maximum permitted mains +/- 10 % +/- 10 % +/- 10 %
voltage fluctuations
Fuse pump** 2.5 2.5 1.25
(2x) T [A]
Protection class motor IP20
Tab. 5 *Liters in standard state (1,013 mbar)
**For spare part-No. see chapter 10

N 816.1.2 KT.18
N 816.1.2 KT.45.18

pressure [bar g]
[l/min]*

ambient temperature
media temperature
Other parameters
Weight [kg] 3.95

50 % at 40 °C
[m above sea level]
Electrical Data
Voltage [V] 100 115 230

Fuse pump** 2.5 2.5 1.25
(2x) T [A]

N 816.3 KN.18
N 816.3 KN.45.18

pressure [bar g]
[l/min]*

ambient temperature
media temperature
Other parameters
Weight [kg] 3.95

50 % at 40 °C
[m above sea level]
Electrical Data
Voltage [V] 100 115 230

Fuse pump** 2.5 2.5 1.25
(2x) T [A]

N 816.3 KT.18
N 816.3 KT.45.18

pressure [bar g]
[l/min]*

ambient temperature
media temperature
Other parameters
Weight [kg] 3.95

50 % at 40 °C
[m above sea level]
Electrical Data
Voltage [V] 100 115 230

Fuse pump** 2.5 2.5 1.25
(2x) T [A]

N 838.1.2 KN.18
N 838.1.2 KN.45.18

pressure [bar g]
[l/min]*

ambient temperature
media temperature
Other parameters
Weight [kg] 6.8

50 % at 40 °C
[m above sea level]
Electrical Data
Voltage [V] 100 115 220 230

Frequency [Hz] 50/60 60 60 50
Max. operating current [A] 1.2 0.8 0.45 0.5
Power consumption pump [W] 80 80 80 80
Maximum permitted mains +/- +/- +/- +/-
voltage fluctuations 10 % 10 % 10 % 10 %
Fuse pump** 2.5 1.6 1.0 1.0
(2x) T [A]

N 838.1.2 KT.18
N 838.1.2 KT.45.18

pressure [bar g]
[l/min]*

ambient temperature
media temperature
Other parameters
Weight [kg] 6.8

50 % at 40 °C
[m above sea level]
Electrical Data
Voltage [V] 100 115 220 230

Frequency [Hz] 50/60 60 60 50
Fuse pump** 2.5 1.6 1.0 1.0
(2x) T [A]

N 838.3 KN.18
N 838.3 KN.45.18

pressure [bar g]
[l/min]*

ambient temperature
media temperature
Other parameters
Weight [kg] 6.8

50 % at 40 °C
[m above sea level]
Electrical Data
Voltage [V] 100 115 220 230

Frequency [Hz] 50/60 60 60 50
Fuse pump** 2.5 1.6 1.0 1.0
(2x) T [A]
**for spare part-No. see chapter 10

N 838.3 KT.18
N 838.3 KT.45.18

pressure [bar g]
[l/min]*

ambient temperature
media temperature
Other parameters
Weight [kg] 6.8

50 % at 40 °C
[m above sea level]
Electrical Data
Voltage [V] 100 115 220 230

Frequency [Hz] 50/60 60 60 50
Fuse pump** 2.5 1.6 1.0 1.0
(2x) T [A]
**for spare part-No. see chapter 10

Design and Function Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
5. Design and Function

Design N 816.1.2 K_.18
1 Outlet (pressure side)

2 Pneumatic connection
3 Pump head
4 Inlet (suction side)
5 Power switch
Fig. 2
Design N 816.3 K_.18

4 Pump head
5 Power switch
Fig. 3
Design N 838.1.2 K_.18

2 Pump head
5 Power switch
Fig. 4

Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18 Design and Function
Design N 838.3 K_.18

2 Pump head
5 Power switch
Fig. 5
Design N 8__.1.2 __.45.18 and N 8__.3 __.45.18

4 Pump head
5 Power switch
6 Fine-adjustment valve
7 Manometer
Fig. 6

Design and Function Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
Function Diaphragm Pump
1 Outlet valve
2 Inlet valve
3 Transfer chamber
4 Diaphragm
5 Eccentric
6 Connecting rod
7 Pump drive
Fig. 7: Pump head

Diaphragm pumps transfer, compress (depending on pump ver-
sion) and evacuate gases and vapors.
The elastic diaphragm (4) is moved up and down by the eccentric
(5) and the connecting rod (6). In the downward stroke it aspirates
the gas to be transferred via the inlet valve (2). In the upward
stroke, the diaphragm presses the medium out of the pump head
via the outlet valve (1). The transfer chamber (3) is hermetically
separated from the pump drive (7) by the diaphragm.

Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18 Installation and connection
6. Installation and connection

Only install and operate the pumps under the operating parameters
and conditions described in chapter 4, Technical data.
Observe the safety precautions (see chapter 3).
6.1. Installation
 Before installation, store the pump at the installation location to
bring it up to room temperature.
Dimensions  See chapter 4, Technical data, for the dimensions of pump.
Cooling air supply  Install the pump so that the motor fan can intake sufficient
cooling air.
Installation location  Make sure that the installation location is dry and the pump is
protected against rain, splash, hose and drip water.
 Choose a safe location (flat surface) for the pump.
 Protect the pump from dust.
 Protect the pump from vibrations and jolts.
6.2. Connection
Connected components  Only connect components to the pump which are designed for
the pneumatic data of the pump (see chapter 4).
Pump exhaust  If the pump is used as a vacuum pump, safely discharge the
pump exhaust at the pump’s pneumatic outlet.
Connection A marking on the pump head shows the direction of flow.
1. Remove the protective plugs from the pneumatic connectors of

the pump.
2. Mount accessory parts filter or silencer (if present).
Before mounting the filter, unscrew the hose connector from
the thread in the pump head.
3. Connect the suction line and pressure line (N 816._K_.18: tube
ID 6 mm and N 838._K_.18: tube ID 10 mm).
4. Lay the suction and pressure line at a downward angle to
prevent condensate from running into the pump.
5. Insert the power cable’s plug into a properly installed
shockproof socket.

Operation Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
7. Operation
7.1. Preparing for Start-up
Before switching on the pump, observe the following points:
Operational requirements
Pump  All hoses attached properly
 Fan openings not blocked
 Specifications of the power supply correspond with
the data on the pump’s type plate.
 The pump outlet is not closed or constricted.
Tab. 13
7.2. Starting
 Only operate the pump under the operating parameters and
conditions described in chapter 4, Technical data.
 Make sure the pump is used properly (see chapter 2.1).
 Make sure the pump is not used improperly (see chapter 2.2).
 Observe the safety precautions (see chapter 3).
Hazard of the pump head bursting due to excessive

pressure increase
 Do not exceed max. permissible operating
WARNING pressure (see chapter 4).
 Monitor pressure during operation.
 If the pressure exceeds the maximum permissi-
ble operating pressure, immediately shut down
pump and eliminate fault (see chapter 9. Trou-
bleshooting).
 Only throttle or regulate the air or gas quantity in
the suction line to prevent the maximum permis-
sible operating pressure from being exceeded.
 If the air or gas quantity in the pressure line is
throttled or regulated, make sure that the maxi-
mum permissible operating pressure of the
pump is not exceeded.
Excessive pressure (with all of the related hazards) can be

prevented by placing a bypass line with a pressure-relief valve
between the pressure and suction side of the pump. For further
information, contact your KNF technical adviser.
Pump standstill  With the pump at a standstill, open pressure and suction lines
to normal atmospheric pressure.

Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18 Operation
Automatic starting can cause personal injury and

pump damage
When the operation of the pump is interrupted by the
WARNING thermal switch, the pump will restart automatically
after cooling down.
 After triggering of the thermal protection or in the
event of power failure, remove the pump’s mains
plug from the socket so that the pump cannot
start uncontrollably.
 Attempt work on the pump only if the pump is
separated from mains power.
7.3. Switching pump on and off

Switching pump on
The pump may not start up against pressure or suction during
switch-on. This also applies in operation following a brief power
failure. If a pump starts against pressure or vacuum, it may
block. This activates the thermal switch, and the pump
switches off.
 Make sure that no vacuum or pressure is present in the lines
during switch-on.
 Switch on pump with mains switch (see fig. 2 to 6, depending
on pump type)
Switching off the pump/removing from operation

 When transferring aggressive media, flush the pump prior to
switch-off to increase the service life of the diaphragm (see
chapter 8.2.1).
 Switch off pump with mains switch (see fig. 2 to 6, depending
on pump type).
 Open pressure and suction lines to normal atmospheric pres-
sure.
 Disconnect the power source.

Operation Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
7.4. Adjusting flow volume (versions with fine-

adjustment valve)
 Regulate the flow volume of the pump at the valve knob of
fine-adjustment valve (see fig. 8/1).
Fig. 8: Fine-adjustment valve

Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18 Servicing
8. Servicing
8.1. Servicing Schedule
Component Servicing interval

Pump Regular inspection for external damage
or leaks
Filter (Accessory) Replace if it is dirty
Diaphragm and valve Replace at the latest, when pump
plates/sealings output decreases
Tab. 14
8.2. Cleaning
When cleaning, make sure that no liquids enter the inside of
the housing.
8.2.1. Flushing Pump

 Before switching off the pump, flush it with air (if neccesary for
safety reasons: with an inert gas) for about five minutes under
atmospheric conditions (ambient pressure).
8.2.2. Cleaning Pump

 As far as possible, clean the parts with a dry cloth.
 Only use solvents for cleaning if the head materials cannot be
attacked (check the resistance of the material!).
 If compressed air is available, blow out the components.

Servicing Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
8.3. Changing Diaphragm and Valves

8.3.1. N 816._K_.18
Conditions  Pump is switched off and mains plug is removed from the
socket
 Pump is clean and free of hazardous materials
 Tubes removed from pump’s pneumatic inlet and outlet
Spare parts/tools Spare part/tool

Service Set (according to chapter 10)
Philips-head screwdriver No. 2
Small screwdriver (blade width 0.5 mm)
Pencil
Tab. 15
Information on procedure  Always replace diaphragm and valve plates/sealings together
to maintain the pump performance.
 Replace the diaphragms and valve plates/sealings of two-
headed pumps consecutively.
Health hazard due to dangerous substances

in the pump!
Depending on the substance transferred, caustic
WARNING burns or poisoning are possible.
 Wear protective clothing if necessary, e.g.
protective gloves.
 Flush pump before replacing the diaphragm and
valve plates/sealings (see chapter 8.2.1).
Removing pump heads

1. At both pump heads: Mark the position of head plate (4),
intermediate plate (1), cover (13) and housing (14) relative to
each other by a drawing line (M) with a pencil. This helps avoid
incorrect assembly later.
2. At both pump heads: Undo the 4 screws (5) in the head plate
(4).
3. Remove both pump heads (each consisting of a head plate (4)
and intermediate plate (1)) together from the pump housing
(14).
Fig. 9: Removing pump heads

Change diaphragm
Replace the diaphragms consecutively to ensure the same
number of diaphragm spacers is used as before.
1. Push down one diaphragm (11) to bring the other diaphragm to
top dead centre.
2. Lift the edge of the highest diaphragm (11) and, gripping it on
opposite sides, unscrew it by turning anti-clockwise.
Make sure the diaphragm spacers (12) on the thread of the
diaphragm (11) do not fall into the pump housing.
3. Take the diaphragm spacers (12) off the threaded portion of
the diaphragm (11) and retain them.
4. Check that all parts are free from dirt and clean them if neces-
sary (see chapter 6. Cleaning).
5. Put the diaphragm spacers (12) on the thread of the new
diaphragm (11).
6. Push down the diaphragm (11) of the second pump head until
the connecting rod (connecting part between motor shaft and
Fig. 10: Pump head
diaphragm) is at top dead centre.
(exploded drawing)
7. Screw the new diaphragm (11), complete with diaphragm
spacers (12), into the connecting rod (clockwise) and tighten it
by hand.
8. Carry out steps 1 to 7 for the second pump head.
Changing the valve plates/sealings

Replacing the valve plates/sealings of pump-heads
consecutively.
1. Only for Pumps N 816.3 KN.18, N 816.3 KT.18,
N 816.3 KN.45.18 and N 816.3 KT.45.18:
Pull the connecting tube (10) out of one of the two head plates
(4); take care to ensure that the sealing (8) and the O-ring (9)
are not lost.
2. For one pump head: Use a small screwdriver to undo the two
screw caps (6) on the pump head and then undo the screws
(7).
3. Separate the head plate (4) from intermediate plate (1).
4. Remove the valve plates/sealings (2) from the intermediate
plate (1).
5. Check that the valve seats, intermediate plate (1) and the head
plate (4) are clean; if scratches or distortion are evident on
these parts they should be replaced.
6. Lay the new valve plates/sealings (2) in the recesses in the
intermediate plate (1). The valve plates/sealings for suction
and pressure sides are identical, as are upper and lower sides
of the valve plates/sealings.

7. Check that the valve plates/sealings (2) are not deformed by

moving them gently sideways in their recesses.
8. Place the head plate (4) on the intermediate plate (1), in the
position indicated by the marking (M).
9. Check that the head plate (4) is centred by moving it gently
sideways.
10. Join the head plate (4) and the intermediate plate (1): Tighten
the two screws (7) (tightening torque: 70 Ncm).
For placement of disk spring (15) and washer (16) and for
orientation of disk spring see fig. 11.
11. Install the screw caps (6).
Fig. 11: Orientation disk spring 13. Dispose of the old diaphragms and valve plates/sealings
properly.
Refit pump heads

1. Only for pumps N 816.3 KN.18, N 816.3 KT.18,
N 816.3 KN.45.18 and N 816.3 KT.45.18:
Put the sealing (fig. 10/8) into the head plate (4); push the con-
necting tube (10) into the hole in the head plate (4).
It is necessary to ensure that the O-ring (9) lies on the end of
the connecting tube.
2. Place the two pump heads that are joined by the pneumatic
connecting tube(s) (10) on the housing according to the mark-
ings (M).
Make sure the cover (13) is placed on the pump head and is
not jammed. For this, carefully slide a small screw driver be-
tween the cover (13) and the pump head
If the cover is jammed between the intermediate plate (1) and
head plate (4), then the pump will not provide the nominal
pneumatical performance.
3. On both pump heads: Gently tighten the screws (5), evenly
and diagonally (tightening torque: 3 Nm).
Final steps
1. Reconnect suction and pressure line to the pump.
2. Reconnect the pump to the electricity supply.
If you have any question about servicing call your KNF technical
adviser (see last page for contact telephone number).

8.3.2. 838._K_.18
Conditions  Pump is switched off and mains plug is removed from the
socket
 Pump is clean and free of hazardous materials
 Tubes removed from pump’s pneumatic inlet and outlet
Spare parts/tools Spare parts/tools

Service Set (according to chapter 10)
Philips-head screwdriver No. 2
Small screwdriver (blade width 0.5 mm)
Pencil
Tab. 16
Information on procedure  Always replace diaphragm and valve plates/sealings together
to maintain the pump performance.
 Replace the diaphragms and valve plates/sealings of the pump
heads consecutively.
Health hazard due to dangerous substances

in the pump!
Depending on the substance transferred, caustic
WARNING burns or poisoning are possible.
 Wear protective clothing if necessary, e.g.
protective gloves.
 Flush pump before replacing the diaphragm and
valve plates/sealings (see chapter 8.2.1).
Remove pump heads

1. At both pump heads: Mark the position of head plate (4),
intermediate plate (1), cover (13) and housing (14) relative to
each other by a drawing line (M) with a pencil. This helps avoid
incorrect assembly later.
2. At both pump heads: Undo the 4 screws (5) in the head plate
(4).
3. Remove both pump heads (each consisting of a head plate (4)
and intermediate plate (1)) together from the pump housing
(14).
Fig. 12: Remove pump heads

Change diaphragm
Replace the diaphragms consecutively to ensure that the same
number of diaphragm spacers is used as before.
1. Push down one diaphragm (11) to bring the other diaphragm to
top dead centre.
2. Lift the edge of the highest diaphragm (11) and, gripping it on
opposite sides, unscrew it by turning anti-clockwise.
Make sure the diaphragm spacers (12) on the thread of the
diaphragm (11) do not fall into the pump housing.
3. Take the diaphragm spacers (12) off the threaded portion of
the diaphragm (11) and retain them.
4. Check that all parts are free from dirt and clean them if neces-
sary (see chapter 6. Cleaning).
5. Put the diaphragm spacers (12) on the thread of the new
diaphragm (11).
6. Push down the diaphragm (11) of the second pump head until
Fig. 13: Pump head (Exploded the connecting rod (connecting part between motor shaft and
drawing) diaphragm) is at top dead centre.
7. Screw the new diaphragm (11), complete with diaphragm
spacers (12), into the connecting rod (clockwise) and tighten it
by hand.
Changing the valve plates/sealings

1. For one pump head: Use a small screwdriver to undo the
screw cap (6) on the pump head and then undo the screw (7).
2. Separate the head plate (4) from intermediate plate (1).
3. Remove the valve plates/sealings (2) from the intermediate
plate (1).
4. Check that the valve seats, intermediate plate (1) and the head
plate (4) are clean; if scratches or distortion are evident on
these parts they should be replaced.
5. Lay the new valve plates/sealings (2) in the recesses in the
intermediate plate (1). The valve plates/sealings for suction
and pressure sides are identical, as are upper and lower sides
of the valve plates/sealings.
6. Check that the valve plates/sealings (2) are not deformed by
moving them gently sideways in their recesses.
7. Place the head plate (4) on the intermediate plate (1), in the
position indicated by the marking (M).
8. Check that the head plate (4) is centred by moving it gently
sideways.
9. Join the head plate (4) and the intermediate plate (1): Tighten
the screw (7) (tightening torque: 70 Ncm).

For placement of disk spring (15) and washer (16) and for
orientation of disk spring see fig. 14.
10. Install the screw caps (6).
12. Dispose of the old diaphragms and valve plates/sealings
properly.
Refit pump heads

1. Place the two pump heads that are joined by the pneumatic
connecting tube on the housing according to the markings (M).
Make sure the cover (fig. 12/13) is placed on the pump head
and is not jammed. For this, carefully slide a small screw driver
Fig. 14: Orientation disk spring between the cover (13) and the pump head.
If the cover is jammed between the intermediate plate (1) and
head plate (4), then the pump will not provide the nominal
pneumatical performance.
2. On both pump heads: Gently tighten the screws (5), evenly
and diagonally (tightening torque: 3 Nm)
Final steps
1. Reconnect suction and pressure line to the pump.
2. Reconnect the pump to the electricity supply.
If you have any question about servicing call your KNF technical
adviser (see last page for contact telephone number).

Troubleshooting Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
9. Troubleshooting
Extreme danger from electrical shock!
 Disconnect the pump power supply before working
on the pump.
DANGER
 Make sure the pump is de-energized and secure.
 Check the pump (see Tab. 17 to 20).
Pump produces no flow

Cause Fault remedy
No voltage in the power source  Check room fuse and switch on if necessary.
Thermal switch has operated  Disconnect pump from mains.
following to over-heating.  Allow pump to cool.
 Trace cause of over-heating and eliminate it.
Connections or lines blocked.  Check connections and lines.
 Remove blockage.
External valve is closed or filter is  Check external valves and filters.
clogged.
Condensate has collected in pump  Detach the condensate source from the pump.
head.  Flush pump (see chapter 8.2.1).
Diaphragm or valve  Replace diaphragm and valve plates/sealings
plates/sealings are worn. (see chapter 8.3).
Tab. 17
Flow rate, pressure or vacuum too low

The pump does not achieve the output specified in the Technical data or the data sheet.
Cause Fault remedy
Condensate has collected in pump  Detach the condensate source from the pump.
head.  Flush pump (see chapter 8.2.1).
There is gauge pressure on pres-  Change the pressure conditions.
sure side and at the same time
vacuum or a pressure above
atmospheric pressure on suction
side.
Pneumatic lines or connection  Disconnect pump from system to determine output values.
parts have an insufficient cross  Eliminate throttling (e.g. valve) if necessary.
section.  Use lines or connection parts with larger cross section if
necessary.
Leaks occur on connections, lines  Check that tubes sit correctly on hose nozzles.
or pump head.  Replace leaky tubes.
 Eliminate leaks.
Connections or lines completely or  Check connections and lines.
partially jammed.  Remove the jamming parts and particles.
Head parts are soiled.  Clean head components.
Diaphragm or valve  Replace diaphragm and valve plates/sealings,
plates/sealings are worn. (see chapter 8.3).

Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18 Troubleshooting
Flow rate, pressure or vacuum too low

The pump does not achieve the output specified in the Technical data or the data sheet.
Cause Fault remedy
After diaphragm and valve  Check that the spacers have been replaced onto the
plates/sealings have been diaphragm screw thread.
replaced  Check head connection and hose connections for leaks.
 Possibly carefully tighten the outer screws of the top plate
crosswise.
Tab. 18
Pump is switched on, but does not run, the on/off-switch on the pump is not lit
Cause Fault remedy
Pump is not connected with the  Connect pump to mains power.
power source.
No voltage in the power source  Check room fuse and switch on if necessary.
Fuse in the pump is defective.  Remove pump’s mains plug from the socket.
 Pumps 816._K_.18: Fuses are located in the housing, and
can be accessed by removing the fan cover
 Pumps 838._K_.18: Fuses are located in the housing, and
can be accessed by removing the terminal box plate on the
bottom of the pump.
 Select and replace suitable fuse (see chapter 4).
Tab. 19
Pump is switched on, but does not run, the on/off-switch on the pump is lit
Cause Fault remedy
The thermal switch has opened  Remove pump´s mains plug from the socket.
due to overheating  Allow pump to cool.
 Trace cause of over-heating and eliminate it.
Tab. 20
Fault cannot be rectified

If you are unable to determine any of the specified causes, send
the pump to KNF Customer Service (see last page for the ad-
dress).
1. Flush the pump to free the pump head of dangerous or ag-
gressive gases (see chapter 8.2.1).
2. Clean the pump (see chapter 8.2.2).
3. Send the pump to KNF with a filled out decontamination decla-
ration (see chapter 11) and specification of the medium trans-
ferred.

Spare parts and accessories Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
10. Spare parts and accessories

10.1. Spare parts
A Service Set contains all spare parts needed for one complete
service
 2 diaphragms
 4 valve plates/sealings
Service Set for pump type: Order-No.:

N 816.1.2 KN.18 056315
N 816.1.2 KN.45.18 056315
N 816.1.2 KT.18 056316
N 816.3 KT.45.18 056316
N 816.3 KN.18 056315
N 816.3 KN.45.18 056315
N 816.3 KT.18 056316
N 816.3 KT.45.18 056316
N 838.1.2 KN.18 111952
N 838.1.2 KN.45.18 111952
N 838.1.2 KT.18 111953
N 838.1.2 KT.45.18 111953
N 838.3 KN.18 111952
N 838.3 KN.45.18 111952
N 838.3 KT.18 111953
N 838.3 KT.45.18 111953
Tab. 21
Fuses
Each pump contains two fuses.
Pump range Order-No. fuse

(1 piece)
N 816._K_.18, 230 V 027574
N 816._K_.18, 115 V 027575
N 816._K_.18, 100 V 027575
N 838._ K_.18, 230 V 025250
N 838._ K_.18, 115 V 020255
N 838._ K_.18, 100 V 027575
N 838._ K_.18, 220 V 025250
Tab. 22

Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18 Spare parts and accessories
10.2. Accessories
N 816 K_.18
Description Order-No.:
Silencer 000345
Hose connector PVDF 014052
Fine-adjustment valve 056547
Tab. 23
N 838._ K_.18
Description Order-No.:
Silencer 007006
Hose connector PVDF 112004
Fine-adjustment valve 112432
Tab. 24

Decontamination Declaration Mini Laboratory pumps N 816.18, N 838.18
11. Decontamination Declaration

The condition for the repair of a pump by KNF is the certifica-
tion of the customer on the transferred media and on the
cleaning of the pump (decontamination declaration).
 Copy this page.
 Enter the pump model, the Serial No. and the transferred
media in the form below and sent the signed form together with
the flushed and cleaned pump to KNF Customer Service (see
last page for the address).
Customer decontamination declaration for

repair order
We herewith confirm that the following media have been pumped

with the pump listed below, and that the pump has been flushed
and cleaned.
Pump model
Serial No.
Fed media
The pump contains neither aggressive, biological, radioactive,

poisonous nor other dangerous media.
Company Date/Signature

KNF worldwide
Benelux Great Britain Sweden, Denmark,
Netherlands KNF Neuberger U.K. Ltd. Finland, Norway
KNF Verder B.V. Avenue 2 KNF Neuberger AB
Utrechtseweg 4a Station Lane Mejerivägen 4,
NL-3451 GG Vleuten Industrial Estate P.O. Box 44060
Tel. 0031 (0)30 677 92 40 Witney Oxon OX28 4FA SE-10073 Stockholm
Fax 0031 (0)30 677 92 47 Tel. 0044 (0)1993 77 83 73 Tel. 0046 (0) 87445113
E-mail: info@knf-verder.nl Fax 0044 (0)1993 77 51 48 Fax 0046 (0) 87445117
www.knf-verder.nl E-mail: info@knf.co.uk E-mail: info@knf.se
www.knf.co.uk www.knf.se
Benelux
Belgium, Luxembourg India Switzerland
KNF Verder N.V. KNF Pumps + Systems Sales
Kontichsesteenweg 17 (India) Pvt. Ltd. KNF Neuberger AG
B-2630 Aartselaar RAJIV GANDHI INFOTECH PARK Stockenstrasse 6
Tel. 0032 (0)3 8719624 Phase 1 CH-8362 Bichelsee-Balterswil
Fax 0032 (0)3 8719628 Ganga Estate, Survey No. 152/2/2 Tel. 0041 (0)71 973 993 0
E-mail: info@knf.be Above AXIS BANK Fax 0041 (0)71 973 993 1
www.knf.be Hinjewadi E-mail: knf@knf.ch
Pune 411 057 www.knf.ch
China Tel. 0091 (0)20 640 13 923
KNF Neuberger Trading 0091 (0)20 640 08 923 Taiwan
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd Fax 0091 (0)20 229 33 923 KNF Neuberger Ltd.
No. 36 Lane 1000 E-mail: info@knfpumps.in 9-2 FL., No., 24, Lane 123,
Zhang Heng Road www.knfpumps.in Section 6,
Shanghai 201203, P.R. China
Ming Chuan East Road
Tel. 0086 (0)21 685 965 66 Italy Taipei City, Taiwan
Fax 0086 (0)21 339 006 26 KNF ITALIA S.r.l. Tel. 00886-2-2794-1011
E-mail: info@knf.com.cn Via Flumendosa, 10 Fax 00886-2-8792-1648
www.knf.com.cn I-20132 Milano E-mail: knftwn@knftwn.com.tw
Tel. 0039 02 27 20 38 60 www.knftwn.com.tw
Germany Fax 0039 02 27 20 38 48
KNF Neuberger GmbH E-mail: info@knf.it USA, Canada, South America
Alter Weg 3 D-79112 Freiburg www.knf.it KNF NEUBERGER, INC.
Tel. 0049 (0)7664 5909-0 Two Black Forest Road
Fax 0049 (0)7664 5909-99 Japan Trenton, New Jersey
E-mail: info@knf.de KNF Japan Co.Ltd. 08691-1810
www.knf.de Chichibu, Bldg. 7F Tel. 001 (609) 890 86 00
1-8-6 Shinkawa, Chuo-ku, Fax 001 (609) 890 83 23
France, Morocco, Tokyo, Japan 104-0033 E-mail: knfusa@knf.com
Algeria Tel. 0081 (0)3 3551-7931 www.knf.com/usa.htm
KNF Neuberger Fax 0081 (0)3 3551-7932 South America
4, Bld. d’Alsace Z.I. Direct Phone: 001 609 649 1010
E-mail: info@knf.co.jp
F-68128 Village-Neuf E-mail: gb@knf.com
www.knf.co.jp
Tel. 0033 (0)389 70 35 00
Fax 0033 (0)389 69 92 52
Korea
E-mail: info@knf.fr
www.knf.fr KNF Neuberger Ltd.
Woosan Bldg.RM#202,
336-4, Hwikyung-Dong
Dongdaemun-Ku.,
130-090, Seoul
Tel. 0082 (0)2 959-0255/6
Fax 0082 (0)2 959-0254
E-mail: knf@knfkorea.com
www.knfkorea.com
KNF product centres

Product centre for gas Product centre for fluid Product centre for micro
pumps: pumps: pumps:
Germany Switzerland Switzerland
KNF Neuberger GmbH KNF FLODOS AG KNF Micro AG
Alter Weg 3 Wassermatte 2 Zelglimatte 1b
D-79112 Freiburg CH-6210 Sursee CH-6260 Reiden
Phone 0049(0)7664 5909-0 Phone 0041(0)41 925 00 25 Tel. 0041(0)62 787 88 88
Fax 0049(0)7664 5909-99 Fax 0041(0)41 925 00 35 Fax 0041(0)62 787 88 99
E-mail: info@knf.de E-mail: info@knf-flodos.ch E-mail: info@knf-micro.ch
www.knf.de www.knf-flodos.ch www.knf-micro.ch
Safety instructions
Iwaki
Electromagnetic Metering Pump
Outline
EWN-R (Standard)
Installation
Operation
Instruction manual
Maintenance
Thank you for choosing our product.
Please read through this instruction manual before use.
This instruction manual describes important precautions and

instructions for the product. Always keep it on hand for quick
Specification
reference.
2008 IWAKI CO., LTD.

Order confirmation
After unpacking, check the following points. Contact us or your nearest

distributor if the delivery is imperfect.
a. Check if the delivery is as per order.

Check the nameplate to see if the in-
formation such as discharge capacity,
discharge pressure and power voltage
are as per order.
b. Check if the delivery is damaged or deformed.

Check for transit damage and loose bolts.
2 Order confirmation
Contents
Order confirmation ............................................................................................. 2
Safety instructions ....................................................................... 6
Warning ............................................................................................................. 7
Caution .............................................................................................................. 8
Precautions for use ........................................................................................10
Outline ......................................................................................... 12
Introduction .....................................................................................................12
Pump structure & Operating principle .........................................................12
Features .......................................................................................................14
Operational functions...................................................................................14
Part names.......................................................................................................19
Pump............................................................................................................19
Operational panel ....................................................................................... 20
Basic displays & Pump states ................................................................21
Identification codes ....................................................................................... 23
Pump/Drive units ........................................................................................ 23
Installation .................................................................................. 25
Pump mounting.............................................................................................. 25
Pipework ......................................................................................................... 26
Tube connection ......................................................................................... 26
Check valve mounting ................................................................................ 28
Wiring .............................................................................................................. 30
Power voltage/Earthing .............................................................................. 30
Signal wire connection................................................................................ 32
Connections .......................................................................................... 34
Contents 3
Operation ..................................................................................... 37
Before operation .............................................................................................37

Points to be checked ...................................................................................37
Retightening of pump head fixing bolts .......................................................37
Use of hexagon wrench instead of a torque wrench ............................. 38
Degassing ................................................................................................... 38
Flow rate adjustment ...................................................................................41
Stroke rate adjustment ...........................................................................42
Stroke length adjustment....................................................................... 44
Before a long period of stoppage (One month or more) ............................. 45
Operation programming ............................................................................... 45
Programming flow ....................................................................................... 46
Manual operation ........................................................................................ 48
EXT operation............................................................................................. 49
EXT mode ............................................................................................. 49
EXT mode programming ....................................................................... 50
User mode .................................................................................................. 59
STOP/Pre-STOP function ..................................................................... 60
STOP/Pre-STOP function cancellation ................................................. 62
OUTPUT function .................................................................................. 64
ANA-V/-R selection ............................................................................... 66
Buffer ON/OFF selection....................................................................... 68
PIN number entry ...................................................................................70
Keypad lock .................................................................................................72
Keypad lock activation............................................................................73
Keypad lock release ...............................................................................73
Calibration mode .........................................................................................74
Unit change..................................................................................................75
spm indication ..............................................................................................75
4 Contents
Maintenance ................................................................................ 76
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 77
Inspection ....................................................................................................... 79
Daily inspection ...........................................................................................79
Periodic inspection ......................................................................................79
Wear part replacement .................................................................................. 80
Wear part list............................................................................................... 80
Before replacement .....................................................................................81
Valve set replacement .................................................................................81
Discharge valve set dismantlement/assembly .......................................81
Suction valve set dismantlement/assembly .......................................... 83
Spacer set replacement (Auto degassing type) .................................... 84
Air vent valve set replacement (Auto degassing type) .......................... 85
Diaphragm replacement ............................................................................. 85
Exploded view ................................................................................................ 88
Pump head, Drive unit & Control unit ......................................................... 88
Pump head ................................................................................................. 89
EWN-[B09•B11•B16•B21•C16•C21] [VC•VH•PC•PH•TC] ..................... 89
EWN-[B31•C31•C36] [VC•VH•PC•PH•TC]............................................ 90
EWN FC .................................................................................................91
EWN C31PC/P6-V ................................................................................ 92
EWN SH/SH-H/SH-H2 .......................................................................... 93
EWN with an Automatic air vent ............................................................ 94
Specifications/Outer dimensions ................................................................ 95
Specifications ............................................................................................. 95
Pump unit .............................................................................................. 95
Power cable ............................................................................................97
Pump colour ...........................................................................................97
Outer dimensions........................................................................................ 98
Contents 5
Safety instructions
Read through this section before use. This section describes
important information for you to prevent personal injury or
property damage.
■ Symbols
In this instruction manual, the degree of risk caused by incorrect use is noted
with the following symbols. Please pay attention to the information associated
with the symbols.
Indicates mishandling could lead to a fatal or

WARNING serious accident.
Indicates mishandling could lead to personal

CAUTION injury or property damage.
A symbol accompanies each precaution, suggesting the use of "Caution", "Pro-

hibited actions" or specific "Requirements".
Caution marks Prohibited mark Requirement mark
Caution Electrical Prohibited Do not rework Requirement Wear Grounding

shock or alter protection
Export restrictions
Information contained within this instruction manual may be considered con-
trolled technology as set by the Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and
Industry (METI). An export license issued by METI may be required when
exporting or providing the manual to a 3rd party.
6 Safety instructions
Safety instructions
WARNING
Turn off power before work

Risk of electrical shock. Be sure to turn off power to stop the pump
and related devices before work. Electrical
shock
Stop operation
On sensing any abnormality or danger, suspend operation immedi-
ately and inspect/solve problems. Requirement
Do not use the pump in anything other than a specified purpose

The use of the pump in any purpose other than those clearly speci-
fied may result in failure or injury. Use this product in a specified
Prohibition
condition.
Do not modify the pump

Remodelling the pump carries a high degree of risk. We are not
responsible for any failure or injury results from remodelling.
Do not remodel
Wear protective clothing

Always wear protective clothing such as an eye protection, chemi-
cal resistant gloves, a mask and a work cap during dismantlement,
Wear
assembly or maintenance work. protectors
Do not damage a power cable

Do not pull or knot a power cable or place a heavy stuff on it. Dam-
age to the cable could lead to a fire or electrical shock. Prohibition
Do not use the pump in a flammable atmosphere

Do not place dangerous or flammable goods near the pump for your
safety.
Prohibition
WARNING 7
CAUTION
A qualified operator only

The pump must be handled or operated by a qualified person with a
full understanding of the pump. Any person who is not familiar with
Requirement
this product should not take part in operation or management.
Use a specified power only

Do not apply any power other than the one specified on the nameplate.
Otherwise, failure or fire may result. Also, be sure to earth the pump.
Prohibition
Do not run pump dry

Do not run pump dry for more than 30 minutes (even when the
pump runs for degassing). Otherwise, the pump head fixing screws
may loosen and liquid may leak. Optimise your system in order for
the pump not to run dry. If the pump runs dry for a long period (for Caution
more than 30 minutes), the pump head and the valve cases may
deform by friction heat and consequently leakage results.
Do not wet electric parts or wiring

Risk of fire or electrical shock. Install the pump free from liquid spill.
Prohibition
Observe an applicable MSDS

Take account of installation environment. Chemicals should be
controlled in accordance with a MSDS.
Caution
Do not install or store the pump in the following places where...

• Under a flammable atmosphere or in a dusty/humid place.
• Ambient temperature exceeds 40ºC or falls below 0ºC.
• Under direct sunlight or wind & rain. Prohibition
Countermeasure against efflux

Take protective measures against an accidental chemical overflow
results from pump or piping breakage. Requirement
8 CAUTION
Safety instructions
Do not use the pump in a water place
The pump is not totally waterproof. The use of the pump in water or
high humidity could lead to electrical shock or short circuit.
Prohibition
Earthing
Risk of electrical shock. Always earth the pump.
Earthing
Install an earth leakage breaker

An electrical failure of the pump may adversely affect related de-
vices. Purchase and install an earth leakage breaker separately. Caution
Wear part replacement

Follow instructions in this manual for wear part replacement. Do not
dismantle the pump beyond the extent of the instructions. Requirement
Do not use a damaged pump

Using a damaged control unit could lead to an electric leak or shock.
Prohibition
Disposal of the used pump

Dispose of any used or damaged pump in accordance with relevant regu-
lations. Consult a licensed industrial waste products disposing company. Requirement
Tighten the pump head

Liquid may leak if pump head fixing bolts are loose. Tighten the
bolts evenly to the following torque in diagonal order before initial
operation. Periodically retighten them for the prevention of leakage.
Tightening torque
Caution
EWN-B11/-B16/-B21/-C16/-C21 : 2.16 N•m
EWN-B31/-C31/-C36 : 2.55 N•m
Solution compatibility
This pump has been evaluated for use with water only. The suitabil-
ity of this pump for use with liquids other than water, such as acid
and alkaline, is the responsibility of the user. For liquids other than
Caution
water, select the best-suited liquid end material combination using a
chemical compatibility chart.
CAUTION 9
Precautions for use
• Electrical work should be performed by a qualified opera-

tor. Otherwise, personal or property damage accident may
result. Caution
• Do not install the pump in the following places where...

–Under a flammable atmosphere or in a dusty/humid place.
–Under direct sunlight or wind & rain.
– Ambient temperature exceeds 40ºC or falls below 0ºC.
Protect the pump with a cover when installing it out of
doors.
• Select a level location where is free from vibration and liq-

uid can't stay. Anchor the pump with M5 bolts so as not to
vibrate. If the pump is installed at a tilt, a flow may reduce.
• When two or more pumps are installed, the pump opera-

tion interacts each other and vibration becomes significant,
resulting in poor performance or failure of internal electri-
cal devices. Select an installation location where tolerates Caution
vibration to enough degree.
• Keep an ample working area around the pump for inspec-

tion and maintenance.
Caution
• Install the pump as close to a supply tank.

Caution
• Install the pump in a cool and dark place when handling

liquids that readily generate gas bubbles such as sodium
hypochlorite or hydrazine solution. Flooded suction applica- Caution
tion is strongly recommended for these liquids.
10 Precautions for use
Safety instructions
• Be careful not to drop the pump onto the floor. A strong
impact may reduce pump performance. Do not use a pump
which has once damaged. Otherwise an electrical leak or
shock may result.
• The pump is a light water-/dust-proof structure of IP65, but

is not totally waterproof. Do not have the pump wet with the
liquid handled or rainwater. Caution
• Never wet the pump head, control unit and drive unit. Oth-
erwise, failure or an accident may result. Immediately wipe
off liquid if the pump has got wet. Caution
• Do not close a discharge line during operation. Otherwise,

liquid may leak or tubing may break.
Caution
• Do not remove the control unit. Note that an applicable con-

trol unit differs with each drive unit. Do not attach a control
unit to a different drive unit. Otherwise, an electrical circuit or
Caution
the drive unit may fail.
• Release pressure from a discharge line before dismantling

the pump or removing tubing. Otherwise, chemical liquid
gushes out. Requirement
• Be careful not to come in contact with residual liquid.
Caution
• Do not clean the pump or nameplate with a solvent such

as benzine and thinner. This may discolour the pump or
erase printing. Use a dry cloth or a wet cloth with water
Thinner
Benzine
or neutral detergent.
Precautions for use 11

Outline
The information such as characteristics, features and part
names are described in this section.
Introduction
Pump structure & Operating principle

The EWN series is a diaphragm metering pump which consists of a pump
head, drive unit and control unit. A diaphragm is directly driven by electromag-
netic force.
Principle of operation
The pulse signal controls the electromagnetic force and spring force in order
to make reciprocating motion. The reciprocating motion is transferred to a
diaphragm through a plunger and then volumetric change occurs in the pump
head. This action transfers liquid along with pump head valve action.
Control unit Drive unit Pump head
OUT
Spring
Pump head valve
(Discharge side)
Plunger
Diaphragm
Pump head valve

(Suction side)
IN
12 Introduction
● Auto degassing system
Discharge port Air vent port
AIR
OUT Automatic air

vent valve body
LOCK
Outline
Pump head valve Air vent valve
Pump head
Suction port
• Once air is entrained through the suction port, the working pressure difference
between the pump head valve and the air vent valve separates entrained air
from liquid.
• Entrained air is expelled to open air through the automatic air vent valve body.
• Only liquid is delivered to a discharge line through the discharge port. Note a
small amount of liquid is expelled with entrained air.
Introduction 13
Features
● Multivoltage operation
The EWN-R series is a multivoltage type (100-240VAC) and can be selected
without concern for local power voltage.
● High turndown ratio

Digitally-controlled stroke rate range is 0.1-100%. The stroke length shifts for
a fine flow adjustment.
● Waterproof and dustproof structure (IP65)

With the aim of improving resistance to exposure to liquid, the control unit is
installed on the back of the pump and the control panel is protected with a
cover as standard equipment. A rubber gasket is provided between the pump
head and the bracket to prevent water from entering from the periphery of
the pump head.
*This pump is not completely water resistant. Protect the pump with a cover when
installing it out of doors.
Operational functions
● Manual operation (see page 48)
The start/stop of the pump by key operation
Key operation
(Push key)
Run Run
Pump operation
Stop Stop
*Manual operation can be done at any time during operation or stop.
● EXT operation (see page 49)

The pump operation by the external signal.
The external operation is available after multiplier or divisor programming.
14 Introduction
Multiplier programming (See page 51)
1-9999 shots can be programmed to one pulse signal.
*In the EXT operation, the pump runs at the manual operation stroke rate.
*The pump makes one shot per pulse when the multiplier is programmed to 1.
Example) When the multiplier is programmed to 5, the pump makes five

shots per signal.
Outline
Pulse signal input
Pump operation
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
A buffer works when the pump receives an external signal before the pro-
grammed shots per signal is completed.
Pulse signal input
Pump operation
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
*The buffer stores the external signals for up to 65535 shots.
Divisor programming (See page 53)

1-9999 pulse signals can be programmed to make one shot.
*The pump can not run over a programmed stroke rate (max. 100%) even if a divisor
is set to run the pump faster.
*The pump makes one shot per pulse when a divisor is programmed to 1.
Example) When a divisor is programmed to 5, the pump makes one shot per
5-signal.
Pulse signal input

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Pump operation
Introduction 15
ANA. R (analogue rigid) programming (See page 57)
The pump increases/decreases a flow rate in proportion to 0-20mA. Four (4-
20, 20-4, 0-20, 20-0) programs are provided.
In "4-20" or "20-4" program a disconnection sensor works to stop the pump
as a current value falls below 4mA ("DISCN" blinks on the screen). Check
wiring as necessary. Pushing the start/stop key, this state is released.
100% Condition
The left graph is in the following
b programs.
d a. 4-20 (Default setting)
b. 20-4
c. 0-20
c
a d. 20-0
0 4 20mA
ANA. V (analogue variable) programming (See page 55)

The pump increases/decreases a flow rate in proportion to 0-20mA.
Setting two points can draw a straight line. Depending on the position of the
two points, 0 % may not come at 0mA in some cases. When a stroke rate
could become over 100% at some mA due to the setting, pump speed is lim-
ited to 100%.
100% Condition
85 The left graph is in the following
P2
setting.
P1 = 6 mA, 30%
P2 = 17 mA, 85%
30
P1
0 6 17 20mA
16 Introduction
● STOP function (See page 60)
The start/stop of the pump can be controlled by the external signal.
When "NOR. OP" is selected...

The pump stops while receiving the external signal via the STOP terminal.
*The pump resumes operation when the STOP signal is released.
STOP signal input
Outline
Run Run
Pump operation
Stop
The pump stops running while

the STOP signal is inputted.
When "NOR. CL" is selected...

The pump runs while receiving the external signal via the STOP terminal.
*The pump stops operation when the stop signal is released.
STOP signal input
Run
Pump operation
Stop Stop
● Pre-STOP function (See page 60)
When "NOR. OP" is selected...

The STOP LED lights orange while the pump is receiving the external signal
via the Pre-STOP terminal (a contact is closed). Note the pump does not
stop running.
When "NOR. CL" is selected...

The STOP LED stops lightening while the pump is receiving the external
signal via the Pre-STOP terminal (a contact is closed).
Introduction 17
● AUX function (See page 40)
The pump runs at the maximum stroke rate while receiving the external sig-
nal via the AUX terminal. Use this function for degassing.
Pulse signal input
Pump operation
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
● Priming function (See page 40)

The pump runs at the maximum stroke rate while both the UP and DOWN
keys are pressed. Use this function for degassing.
Press Press
▲+▼ keys
Pump operation
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
● OUTPUT function (See page 64)

Signals can be sent via the output terminal in sync with manual operation.
The terminal can be set to on or off.
18 Introduction
Part names
Pump
Adjusting screw
Used for opening the air vent port.
Outline
Control unit
Used for the start/stop of the
Air vent port
pump and stroke rate adjust-
Always connect a tube.
ment/programming.
Be sure to return the tube
end to a supply tank or a
container.
The air vent port can
rotate 90 degrees.
Outlet
Stroke length
adjusting knob
Air vent body
Used for adjusting
a flow rate.
Nameplate
Describes the
Inlet
pump specifica-
tions.
Pump head Base

Always fix with bolts.
Part names 19
Operational panel
Display
An operational status, a selected mode and
a programmed value are shown here.
START/STOP key
Used for starting/stopping
the pump operation. UP key
Used for increasing numeric val-
ues or selecting a programming
EXT key mode.
Used for entering the
EXT mode.
MAN DIV MULT ANA. RV P !

spm
L/h
mA
OVER P1 2 LOCK Err Disp SET
EXT
DOWN key
Used for decreasing numeric
values or selecting a program-
ming mode. DISP
ON
STOP
LED
Lights as the pump is turned
on and blinks at each shot.
DISP key
Used for checking flow infor-
mation or changing units.
20 Part names
■ Basic displays & Pump states
STOP LED ON LED lights ON LED lights ON LED blinks
lights red orange green green
Manual wait The pump
MAN
state. Display is running in
% ― shows stroke
rate in %.
― manual mode.
Display shows
stroke rate in %.
EXT(Multiply) EXT(Multiply)
mode. The mode. The
Outline
MULT
pump is waiting pump is making
― ―
for the external the displayed
signal. # of shots per
signal.
EXT(Divide) EXT(Divide)
DIV
mode. The mode. The
% ― ― pump is waiting
for the external
pump is running
at the displayed
signal. stroke rate.
EXT(ANA. EXT(ANA.
ANA. R
R) mode. The R) mode. The
% ― ― pump is wait-
ing.
pump is running
at the displayed
stroke rate.
EXT(ANA. EXT(ANA.
ANA. V V) mode. The V) mode. The
― ― pump is wait- pump is running
% ing. at the displayed
stroke rate.
AUX mode.
The pump
― ― ― is running at
the maximum
stroke rate.
Part names 21
STOP LED ON LED lights ON LED lights ON LED blinks
lights red orange green green
EXT(Multiply)
programming
MULT
mode. The
pump is set
― ― ―
SET
to make the
displayed #
of shots per
signal.
EXT(Divide)
programming
DIV mode. The
pump is set
― ― ―
to make one
SET shot for the
displayed # of
signals.
Operation stop
by the STOP
― ― ―
signal. ON LED
lights green.
STOP signal
input in the
manual wait ― ― ―
state. ON LED
lights orange.
MAN
Keypads are locked. Keypad operation is ineffective in this state.
% Release keypad lock before operation.
LOCK
PRIME mode.
The pump
― ― ― is running at
the maximum
stroke rate.
22 Part names
Identification codes
The model codes of the pump/drive units and the control unit represent the fol-
lowing information.
Pump/Drive units
EWN - B 11 VC ER -
Outline
a b c d e f g h i
a. Series name
EWN: Multivoltage electromagnetic metering pump
b. Drive unit (Average power consumption)
B: 20W
C: 24W
c. Diaphragm effective diameter
09: 8mm 11: 10mm 16: 15mm
21: 20mm 31: 30mm 36: 35mm
d. Wet end materials
Code Pump head Valve O ring Valve seat Gasket Diaphragm
VC CE FKM FKM
PVC
VH HC276 EPDM EPDM
PC CE FKM FKM
GFRPP PTFE
PH HC276 EPDM EPDM PTFE
+ EPDM
FC PCTFE ―
PVDF CE
TC FKM FKM
SH SUS316 HC276 SUS316 ―
Automatic air vent (Auto degassing type)

Code Air guide
vent valve Air vent valve Valve Separate pin Valve seat O ring
A guide B
VC CE Titanium FKM FKM
PVC PVC
VH HC276 HC276 EPDM EPDM
Material code
PVC : Transparent polyvinyl chloride GFRPP : Glassfiber-reinforced polypropylene
PVDF : Polyvinylidene difluoride EPDM : Ethylene-propylene rubber
FKM : Fluorine-contained rubber PTFE : Polytetrafluoroethylene
HC276 : HASTELLOY C276 SUS316 : Austenite stainless steel
CE : Alumina ceramics PCTFE : Polymonochlorotrifluoroethyle
Identification codes 23
e. Tube connection bore
No. Hose size (ID×OD) Wet end materials Pump model
VC/VH/PC/PH/TC/VC-C/VH-C/
ø4×ø6*² EWN-09/-11/-16 & -21
VC-A/VH-A
ø6×ø8*² EWN-09/-11/-16 & -21
VC-A/VH-A
ø9×ø12 VC/VH/PC/PH EWN-31 & -36
ø10×ø12 TC EWN-31 & -36
No ø6×ø12 VC-C/VH-C EWN-09/-11/-16 & -21
code*¹
Rc 1/4 FC/SH/SH-H/SH-H2 EWN-11/-16/-21/-31 & -36
IN: ø15×ø22 PC/P6-V EWN-31
OUT: ø9×ø12
IN/AIR: ø4×ø6*² PC/PH-H/PH-H2 EWN-11 & -16
OUT: R1/4
IN/AIR: ø6×ø8*² PC/PH-H/PH-H2 EWN-11 & -16
OUT: R1/4
VC/VH/PC/PH/VC-C/VH-C/
1 ø4×ø9 EWN-09/-11/-16 & -21
VC-A/VH-A
VC/VH/PC/PH/VC-C/VH-C/
2 ø4×ø6 EWN-09/-11/-16 & -21
VC-A/VH-A
3 ø6×ø8 EWN-09/-11/-16 & -21
VC-A/VH-A
4 ø8×ø13 VC/VH/PC/PH EWN-31 & -36
6 ø10×ø12 VC/VH/PC/PH EWN-31 & -36
7 ø1/4"×ø3/8" EWN-09/-11/-16 & -21
VC-A/VH-A
8 ø3/8"×ø1/2" VC/VH/PC/PH/TC EWN-31 & -36
9 Rc1/4 VC/VH/PC/PH/TC/VC-C/VH-C EWN-09/-11/-16/-21/-31 & -36
23 ø6×ø12 VC EWN-11/-16/-21/-31 & -36
24 ø5×ø8 VC/TC/VC-C EWN-09/-11/-16 & -21
IN: ø4×ø9
1/27 PC/PH-H EWN-11 & -16
OUT: R1/4
IN: ø4×ø6
2/27 PC/PH-H EWN-11 & -16
OUT: R1/4
IN: ø6×ø8
3/27 PC/PH-H EWN-11 & -16
OUT: R1/4
IN: ø1/4"×ø3/8"
7/27 PC/PH-H EWN-11 & -16
OUT: R1/4
*¹ ø4×ø6 and ø6×ø12 are equipped to the EWN-09/-11/-16/-21 (VC-C types).
*² European standard hose size is ø4×ø6. Australian standard hose size is ø6×ø8
(VC/VH/PC/PH/TC/VC-C/VH-C/VC-A/VH-A).
f. Power cable
E: European type A: Australian type
g. Control unit function
R: Standard
h. Special version
C: High compression type H: High pressure type
V: High viscosity type A: Auto degassing type
i. Special configuration
H: High pressure type (2MPa)
24 Identification codes
Installation
This section describes the installation of the pump, tubing and
wiring. Read through this section before work.
Observe the following points when installing the pump.
• Be sure to turn off power to stop the pump and related devices before work.
• Upon sensing abnormality or danger, stop work immediately. Remove
problems before resuming work.
• Do not place dangerous or flammable goods near the pump for your safety.
• Risk of an electrical leak or shock. Do not use a damaged pump.
Installation
Pump mounting
Select an installation location and mount the pump.
Necessary tools
• Four M5 bolts (pump mounting)
• Adjustable wrench or spanner
1 Select a suitable place.

Always select a flat floor free of vibration. See page 10 for detail.
Flooded suction is recommended when handling a gaseous liquid such
as sodium hypochlorite.
2 Anchor the pump by the M5 bolts.

Be sure to fix the pump at four points.
NOTE
Install the pump horizontally. If the pump is installed at a
tilt, a flow may reduce.
Pump mounting 25
Pipework
Connect tubes to the pump and install a check valve.
Before operation Tube end (Side view)
• Cut the tube ends flat.
Necessary tools
Tube connection
a. Pass a tube into the fitting nut and Tube

hose stopper and then slide it down to Fitting nut
the hose adapter as far as it will go.
b. Fit the tube end (hose adapter) to the Hose
stopper
fitting. Then hand tighten the fitting nut.
Slide it
c. Retighten the fitting nut by turning it down
180 degrees with an adjustable wrench Hose
or spanner. adapter
*The plastic fitting nut may be broken if it is
tightened too much. Fitting
1 Connect tubes into the inlet and Tube

Outlet
outlet.
Inlet
Tube
26 Pipework
2 Connect an air bleed tube into the
Air vent port
air vent port.
Route back the other tube end to a
supply tank or a container.
For the auto degassing type, con- Tube
nect another air bleed tube into the
automatic air vent valve body as
well.
3 Determine an air vent port direction.

The air vent port can rotate 90 de-
Air vent port
Installation
grees.
a. Turn the lock nut anticlockwise.
b. Adjust the direction of the air vent Air vent body A
Lock nut
port.
c. Hand-tighten the lock nut, holding
the air vent body A.
d. Turn the lock nut 90 degrees
clockwise further with an adjustable
wrench or spanner.
NOTE
The air vent port is not provided to the EWN- Check valve
FC type. Purchase and install an air vent valve.
Three way joint
Air vent
valve Discharge line
Pump
Pipework 27
Check valve mounting
Install an optional check valve to the EWN (or a back pressure valve to the FC
type) for the prevention of a back flow, siphon and overfeeding.
In the following cases be sure to install the check valve.
• A suction side liquid level is higher than a discharge side (See the diagram
below). Or an injection point is below a suction side liquid level at atmospher-
ic pressure.
Suction side
Discharge side
• The elevation difference between two liquid levels is five meters or below,
even if a discharge side liquid level is higher than a suction side.
5m or below
Discharge side
Suction side
• A suction side pressure is higher than a discharge side pressure.
• A discharge pressure (including pipe resistance and discharge head) is below

0.13MPa. (0.049MPa for B31 and C36).
28 Pipework
1 Mount a check valve at the discharge tube end.
*The CAN/CBN check valve and the BVC back pressure valve have R1/2 and
R3/8 thread connections as well as a tube connection. Cut off and adjust the
connection length to fit the check valves into tubing.
CAN check valve BVC back pressure valve
R1/2 Outer dia Ф9 R1/2 Outer dia Ф12
R3/8 R3/8
*The CBN check valve of which the both ends are tube connections is also
available. Contact us or your nearest distributor.
CBN check valve
Installation
NOTE
Periodically clean or replace a check valve with new one for the prevention of crystal
clogging.
Tubing layout
Flooded suction application Suction lift application
Accumulator/Chamber Accumulator/Chamber
Air vent line Check valve Check valve
Pump
Pump Air vent line
*Flooded suction is recommended when handling a gaseous liquid such as sodium

hypochlorite. For the auto degassing type, keep a suction lift at 1m or below. Other-
wise, the air vent valve may not function. Before resuming operation, always perform
degassing by using the adjusting screw.
Pipework 29
Wiring
Wiring for a power voltage and an external signal.
Observe the following points during wiring work.

• Electrical work should be performed by a qualified operator. Always ob-
serve applicable codes or regulations.
• Observe the rated voltage range, or the electrical circuit in the control
unit may fail.
• Do not perform wiring work while electric power is on. Otherwise, an
electrical shock or a short circuit may result. Be sure to turn off the power
before wiring work.
• Be careful for electric power not to be turned on during work.
• Replacement of a power cable should be conducted by a manufacturer,
his agency or a skilled person. Otherwise, an accident may result.
Necessary tools
• Adjustable wrench or spanner • Phillips screw driver
• Precision screw driver
Power voltage/Earthing
Check that the main power is turned off.
1 Insert the plug all the way seated in a jack.

This product have two power wires and one earth
wire, and is classified as class Ι.
*Make sure the earth plug is seated in securely as well.
30 Wiring
NOTE
• Do not share a power source with a high power device which may generate surge
voltage. Otherwise an electronic circuit may fail. The noise caused by an inverter also
affects the circuit.
• Energize the pump with a power voltage via a mechanical relay or switch. Do not
fluctuate the voltage, or CPU may malfunction. See page 32 for the precautions for
ON-OFF control by a mechanical relay.
Apply power at a sitting Do not apply gradually
ON ON
POWER POWER
OFF OFF
TIME TIME
Installation
Surge voltage
The electronic circuit in the control unit may fail due to surge voltage. Do
not place the pump close to a high power device of 200V or more which
may generate large surge voltage. Otherwise, take any of the following
measures.
• Install a surge absorption element (ex. a varister with capacity of 2000A
or more) via power cable.
Surge absorption element
Recommended varisters
Panasonic ERZV14D431
KOA NVD14UCD430
See manufacturer's catalogues for detail.
• Install a noise cut transformer via power cable.
Noise cut transformer
Wiring 31
Precautions for ON-OFF control by a mechanical relay
The control unit is equipped with CPU. Always start/stop the pump by
the STOP signal for ON-OFF control. Try not to turn on and off the main
power. Otherwise, observe the following points.
• Do not turn ON/OFF power voltage more than six times per hour.
• When using a mechanical relay for ON-OFF operation, its contact capac-
ity should be 5A or more. Contact point may fail if it is less than 5A.
• If a mechanical relay with the contact capacity of 5A is used, the maxi-
mum allowable ON/OFF operation is about 150,000 times. The contact
capacity should be 10A or more when making ON-OFF operation over
150,000 times or sharing a power source with a large capacity equip-
ment. Otherwise a contact point may fail by surge voltage.
• Use a solid state relay (SSR) as necessary (such as the OMRON G3F).
See manufacturer's catalogues for detail.
Signal wire connection

Use DIN 4- or 5-pin female connector cables. We recommend the use of
Binder connector cables (German manufacturer). Contact us for detail.
Binder connector cables

5-pin : 713 series 99-0436-10-05 Input signals
4-pin : 715 series 99-0430-15-04 Level sensor signal
Connect these cables according to the following procedures. See manufac-

ture's instructions when using other connectors than Binder.
Points to be checked
• Check that the main power is turned off.
The pump is still charged right after turning off power. Wait for one
minute before wiring.
32 Wiring
NOTE
• Do not lay on these signal cables in parallel with a power cable or combine them in a
concentric cable (ex. 5 wires cable). Otherwise noise is generated through the cables
due to induction effect and it results in malfunction or failure.
• The following products are the recommended SSRs (Solid State Relays) for signal
input. Any other SSRs may cause malfunction. See manufacturer's information for
details on these SSRs.
–OMRON G3FD-102S or G3FD-102SN
–OMRON G3TA-IDZR02S or G3TA-IDZR02SM
• When using a mechanical relay for signal input, its minimum application load should
be 5mA or below.
*Use either a no-voltage contact or an open collector for the Input and Level sensor
signals.
Installation
*Set pulse duration in 10-100ms (100Hz or below).
1 Take apart the DIN connector as necessary to pass a cable through it.
A cable diameter should be ø4 - ø6. Otherwise, the DIN connector can
not seal the cable.
2 Strip the wire ends to connect and secure them to each position.
A cross sectional area of a wire should be 0.75mm2 or below.
3 Assemble the DIN connector.

Pull the cable lightly so as to check it is secured enough. If it is loose,
the connector can not seal the cable.
Wiring 33
■ Connections
• Level sensor
The EWN have two stage level sensor, the Pre-STOP and STOP alarms. Con-
nect the pre-alarm signal to the Pre-STOP and the alarm signal to the STOP.
The pre-alarm functions just to notify a low liquid level by flashing the LED
orange while the pump is running. Use the STOP and COM2 when just one
signal is used.
• When using an open collector...
Pay attention to polarity. Pre-STOP and STOP are plus(+), and COM2 is
minus(-).
(Maximum 2.3mA at 12V)
• When using a contact...
The contact should be designed for an electronic circuit. The minimum ap-
plication load should be 1mA or less.
2
1 : STOP
3 2 : Pre-STOP
ON
1 3 : Free
4 : COM2 PUMP
4 Close
Level sensor Open
(STOP)
• Stop function
The pump stops running as receiving the external signal. Use the STOP and
COM2.
NOTE
Frequent ON-OFF operation should be controlled via the Stop function. Otherwise, the
number of ON-OFF times (turning on/off power) should be restricted to six times per
hour.
34 Wiring
• Pulse signal
In the EXT (MULT or DIV) mode, the pump runs along with a multiplier or a
divisor as receiving the pulse signal.
• When using an open collector...
Pay attention to polarity. Pulse is plus(+), and COM1 is minus(-).
(Maximum 2.3mA at 12V)
• When using a contact...
The contact should be designed for an electronic circuit. The minimum ap-
plication load should be 1mA or less.
2 1 : Free
3 2 : Pulse
5 1 3 : Free
4 : Free
Installation
4
5 : COM1
• Analogue signal
In the EXT (ANA.R or ANA.V) mode, the pump runs in a proportional control
as receiving the analogue signal.
2 1 : Free
3
2 : Free
5 1 3 : ANA
4 : Free
4 5 : COM1
Wiring 35
• OUTPUT signal
The pump sends out the OUTPUT signal along with injections or the STOP
signal along with the external STOP signal input via a Photo MOS relay.
*The maximum applied voltage is 24VAC/DC.
2 1 : Free
2 : Free
3 1 3 : Free
5
OUT
4 : OUT
4
5 : COM
• AUX signal
The pump runs at the max stroke rate as receiving the AUX signal.
1 : AUX
2
2 : Free
3
3 : Free
5 1
4 : Free
4 5 : COM1
36 Wiring
Operation
This section describes pump operation and programming.
Run the pump after pipework and wiring is completed.
Before operation
Check a flow rate, tubing and wiring. And then perform degassing and flow rate
adjustment before starting operation.
Points to be checked
Before operation, check if...
• Liquid level in a supply tank is enough.
• Tubing is securely connected and is free from leakage and clogging.
• Discharge/suction valves are opened.
• A power voltage is in the allowable range.
• Electrical wiring is correct and is free from the risk of short circuit and electri-
cal leakage.
Retightening of pump head fixing bolts
Operation
Important
The pump head fixing bolts may loosen when plastic parts creep due to tem-
perature change in storage or in transit, and this can lead to leakage. Be sure
to retighten the bolts evenly to the specified tightening torque below in diagonal
order before starting operation.
Tightening torque
Model code Torque Bolts
EWN-B09/-B11/-B16/-B21 2.16 N•m M4 Hex. socket head bolt
EWN-B31 2.55 N•m M4 Hex. socket head bolt
EWN-C16/-C21 2.16 N•m M4 Hex. socket head bolt
EWN-C31 2.55 N•m M4 Hex. socket head bolt
*Tighten fixing bolts once every three months.
Before operation 37
■ Use of hexagon wrench instead of a torque wrench
Fasten the fixing bolts as tight as can be by the hand with the straight long part
of a hexagon wrench (a) and further turn the bolts clockwise 90 degrees with
the short part (b).
a b
Straight long
part 90°
Short part
Degassing
The gas needs to be expelled from the pump and tubing by degassing. Normal
performance can not be obtained with gas in the pump. Conduct degassing in
the following cases.
• When the pump starts to run for the first time
• When a flow rate is too low
• After liquid is replaced in a supply tank
• After a long period of stoppage
• After maintenance and inspection
NOTE
• Both gas and chemical come out together through an air bleed tube. Place the end of
the tube in a supply tank or a container.
• Some chemicals may cause skin trouble or damage component parts. When your
hand or component parts get wet with chemical liquid, wipe off immediately.
• For the auto degassing type, this process is not necessary as long as the air vent
valve works effectively. But if air lock prevents this function, follow this process to
expel gas.
38 Before operation
Points to be checked Air bleed tube
• An air bleed tube is connected to the air vent
port.
• For the auto degassing type, another air
bleed tube is connected to the automatic air
vent body.
1 Turn on power.
The ON LED lights and a display related to
MAN
the current mode appears on the screen. ON
%
*The pump waits in the manual mode when turn-
STOP
ing on power with a default setting or calls up a ON LED

previous mode at the last shutoff.
2 Rotate the adjusting screw two revolutions Adjusting screw

anticlockwise to open the air vent port.
Operation
*Do not rotate it three revolutions. Otherwise,
liquid may come out from the air vent port.
Before operation 39
3 Run the pump at the maximum stroke rate.
Select a convenient way from the following.
• Set a stroke rate to 100% and run the pump manually.
MAN MAN
% %
ON ON
STOP STOP
• Enter the external signal via the AUX terminals.

MAN MAN
%
ON ON
STOP AUX signal STOP
input
• Press and hold both the UP and DOWN keys.

MAN MAN
%
ON ON
STOP STOP
4 Keep the pump running for more than ten minutes for degassing.
5 Stop the pump by...

• pushing the start/stop key once or
• stopping the AUX signal or
• releasing the UP and DOWN keys
6 Rotate the adjusting screw clockwise to close the air vent port.
7 Check liquid is discharged.

*Degassing is required again if the pump does not discharge liquid.
8 Check connections for leakage.

Degassing has now been completed.
*The air vent port is not provided to the FC type. Install an air vent valve on a
discharge line for degassing. See page 27 for detail. Also, the FC type has
the threaded outlet & inlet, so that a tube can not be fit directory. Use general
joints for tubing.
40 Before operation
Flow rate adjustment
A flow rate can be adjusted by adjusting a stroke rate and stroke length.
The stroke rate is indicated in %. 100% stroke rate means the maximum flow rate.
Stroke rate adjustment is a main way to adjust a flow rate.
Stroke length is the moving distance of the plunger.

A flow rate per shot can be controlled by changing stroke length. The widest
moving distance is defined as 100% stroke length.
First adjust a flow rate by stroke rate adjustment. Use stroke length adjustment
for the range where stroke rate adjustment can not reach.
Determine a suitable stroke rate and a stroke length, taking account of operat-
ing conditions and liquid characteristics.
The following procedure is recommended.
1 Change a stroke rate with stroke length 100% to adjust a flow rate.
See "Stroke rate adjustment" on page 42 and "Stroke length adjust-
ment" on page 44 for detail.
2 Measure a flow rate.
Operation
3 If a flow rate is lower than a specified level, increase a stroke rate
and measure the flow again.
4 Change a stroke length for fine adjustment.
5 Measure the flow again to see the specified level is obtained.
Before operation 41
Flow rate, stroke rate and stroke length
B type C type
Fixed stroke rate Fixed stroke rate
100 Stroke rate is fixed at 100% 100 Stroke rate is fixed at 100%
% %

Discharge capacity
Discharge capacity
25 25
0 0
25 50 75 100 25 50 75 100
Stroke length adjustment % Stroke length adjustment %
Precautions of flow rate adjustment

• When back pressure is high
Set stroke length to 100% and adjust a flow by changing a stroke rate.
• When a flow rate per shot greatly influences the reaction in neutraliza-
tion or titration application
Shorten a stroke length to reduce a flow rate per shot. And then adjust a flow
by changing a stroke rate.
• When pumping gaseous liquid such as sodium hypochlorite (NaClO)
and hydrazine solution (N2H2O2)
Set a stroke length to 100% and adjust a flow by changing stroke rate.
Note air lock may occur when stroke length is set too short.
■ Stroke rate adjustment

A stroke rate can be set by keypad operation from 0.1 to 100%. The relation
between a flow rate* and a stroke rate is shown as below.
Fixed stroke length

100
%
*The flow rate described on the

Discharge capacity
75
nameplate is at 100%.
50
25
0 50 100
Stroke rate adjustment %
42 Before operation
1 Turn on power and call up manual mode.
Enter manual mode to indicate a stroke rate
on the screen.
• Push the start/stop key when "MULT",
"DIV", "ANA.R" or "ANA.V" is on the
MAN
%
ON
screen. STOP
• When "STOP" or "-STOP" appears on the

screen, see "STOP function cancellation"
on 62 page and release the STOP function.
2 Use the UP or DOWN key to adjust a stroke rate.

• The stroke rate increases/decreases as pushing the UP/DOWN keys.
• Press and hold either key for three seconds for quick change. Quick
change stops at 0.1% or 100%. 0.1% or 100% skips to 100% or 0.1%
when the key is released and pushed again.
MAN MAN
% %
Operation
3 Push the start/stop key.
The ON LED blinks at each shot during operation.
MAN MAN
% %
ON ON
STOP STOP
Before operation 43
■ Stroke length adjustment
A stroke length can be adjusted when the moving distance of the plunger is
changed by the stroke length adjusting knob.
The stroke length adjustment range is 50-100% for the B type, 40-100% for C
type. The relation between a flow rate* and a stroke length is shown as below.
Fixed stroke rate
100
%
Discharge capacity
75
50
25
0 25 50 75 100
Stroke length adjustment %
*The flow rate described on the nameplate is at 100%.

NOTE
Do not rotate the stroke length adjusting knob when the pump is not running.
1 Turn on power and push the start/stop key to run the pump.
The ON LED blinks during operation.
MAN MAN
% %
ON ON
STOP STOP
2 Rotate the stroke length adjusting knob

Stroke length adjusting knob
and adjust a flow rate while the pump is
running.
44 Before operation
Before a long period of stoppage (One month or more)
Clean wet ends and the inside of tubing.
• Run the pump with clean water for about 30 minutes to rinse chemicals off.
Before unplugging the pump
• Always stop the pump by key operation and wait for three seconds before
unplugging the pump. Otherwise, the last key operation may not be put in
memory. In this case the pump unintentionally starts to run as powered on,
discharging liquid.
When the pump does not transfer liquid at resuming operation.
• Clean the valve sets and remove foreign matters.
• If gas is in the pump head, expel gas and readjust a flow rate. See "Degas-
sing" on page 38 and "Flow rate adjustment" on page 41 for detail.
Operation programming
Operation at each mode is individually set and controlled by keypad operation.

Select a proper mode to make optimal operation.
Default setting and setting range
Parameters Default setting Setting range Step
1
Stroke rate* 100.0% 0.1-100.0% 0.1*2
Operation
Multiply/Divide/Analogue ANA-V, ANA-R, /NNNN,
DIV -
selection XNNNN
Divisor 1 1-9999 1*3
Multiplier 1 1-9999 1*3
Analogue variable - 0-20mA, 0-100% 0.1*2
Analogue rigid 4-20 4-20, 20-4, 0-20, 20-0 -
STOP function*4 NOR.OP NOR.OP, NOR.CL -
Pre-STOP function NOR.OP NOR.OP, NOR.CL -
Analogue mode selection ANA-R ANA-R, ANA-V -
Output function STOP STOP, SPM -
CODE programming 00000 00000-99999 1
Unit selection % %, GPH, L/h, ml/min -
*1 The upper limit stroke rate in EXT mode
*2 The flow rate increases/decreases as pushing the UP/DOWN keys. Press and hold
either key for quick change.
*3 A figure increases/decreases as pushing the UP/DOWN keys. Press and hold either
key for quick change.
*4 Note that the pump starts to run as returning to the wait state in the manual mode as
long as the pump is receiving the STOP signal with "NOR.CL".
Operation programming 45
Programming flow
Power ON
Calibration mode 3 sec. Manual mode

Stroke rate setting
MAN MAN
!
mL % %
SET
MAN !
mL +
SET
Manual operation
EXT mode
MAN
DIV
%
%
Save Cancel MULT
! !
mL mL
+
SET SET
ANA. V
Prime mode %
MAN
+ 1 sec.
Flow rate display
ANA.R
%
MAN
%
ANA-V ANA-R
programming routine programming routine Keypad lock
MAN ANA. V ANA.R MAN
Disp
GPH
mA mA %
P1 SET SET
L/h
% mA
3 sec.
Disp P1 DISP SET SET LOCK
Any key
other than .
Disp
mL/m
mA mA
%
P 2 SET SET LOCK
+ 3 sec.
3 sec. ANA. V ANA.R MAN
spm
% mA
P 2 DISP SET SET LOCK
46 Operation programming
3 sec.
User mode
EXT mode
programming
1
EXT mode selection
DIV
SET SET
2
MULT
SET SET
See ANA-V 2
programming
SET routine
or
See ANA-R
Operation
programming 2
SET routine
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 2 LOCK SET
Manual operation
1 Turn on power.
The LED lights and a display related to the cur-
MAN
rent mode appears on the screen.
%
ON
*The pump waits in the manual mode when turning STOP
on power with a default setting or calls up a previ-

ous mode at the last shutoff.
2 Enter manual mode.

Move to the next step when a stroke rate (0.1-100%) is shown on the
screen.
When "MULT", "DIV", "ANA-R" or "ANA-V" is on the screen...

Push the start/stop key once to enter the wait state in the manual mode.
DIV MAN
% %
ON ON
STOP STOP
When "STOP" or "-STOP" is on the screen...

See "STOP function cancellation" on page 62 and release the function.
3 Use the UP or DOWN key to adjust a stroke rate.

• A stroke rate increases/decreases as pushing the UP/DOWN keys.
change stops at 0.1 or 100%. 0.1 or 100% skips to 100 or 0.1% when
the key is released and pushed again.
MAN MAN
% %
4 Push the start/stop key.
The pump starts to run.
• The LED blinks at each shot.
MAN MAN
% %
ON ON
STOP STOP
EXT operation
The pump operation is controlled by the external (pulse) signal.
■ EXT mode
Set the upper limit spm and enter EXT mode. Note that the pump starts to run
in sync with the external signal as entering EXT mode.
NOTE
• Manual operation stroke rate is applied as the EXT upper limit spm. For example,
even if a multiplier or a divisor is set to run the pump at 100% (360spm), the pump
Operation
does not run over 50% (180spm) as long as manual stroke rate is 50%.
• A stroke rate skips from 100 to 0.1% by pushing the UP key once. Pay attention to this
point when programming a stroke rate for the prevention of erroneous programming.
1 Enter manual mode.

Enter the manual mode to indicate a stroke
rate on the screen.
• Push the start/stop key when "MULT",
MAN
"DIV", "ANA-R" or "ANA-V" is on the ON
%
screen. STOP
• When "STOP" or "-STOP" appears on the

screen, see "STOP function cancellation"
on 62 page and release the STOP function.
2 Use the UP or DOWN key to program the upper limit.
Push the start/stop key and stop the pump when it is running. Then
program stroke rate.
change stops at 0.1 or 100%. 0.1 or 100% skips to 100 or 0.1% when
the key is released and pushed again.
MAN MAN
% %
3 Push the EXT key to enter EXT mode.

Note that the pump starts to run in sync with the external signal as en-
tering EXT mode.
MAN MULT
%
ON ON
STOP STOP
■ EXT mode programming

The following features can be programmed for the EXT operation.
• Multiplier programming
The number of shots per signal is programmed. A default setting is one shot
per signal.
• Divisor programming
The number of signals per shot is programmed. A default setting is one shot
per signal.
• Analogue programming
Current values are programmed for a proportional control.
NOTE
Pushing the start/stop key, a program is entered. Do not forget to enter your program-
ming. Note if the pump is unplugged before pushing the start/stop key, your program-
ming is not stored.
Multiplier programming
Program the number of shots per signal to control the pump. The number of
shots can be programmed from 1 to 9999.
NOTE
Do not enter the external signal during programming.
1 Enter EXT mode.

Push the EXT key to move from manual mode to EXT mode.
*Push the start/stop key and stop the pump when it is running. Then call up
EXT mode.
MAN DIV
% %
ON ON
STOP STOP
2 Press and hold the EXT key for one second and enter the EXT mode
selection.
DIV
%
ON ON
Operation
STOP STOP SET
3 Select "MULT" (Multiply).

Scroll through the EXT mode selection by the UP and DOWN keys.
SET SET
4 Push the EXT key and call up the multiplier programming screen.
MULT
ON ON
STOP SET STOP Disp SET
5 Use the UP or DOWN key to program a multiplier.

• A multiplier increases/decreases as pushing the UP/DOWN keys.
change stops at 1 or 9999. 1 or 9999 skips to 9999 or 1 when the key
is released and pushed again.
MULT MULT
Disp SET Disp SET
6 Push the EXT key to return to the EXT mode selection.
MULT
ON ON
STOP Disp SET STOP SET
7 Push the start/stop key to return to EXT mode.

The pump starts to run according to the multiplier programming.
MULT
ON ON
STOP SET STOP
Divisor programming
Program the number of signals per shot to control the pump. The number of
signals can be programmed from 1 to 9999.
NOTE
• If a divisor is programmed to 1 so as to make one shot per pulse and the input interval
of the external signal is close to a manual operation stroke rate (but not exactly in
synchronization), irregular operation may occur. This irregular operation occurs as
the external signal is cancelled. Note that this is not malfunction. In order to avoid this
phenomenon, perform 1:1 operation by programming a multiplier to 1.
• Do not enter the external signal during the programming.
1 Enter EXT mode.

EXT mode.
MAN MULT
%
ON ON
STOP STOP
Operation
selection.
MULT
ON ON
STOP STOP SET
3 Select "DIV" (Divide).

SET SET
4 Push the EXT key and call up the multiplier programming screen.
DIV
ON ON
STOP SET STOP SET
5 Use the UP or DOWN key to program a divisor.

• A divisor increases/decreases as pushing the UP/DOWN keys.
• Press and hold either key for more than three seconds for quick
change. Quick change stops at 1 or 9999. 1 or 9999 skips to 9999 or 1
DIV DIV
SET SET
DIV
ON ON
STOP SET STOP SET

The pump starts to run according to the multiplier programming.
DIV
%
ON ON
STOP SET STOP
Flow rate display changes every time the Disp key is pressed.
ANA-V programming
Select "ANA-V" or "ANA-R" in USER mode. See page 66.
1 Enter EXT mode.

EXT mode.
MAN MULT
%
ON ON
STOP STOP
selection.
MULT
ON ON
STOP STOP SET
3 Select "ANA-V" (Analogue variable).
Operation
SET SET
4 Push the EXT key and enter a current value at P1.

• A current value increases/decreases as pushing the UP/DOWN keys.
change stops at 0.0 or 20.0mA. 0.0 or 20.0mA skips to 20.0 or 0.0mA
ANA. V
ON ON
mA
STOP SET STOP P1 SET
5 Push the Disp key and enter a stroke rate at P1.
change stops at 0 or 100%. 0 or 100% skips to 100 or 0% when the
key is released and pushed again.
ANA. V ANA. V
%
ON ON
mA
STOP P1 SET STOP P1 Disp SET
6 Push the Disp key and enter a current value at P2.

• A current value increases/decreases as pushing the UP/DOWN keys.
change stops at 0.0 or 20.0mA. 0.0 or 20.0mA skips to 20.0 or 0.0mA
ANA. V ANA. V
%
ON ON
mA
STOP P1 Disp SET STOP P 2 SET
7 Push the Disp key and enter a stroke rate at P2.

change stops at 0 or 100%. 0 or 100% skips to 100 or 0% when the
key is released and pushed again.
ANA. V ANA. V
%
ON ON
mA
STOP P 2 SET STOP P 2 Disp SET

ANA. V
%
ON ON
STOP P 2 Disp SET STOP SET
The pump starts to run in proportional control according to the ANA-V
programming.
ANA. V
%
ON ON
STOP SET STOP
ANA-R programming
Select "ANA-V" or "ANA-R" in USER mode. See page 66.
1 Enter EXT mode.

EXT mode.
MAN MULT
%
ON ON
STOP STOP
Operation
selection.
MULT
ON ON
STOP STOP SET
3 Select "ANA-R" (Analogue rigid).

SET SET
4 Push the EXT key and select a preset program.
ANA.R
ON ON
mA
STOP SET STOP SET
Scroll through the ANA-R programming routine by the UP and DOWN

keys.
ANA.R
ON ON
mA
STOP SET STOP SET
6 Push the start/stop key to enter EXT mode.
ANA.R
%
ON ON
STOP SET STOP
The pump starts to run in proportional control according to the ANA-R

programming.
User mode
The following features can be programmed. Get access to User mode via the
wait state in the manual mode.
• STOP function
The pump stops running while receiving the external signal via the STOP
terminal.
• Pre-STOP function
The STOP LED lights orange while the pump receiving the external signal via
the Pre-STOP terminal. The pump does not stop running.
• OUTPUT function
The pump sends out signals via the OUTPUT terminal in sync with pump
shots or the STOP signal.
• ANA-V/-R selection
Select either "ANA-V" or "ANA-R" for the EXT mode.
• Buffer ON/OFF selection
Excessive external signals that are not reflected to the MULT or DIV operation
can be stored. Activate or inactivate the buffer.
• PIN number entry
A PIN is required to release a keypad lock state.
NOTE
Operation
The ANA-V/-R selection is available only when "ANA-V" or "ANA-R" has been selected
in the EXT mode selection. The Buffer ON/OFF selection is available only when "DIV"
or "MULT" has been selected.
EXT mode selection User mode
SET
or Buffer ON/OFF
1
selection
SET
SET
or
1
ANA-V/-R selection
SET
■ STOP/Pre-STOP function
The start/stop of the pump operation can be controlled by the external stop
signal.
• When "NOR. OP" is selected...
The pump stops while receiving the stop signal.
• When "NOR. CL" is selected...
The pump runs while receiving the stop signal.
STOP/Pre-STOP function programming
1 Return to the wait state in the manual mode.

Push the start/stop key to return to the manual wait state if the pump is
running in manual mode or in EXT mode.
MAN
%
ON
STOP
2 Push the EXT key for three seconds to call up the user mode.
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP STOP 1
3 Select "STOP" or "P-STP".
1 1
Scroll through the User mode selection by the UP and DOWN keys.
4 Push the EXT key.
ON ON
STOP 1 STOP 2
5 Select "NOR. OP" or "NOR. CL".
2 2
Operation
6 Push the start/stop key to return to manual mode.
MAN
ON ON
STOP 2 STOP
The screen indicates that the STOP function is active.
■ STOP/Pre-STOP function cancellation
A stop state can be cancelled if the current selection is changed.
Example) NOR.OP→NOR.CL
NOR.CL→NOR.OP
1 Call up "-STOP" screen.

If the screen shows "STOP" in the manual or EXT mode, push the start/
stop key.
MAN
ON
STOP
2 Press and hold the EXT key for three seconds to enter User mode.
MAN
ON ON
STOP STOP 1
3 Select "STOP" or "P-STP".
1 1
4 Push the EXT key and change the current selection.
If "NOR.OP" is selected change it to "NOR.CL", and vice versa.
ON
STOP 1 2 2
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP 2 STOP
The STOP or Pre-STOP function now has been cancelled.
Operation
■ OUTPUT function
• When "OUT"→"SPM" is selected...
The pump sends the OUTPUT signal at each shot while running.
• When "OUT"→"STOP" is selected...
a. The pump sends the OUTPUT signal while receiving the STOP signal (with
the setting of operation stop at STOP signal input).
b. The pump sends the OUTPUT signal while receiving no STOP signal (with
the setting of operation resumption at STOP signal input).

MAN
%
ON
STOP
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP STOP 1
3 Select "OUT".
1 1
4 Push the EXT key.
ON ON
STOP 1 STOP 2
5 Select "STOP" or "SPM".
2 2
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP 2 STOP
The programming has now been reflected to the pump operation.
Operation
■ ANA-V/-R selection
• When "ANA-R" is selected...
The preset proportional control programs of "4-20", "20-4", "0-20" and "20-0"
are available.
• When "ANA-V" is selected...
A proportional control pattern can be newly programmed.
NOTE
A default setting is "ANA-R".

MAN
%
ON
STOP
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP STOP 1
3 Select "ANA".
1 1
4 Push the EXT key.
ON ON
STOP 1 STOP 2
5 Select "ANA-R" or "ANA-V".
2 2
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP 2 STOP
Operation
■ Buffer ON/OFF selection
• When "bM-ON" is selected...
Excessive external signals that are not reflected to the MULT or DIV opera-
tion can be stored.
• When "bM-OF" is selected...
Excessive external signals are not stored.
NOTE
A default setting is "bM-OF".

MAN
%
ON
STOP
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP STOP 1
3 Select "bF.MEM".
1 1
4 Push the EXT key.
ON ON
STOP 1 STOP 2
5 Select "bM-ON" or "bM-OF".
2 2
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP 2 STOP

*The pump can run up to 65535 shots by the stored excessive signals.
Operation
■ PIN number entry
A PIN is required to release a keypad lock state.
NOTE
A default setting is "bM-OF".

MAN
%
ON
STOP
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP STOP 1
3 Select "CODE".
1 1
4 Push the EXT key.
ON ON
STOP 1 STOP 2 LOCK SET
5 Use the UP and DOWN keys to create PIN number.
2 LOCK SET 2 LOCK SET
Shift to the next digit by pushing the DISP key.

*A default PIN number is "00000".
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP 2 LOCK SET STOP
Operation
The programming has now been entered.
*Pushing the EXT key, the programming is cancelled.
Keypad lock
Keypad lock can be active in the following states for the prevention of errone-
ous key operation.
Manual mode
Wait state During operation
MAN MAN
%
ON
%
ON
STOP STOP
EXT mode
DIV MULT
%
ON ON
STOP STOP
ANA-R ANA- V
% %
ON ON
STOP STOP
NOTE
• Any key operation is not acceptable when the keypad lock is active. In an emergency,
unplug the pump or enter the external signal via the STOP terminal to stop operation.
If the pump is unplugged, a keypad lock state is recalled when the pump is turned on.
• Pressing the start/stop key for three seconds, keypad lock becomes active even when
the pump is receiving the STOP signal. Note that "STOP" or "-STOP" indication does
not change but key operation is not accepted. Keypad lock indication appears when
the STOP signal is released with "M-ON" or inputted with "M-OF".
■ Keypad lock activation
1 Press and hold the start/stop key for more than three seconds.
MAN MAN
% %
ON ON
STOP STOP LOCK
"LOCK" indication appears on the screen.
■ Keypad lock release
1 Push the EXT key once.

Enter the PIN number.
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP LOCK STOP LOCK SET

*A default PIN number is "00000".
2 Push the EXT key once again.
Operation
The keypad lock state is released.
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP LOCK SET STOP
3 Pause/Resume operation
• To stop the pump in the keypad lock state, press and hold the start/
stop key for three seconds.
• To resume operation in the keypad lock state, push the start/stop key
once.
MAN MAN
%
LOCK LOCK
Calibration mode
Entering a flow rate per shot, operation can be monitored in GPH, L/h or
mL/m.
1 Run the pump in an actual operating condition and measure the

flow for one minute.

MAN
%
ON
STOP
3 Press and hold the DISP key for three seconds to call up the cali-
bration mode.
MAN
!
%
ON ON
mL
STOP STOP SET
4 Push the DISP key once to call up a flow entry screen.
! !
ON ON
mL mL
STOP SET STOP SET
5 Enter the measured flow.
*Pushing the EXT key, the programming is cancelled.
! !
mL mL
SET SET
6 Push the start stop key to return to the wait state.

The programming is stored as "SAVE" indication appears on the screen.
The maximum flow can be checked at each unit.
*Always try to change a flow rate by stroke rate. Changing the stroke length, the
flow rate per shot is changed.
MAN
%
ON ON
STOP 2 LOCK SET STOP
Operation
Unit change
GPH, L/h or mL/m cycles through every time the DISP key is pushed. To
display the maximum flow rate at each unit, follow the above calibration proce-
dure.
spm indication
The screen shows an actual spm in operation when both the EXT and DOWN
keys are pressed for 3 seconds. 0spm will be shown after the pump has
stopped.
Before shipping, every pump is regulated by spm adjustment so as to meet a
required flow rate at 100% stroke rate indication. Note that spm at the same
stroke rate (%) may differ at each pump accordingly.
Maintenance
This section describes troubleshooting, inspection, wear part
replacement, exploded views and specifications.
Important
• Follow instructions in this manual for replacement of wear parts. Do not
disassemble the pump beyond the extent of the instructions.
• Always wear protective clothing such as an eye protection, chemical re-
sistant gloves, a mask and a face shield during disassembly, assembly or
maintenance work. The specific solution will dictate the degree of protec-
tion. Refer to MSDS precautions from the solution supplier.
• Risk of electrical shock. Be sure to turn off power to stop the pump and
related devices before service is performed.
Before unplugging the pump

Always stop the pump by key operation. And wait for three seconds before
unplugging the pump. Otherwise, the last key operation to stop the pump
may not be put in memory. In this case the pump unintentionally starts to
run as powered on, discharging liquid.
NOTE
• We do not assure material suitability in specified application and are not responsible
for any failure due to corrosion or erosion.
• Contact us or your nearest distributor for repair or contact a manufacturer of the host
machine which our product is built in.
• Be sure to drain chemicals and clean the inside of the pump before return so that a
harmful chemical does not spill out in transit.
76 Maintenance
Troubleshooting
First check the following points. If the following measures do not help remove
problems, contact us or your nearest distributor.
States Possible causes Solutions
The pump Power voltage is too low. • Observe the allowable voltage
does not range of 90-264VAC.
run. (LED The pump is not powered. • Check the switch if it is installed.
does not • Correct wiring.
light. Blank • Replace a breaking wire to new
screen.) one.
Liquid can Air lock in the pump • Expel air. See page 38.
not be Stroke length is too short. • Run the pump at 100% stroke
pumped up. length and adjust it to proper
length.
Air ingress through suction line. • Correct tubing.
A valve set is installed upside • Reinstall the valve set.
down.
Valve gaskets are not installed. • Install valve gaskets.
Foreign matters are stuck in the • Dismantle, inspect and clean the
pump head valves. valves. Replace as necessary.
A ball valve is stuck on a valve • Dismantle, inspect and clean the
seat. valve. Replace as necessary.
The flow Air stays in the pump head. • Expel air. See page 38.
rate fluctu- Overfeeding occurs. • Mount a check valve. See page
ates. 28.
Foreign matters are stuck in the • Dismantle, inspect and clean the
Maintenance
pump head valves. valves. Replace as necessary.

Diaphragm is broken. • Replace diaphragm.
Pressure fluctuates at an injection • Maintain a pressure constant at
point. an injection point by optimizing
piping or by relocating the point.
Troubleshooting 77
States Possible causes Solutions
Liquid leaks. Loose fit of the fitting or the air vent • Retighten them.
body
Loose fit of the pump head • Retighten the pump head. See
page 37.
O rings or valve gaskets are not • Install O rings and valve gaskets.
installed.
Diaphragm is broken. • Replace the diaphragm.
Excessive discharge pressure • Check that a discharge line is not
closed.
• Check if tubing is not clogged.
Key opera- Keypads are locked. • Release the keypad lock.
tion is inef-
fective.
The pump The pump is in a wait state. • Enter the pump into an operation
does not run. mode.
The pump has not received the • Check wiring.
external signal in the EXT mode.
EXT mode programming has not • Complete EXT mode program-
finished. ming.
The pump The signal has not been sent to the • Check wiring.
does not pump.
receive the
external
signal.
The pump EXT mode programming has not • Push the start/stop key after pro-
does not been stored to the pump. gramming.
store EXT
mode pro-
gramming.
78 Troubleshooting
Inspection
Perform daily and periodic inspection to keep pump performance and safety.
Daily inspection
Check the following points. Upon sensing abnormality, stop operation immedi-
ately and remove problems according to "Troubleshooting".
When wear parts come to the life limit, replace them with new ones. Contact us
or your nearest distributor for detail.
No. States Points to be checked How to check
1 Pumping • If liquid is pumped. Flow meter or visual
inspection
• If the suction and discharge pressure Check specifica-
are normal. tions.
• If liquid has deteriorated, crystallized Visual or audio
or precipitated. inspection
2 Noise and vibration • If abnormal noise or vibration occurs. Visual or audio
They are signs of abnormal operation. inspection
3 Air ingress from • If leakage occurs. Visual or audio
pump head joints • If pumped liquid includes air bubbles, inspection
and a suction line check lines for leakage and retighten
as necessary.
Periodic inspection
Retighten the pump head mounting bolts evenly to the following torque in
diagonal order.
Maintenance
*Mounting bolts may loosen in operation. How fast the bolts start to loosen is depend-
ing on operating conditions.
Tightening torque
*A hexagon wrench can be used for a torque wrench. See page 38.
Inspection 79
Wear part replacement
To run the pump for a long period, wear parts need to be replaced periodically.
It is recommended that the following parts are always stocked for immediate
replacement. Contact us or your nearest distributor for detail.
Precautions
• Solution in the discharge line may be under pressure. Release the pres-
sure from the discharge line before disconnecting plumbing or disassem-
bly of the pump to avoid solution spray.
• Rinse wet ends thoroughly with tap water.
• Each time the pump head is dismantled, replace the diaphragm, O rings,
valve gaskets and valve sets with new ones.
Wear part list

# of Estimat-
Parts
parts ed life
VC•VH•PC•PH•TC SH FC PC/P6
28 14
14 11 11 14
11 13
13 11
28
13 12
12
Valve set 12 14 52 2 sets
28
11 11 11
13
13 13 13
12 12 12
28
Pump
17 12 14 14 8000
14 17 hours
Diaphragm 7 1
Automatic air
1
vent valve set
31 34 33 30 34 35 17
*The high pressure types have a rear diaphragm sheet on the back side of the diaphragm.
*Wear part duration varies with the pressure, temperature and characteristics of liquid.
*The estimated life is calculated based on the continuous operation with clean water at
ambient temperature.
80 Wear part replacement

Before replacement
First release pressure from the pump head.
1 Stop the pump operation.
2 Rotate the adjusting screw two revolutions anticlockwise to open

the air vent port.
NOTE
Do not rotate it three revolutions or more. Otherwise, liquid may come out from
the adjusting screw.
3 Check that liquid comes out from the air vent port and gas/liquid
pressure has been released.
NOTE
The pressure may not be expelled completely as long as liquid does not come
out. In this case run the pump until the pressure is released.
*The air vent port is not equipped to the FC. Install an air vent valve on a discharge line
and release the pressure by opening the valve. See page 27.
Valve set replacement

■ Discharge valve set dismantlement/assembly
Maintenance
Necessary tools
• 21mm box wrench
• A pair of tweezers
*Unfix the pump base before work.
Wear part replacement 81

1 Loosen the fitting nut to remove a dis-
Fitting nut
charge tube and an air bleed tube. Air bleed tube
Discharge tube
2 Turn the lock nut anticlockwise by

Air vent body A Lock nut
an adjustable wrench and remove
the air vent body A.
3 Remove the air vent body B by the 21mm box wrench.
Air vent body B
4 Pull out the valve set by a pair of tweezers.

5 Place a new valve set into the pump head and Air vent body B
screw the air vent body B through the lock nut. 5
*Be careful not to misarrange the valve set or place it Lock nut
upside down. Otherwise, leakage or flow rate reduc- 6
tion may result. 14

11
*Do not forget to fit O rings and gaskets. 13
12
*Keep the valve set free from dust or foreign matters. Valve set
11
13
12
17
*VC•VH•PC•PH
6 Remount the air vent body A and connect tubes.
■ Suction valve set dismantlement/assembly

NOTE
Be careful not to drop the valve set.
1 Remove the fitting nut to remove the suction tube.
Fitting nut
Suction tube
Maintenance
2 Remove the fitting by an adjustable wrench or a spanner.

Fitting

3 Pull out the valve set by a pair of tweezers.
4 Hand-tighten the fitting with the valve set in it 17

14
into the pump head as far as it will go. Retight- 11
13
en it by a further 1/4 turn with an adjustable Valve set 12
11
wrench or a spanner. 13
12
*Be careful not to misarrange the valve set or place it
upside down. Otherwise, leakage or flow rate reduc- 3
tion may result. Fitting

4
*Do not forget to fit O rings and gaskets.
*Keep the valve set free from dust or foreign matters. *VC•VH•PC•PH•TC
5 Reconnect the suction tube.
■ Spacer set replacement (Auto degassing type)

Dismantlement/assembly of the discharge and suction valve sets are the
same. See page 81-83 for detail.
1 Loosen the lock nut and remove the fitting adapter.
2 Loosen the air vent body B and take it out of

the pump head. Then pull out the spacer set.
3 Place a new spacer set into the pump head.

Screw the air vent body B into the pump head
through the lock nut.
*Do not forget to fit O rings and gaskets. Air vent
body B
*Keep the spacer set free from dust or foreign matters.
Spacer
Lock nut

■ Air vent valve set replacement (Auto degassing type)
1 Loosen the fitting nut and remove an air bleed tube.

*Be careful not to get wet with a residual chemical.
2 Loosen and remove the fitting.
3
4
Take the air vent valve set out of the fitting 29 Fitting nut
adapter. 30
31
3
58 Fitting
61
60
57
56 61
62
Air vent valve set
Fitting adapter 17
4 Place a new air vent valve set into the fitting

and then hand-tighten it into the fitting adapter 4
58
as far as it will go. Retighten the fitting by a 57 3
further 1/4 turn with a spanner. 61 60
*Note the air vent valve set has a mounting direction. 62 17
Always mount the depressed end first.
Diaphragm replacement Maintenance

Necessary tools
• Hexagon wrench
• Torque wrench
NOTE
Pay attention not to loose diaphragm spacers. Always apply a proper number of dia-
phragm spacers. 0 or a few diaphragm spacers are inserted between the retainer and
plunger for the adjustment of diaphragm location. Note that the number of diaphragm
spacers varies with pump model.

1 Run the pump and set the stroke length to 0%. Then stop the pump.
2 Loosen the fitting nuts and re-

Air bleed tube
Fitting nut
move a suction tube, a discharge
tube and an air bleed tube.
For the auto degassing type, dis-
connect another air bleed tube from
the automatic air vent valve body as Discharge tube
well.
Suction tube
3 Remove the pump head with a hexagon wrench.
Pump head
4 Rotate and remove the diaphragm from the plunger (pump shaft).
5 Slide a retainer and diaphragm Diaphragm spacer

spacer(s) onto the diaphragm
screw. Diaphragm
Plunger
Retainer

NOTE
• Fit the retainer to the diaphragm with its round edge
Mating parts Bracket
to the diaphragm.
• Check that the bracket spacer is in place. Refit the
bracket spacer into the bracket, combining mating
parts as necessary.
• The B/C-31 & -36 types do not have a bracket
spacer.
Bracket
spacer
6 Screw the diaphragm into the plunger as far as it will go.
7 Run the pump and set the stroke length to 100%. Then stop the
pump.
8 Mount the pump head.

Tighten the pump head fixing bolts evenly to the following torque in
diagonal order.
Tightening torque
Maintenance

*A hexagon wrench can be used for a torque wrench. See page 38.

Exploded view
Pump head, Drive unit & Control unit

The pump in the diagram below is completely dismantled. Do not dismantle the
pump beyond the extent shown in this instruction manual.
Air vent Automatic

air vent type
FC type
Diaphragm
spacer
Valve
set* Retainer
Control unit
Drive unit
Diaphragm Pump body
Case
gasket
Valve
set* Bracket
Fixing
screw
Bracket spacer Controller case
* Wet end materials and their sizes differ with models. See "Valve set replacement" on
page 81 for detail.
88 Exploded view
Pump head
■ EWN-[B09•B11•B16•B21•C16•C21][VC•VH•PC•PH•TC]
No. Part names # of parts

23
1 Pump head 1
4
26 3 Fitting 1
29 25
4 Fitting nut 3
30 31 5 Air vent body B 1
10
31 6 Lock nut 1
30
29 7 Diaphragm 1
27
9 Retainer 1
4 5
10 Air vent body A 1
11 Valve guide 4
6
12 Valve seat 4
14 13 Valve 4
11
14 Valve gasket 2
13
17 O ring 2
12
11 18 18 Diaphragm spacer *
13 9 Hex. socket head bolt
12 7 19 4
[PW•SW]
17
23 Adjusting screw 1
19 25 O ring 1
26 O ring 1
27 O ring 1
1
29 Hose stopper 3
17 30 Hose adaptor 3
14
31 O ring 3
11
13 *The number of diaphragm spacers
12 varies with pump model.
Maintenance
11 *For the high pressure types, a rear

13 diaphragm sheet is placed between
12 the parts 7 and 9.
3
31
30
29
Exploded view 89
■ EWN-[B31•C31•C36][VC•VH•PC•PH•TC]

23 1 Pump head 1
4
3 Fitting 1
26
29 25 4 Fitting nut 3
30 31 5 Air vent body B 1
10 6 Lock nut 1
31
30 7 Diaphragm 1
29
27 9 Retainer 1
4 5 10 Air vent body A 1
11 Valve guide 4
6 12 Valve seat 4
14 13 Valve 4
11 14 Valve gasket 2
13 17 O ring 2
12 18 Diaphragm spacer *
11 Hex. socket head bolt
18 19 4
13 [PW•SW]
12 9
7 23 Adjusting screw 1
17
25 O ring 1
19 26 O ring 1
27 O ring 1
29 Hose stopper 3
30 Hose adaptor 3
17 31 O ring 3
14
11 *The number of diaphragm spacers
varies with pump model.
13
12 *For the high pressure types, a rear
diaphragm sheet is placed between
11
the parts 7 and 9.
13
12
31
30
29
90 Exploded view
■ EWN FC

3 1 Pump head 1
3 Fitting 2
14 7 Diaphragm 1
11 9 Retainer 1
13 11 Valve guide 4
12 12 Valve seat 4
14
13 Valve 4
11
12 18 17 Gasket 2
17 7
Hex. socket head bolt
19 4
[PW•SW]
19
*The number of diaphragm spacers
1
17
14
11
13
12
14
11
13
12
14
3
Maintenance
Exploded view 91
■ EWN-C31PC/P6-V

1 Pump head 1
3 Fitting 1
4 Fitting nut 1
7 Diaphragm 1
9 Retainer 1
11 Valve guide 2
12 Valve seat 2
13 Valve 2
14 Valve gasket 4
17 O ring 2
Hex. socket head bolt
19 4
[PW•SW]
28 Hose stopper 1
29 Fitting spacer 1
30 O ring 1
51 Inlet 1
52 Valve spring 2
92 Exploded view
■ EWN SH/SH-H/SH-H2

1 Pump head 1
37
28 3 Fitting 1
38 11 7 Diaphragm 1
13
39 28 9 Retainer 1
55 41 12 11 Valve guide 4
40 28 12 Valve seat 4
51 11 13 Valve 4
13
28 14 Valve gasket B 2
61 52 12
19 Hex. socket head bolt 4

[PW•SW]
54
28 Valve gasket A 8
18 37 Adjusting screw 1
1 9
7 38 Seal nut 1
28 39 Seal ring 1
11 40 Seat 1
19 13
28 41 Seat ring 1
12 51 Air vent body A 1
60 28 52 Gasket 1
11 53 Air vent body B 1
13
28 54 Nut 1
12
55 Male connector 1
14
3 varies with pump model.
Maintenance
*For the high pressure types, a rear
diaphragm sheet is placed between
the parts 7 and 9.
Exploded view 93
■ EWN with an Automatic air vent

23
4 1 Pump head 1
26
29 25 2 Bracket 1
30
31 3 Fitting 2
10
30
31 4 Fitting nut 4
29
27 5 Air vent body B 1
4
5 4 6 Lock nut 1
29 7 Diaphragm 1
6
30
14
9 Retainer 1
31
11 10 Air vent body A 1
13 66
11 Valve guide 4
12 58
11 61
60
12 Valve seat 4
13
12 57 13 Valve 4
17 61
17
17 O ring 4
56 18 Diaphragm spacer 1
65 19 Hex. sock. cap bolt [PW•SW] 4
63 22 Diaphragm seal 1
23 Adjusting screw 1
14
24 Name plate 1
59
25 O ring 1
14
17 18 26 O ring 1
9
64 7 27 O ring 1
28 Bracket spacer 1
19 29 Hose stopper 4
30 Hose adapter 4
1 31 O ring 4
17
14
56 Fitting adapter 1
11 57 Air vent valve guide A 1
13
12
58 Air vent valve guide B 1
11 59 Spacer 1
13
12 60 Separate pin 1
3
61 Valve 2
62 Valve seat 1
31
63 Air vent body B 1
30
64 Lock nut 1
29
65 O ring 1
4
66 Air vent fitting 1
94 Exploded view
Specifications/Outer dimensions
Specifications
Information in this section is subject to change without notice.
■ Pump unit
VC•VH•PC•PH
Flow rate Discharge Stroke length Stroke rate Power con- Current Weight
Model code L/H pressure % % sumption value kg
(mℓ/min) MPa (mm) (spm) W A
2.3
EWN-B11 1.0
(38)
3.9
EWN-B16 0.7
(65) 50-100
20 0.8 2.8
6.0 (0.5-1.0)
EWN-B21 0.4
(100)
12.0
EWN-B31 0.2
(200) 0.1-100
4.8 (1-360)
EWN-C16 1.0
(80)
7.8
EWN-C21 0.7
(130) 40-100
24 1.2 3.7
16.2 (0.5-1.25)
EWN-C31 0.35
(270)
25.2
EWN-C36 0.2
(420)
FC•SH•TC
2.3
EWN-B11 1.0
(38)
3.9
EWN-B16 0.7
(65) 50-100
20 0.8 2.8
6.0 (0.5-1.0)
EWN-B21 0.4
(100)
12.0
EWN-B31 0.2
(200) 0.1-100
4.8 (1-360)
EWN-C16 1.0
(80)
7.8
EWN-C21 0.7
(130) 40-100
24 1.2 3.7
16.2 (0.5-1.25)
EWN-C31 0.35
(270)
Specification
24.6
EWN-C36 0.2
(410)
Specifications/Outer dimensions 95
VC•VH (High compression type)
0.7
EWN-B09 1.0
(12)
1.4
EWN-B11 1.0
(23) 50-100
20 0.8 2.8
2.4 (0.625-1.25)
EWN-B16 0.7
(40) 0.1-100
3.8 (1-180)
EWN-B21 0.4
(63)
3.2
EWN-C16 1.0
(54) 40-100
24 1.2 3.7
4.7 (0.6-1.50)
EWN-C21 0.7
(78)
PC•PH•SH (High pressure type)

1.5 50-100 2.8
EWN-B11 1.7 20 0.8
(25) (0.5-1.0) 0.1-100 (SH3.6)
2.4 40-100 (1-240) 3.7
EWN-C16 1.7 24 1.2
(40) (0.5-1.25) (SH4.5)
PC•PH•SH (High pressure type (2MPa))

1.0 70-100 0.1-100 2.8
EWN-B11 2.0 20 0.8
(17) (0.6-0.9) (1-240) (SH3.6)
PC•P6 (High viscosity type)

9.0 40-100 0.1-100
EWN-C31 0.5 24 1.2 3.7
(150) (0.5-1.25) (1-240)
Auto degassing type

1.8
EWN-B11 1.0
(30) 50-100
20 0.8 2.9
3.3 (0.5-1.0)
EWN-B16 0.7
(55) 0.1-100
3.9 (1-360)
EWN-C16 1.0
(65) 40-100
24 1.2 3.8
6.6 (0.5-1.25)
EWN-C21 0.7
(110)
96 Specifications/Outer dimensions
*These specifications were collected at the time of our shipping inspection and based
on pumping clean water at ambient temperature and rated voltage.
*Flow rates were collected at the maximum discharge pressure, 100% stroke length
and 100% stroke rate. A flow rate increases as a discharge pressure decreases.
*Allowable room temperature: 0-40°C
*Allowable liquid temperature: 0-40°C (0-60°C for the PC•PH•FC)
*Allowable power voltage deviation: ±10% of the rated range
*For the PC/P6-V types, its flow rate was collected with clean water. The rate may
change depending on liquid viscosity, and therefore is not guaranteed.
■ European power cable

Conduction
0.75 [mm2] Triplex cable(L/N/PE) Standard H03VV-F
section area
Terminal
Length 2000 [mm] European plug
treatment
■ Australian power cable

Conduction H05VV-F
1.0 [mm2] Triplex cable(L/N/E) Standard
section area AS3191
Terminal
Length 2000 [mm] Australian plug
treatment
■ Pump colour
Blue Munsell colour system 7.5PB 3/8
Red Munsell colour system 5R 3/10
Specification
Outer dimensions
■ EWN-[B11•B16•B21] [VC•VH•PC•PH]
(265)
(47)
OUT AIR
,/#+
(199)
(164)
100
(24)
IN
10
(68) 125 (23)
80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-B31[VC•VH•PC•PH]
(267)
(48)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(212)
(177)
100
(6)
10
IN
(68) (125) (25)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-[C16•C21] [VC•VH•PC•PH]
(265)
(47)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(199)
(164)
100
(24)
IN
10
(68) 125 (23)
80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-C31 [VC•VH•PC•PH]
(267)
(48)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(212)
(177)
100
(6)
10
IN
(68) (125) (25)

80
100
106
116
Specification
6
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-C36 [VC•VH•PC•PH]
(267)
(48)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(211)
(176)
100
(7)
10
IN
(68) 125 (24)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-[B11•B16•B21]FC
(231)
(13)
OUT
(166)
(160)
100
(40)
IN
10
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-B31FC
(236)
(16)
OUT
(177)
100
(23)
10
IN
(68) 125 (25)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-[C16•C21]FC
(231)
(13)
OUT
(166)
(160)
100
(40)
IN
10
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
Specification
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-C31FC
(236)
(16)
OUT
(177)
100
(23)
10
IN
(68) 125 (25)
80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-C36FC
(235)
(16)
OUT
(177)
100
(23)
10
IN
(68) 125 (24)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-[B11•B16•B21]TC
(265)
(47)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(198)
(163)
100
(25)
10
IN
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-B31TC
(267)
(48)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(211)
(176)
100
(7)
10
IN
(68) 125 (25)

80
100
106
116
Specification
6
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-[C16•C21]TC
(265)
(47)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(198)
(163)
100
(25)
10
IN
(68) 125 (23)
80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-C31TC
(267)
(48)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(211)
(176)
100
(7)
10
IN
(68) 125 (25)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-C36TC
(268)
(49)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(211)
(176)
100
(6)
10
IN
(68) 125 (24)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-[B11•B16•B21]SH
(232)
(15)
OUT
(201)
(155)
100
(44)
IN
10
(68) 125 (22)

80
100
106
116
Specification
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-B31SH
(233)
(15)
OUT
(213)
(167)
100
(34)
10
IN
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-[C16•C21]SH
(232)
(15)
OUT
(201)
(155)
100
(44)
IN
10
(68) 125 (22)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-C31SH
(233)
(15)
OUT
(213)
(167)
100
(34)
10
IN
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-C36SH
(233)
(15)
OUT
(216)
(170)
100
(32)
10
IN
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
Specification
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-[B09•B11•B16•B21] [VC•VH] (High compression type)
(265)
(47)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(199)
(164)
100
(24)
IN
10
(68) 125 (23)
80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-[C16•C21] [VC•VH] (High compression type)
(265)
(47)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(199)
(164)
100
(24)
IN
10
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-B11 [PC•PH] (High pressure type/High pressure type (2MPa))
(279)
(62)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(199)
(164)
100
(24)
IN
10
(68) 125 (23)
80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN-C16 [PC•PH] (High pressure type)
(279)
(62)
OUT AIR
LOCK
(199)
(164)
100
(24)
IN
10
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
Specification
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-B11SH (High pressure type/High pressure type (2MPa))

/54

).

■ EWN-C16SH (High pressure type)
(232)
(15)
OUT
(201)
(155)
100
(44)
IN
10
(68) 125 (22)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN-C31 [PC•P6] (High viscosity type)
(238)
(20)
OUT
(192)
100
(12)
10
IN
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15
■ EWN- [B11•B16] (Auto degassing type)
(265)
(47)
AIR(AUTO)
AIR
OUT
LOCK
(245)
(210)
100
(24)
10
IN
(68) 125 (23)

Specification
80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15

■ EWN- [C16•C21] (Auto degassing type)
(265)
(47)
AIR(AUTO)
AIR
OUT
LOCK
(245)
(210)
100
(24)
10
IN
(68) 125 (23)

80
100
106
116
40 15 20 20 15

Specification

114
115
( )Country codes
IWAKI CO.,LTD. 6-6 Kanda-Sudacho 2-chome Chiyoda-ku Tokyo 101-8558 Japan
TEL:(81)3 3254 2935 FAX:3 3252 8892(http://www.iwakipumps.jp)
Australia IWAKI Pumps Australia Pty. Ltd. TEL : (61)2 9899 2411 FAX : 2 9899 2421 Italy IWAKI Italia S.R.L. TEL : (39)0444 371115 FAX : 0444 335350
Austria IWAKI (Austria) GmbH TEL : (43)2236 33469 FAX : 2236 33469 Korea IWAKI Korea Co.,Ltd. TEL : (82)2 2630 4800 FAX : 2 2630 4801
Belgium IWAKI Belgium n.v. TEL : (32)1367 0200 FAX : 1367 2030 Malaysia IWAKIm Sdn. Bhd. TEL : (60)3 7803 8807 FAX : 3 7803 4800
China IWAKI Pumps (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. TEL : (86)21 6272 7502 FAX : 21 6272 6929 Norway IWAKI Norge AS TEL : (47)66 81 16 60 FAX : 66 81 16 61
China IWAKI Pumps (Guandong) Co., Ltd. TEL : (86)750 3866228 FAX : 750 3866278 Singapore IWAKI Singapore Pte. Ltd. TEL : (65)6316 2028 FAX : 6316 3221
China GFTZ IWAKI Engineering & Trading (Guangzhou) TEL : (86)20 8435 0603 FAX : 20 8435 9181 Spain IWAKI Iberica Pumps, S.A. TEL : (34)943 630030 FAX : 943 628799
China GFTZ IWAKI Engineering & Trading (Beijing) TEL : (86)10 6442 7713 FAX : 10 6442 7712 Sweden IWAKI Sverige AB TEL : (46)8 511 72900 FAX : 8 511 72922
Denmark IWAKI Nordic A/S TEL : (45)48 24 2345 FAX : 48 24 2346 Switzerland IWAKI (Schweiz) AG TEL : (41)26 674 9300 FAX : 26 674 9302
Finland IWAKI Suomi Oy TEL : (358)9 2745810 FAX : 9 2742715 Taiwan IWAKI Pumps Taiwan Co., Ltd. TEL : (886)2 8227 6900 FAX : 2 8227 6818
France IWAKI France S.A. TEL : (33)1 69 63 33 70 FAX : 1 64 49 92 73 Taiwan IWAKI Pumps Taiwan (Hsin-chu) Co., Ltd. TEL : (886)3 573 5797 FAX : (886)3 573 5798
Germany IWAKI EUROPE GmbH TEL : (49)2154 9254 0 FAX : 2154 9254 48 Thailand IWAKI (Thailand) Co.,Ltd. TEL : (66)2 322 2471 FAX : 2 322 2477
Holland IWAKI EUROPE NL Branch TEL : (31)547 293 160 FAX : 547 292 332 U.K. IWAKI Pumps (UK) LTD. TEL : (44)1743 231363 FAX : 1743 366507
Hong Kong IWAKI Pumps Co., Ltd. TEL : (852)2 607 1168 FAX : 2 607 1000 U.S.A. IWAKI AMERICA Inc TEL : (1)508 429 1440 FAX : 508 429 1386
Indonesia IWAKI Singapore (Indonesia Branch) TEL : (62)21 690 6606 FAX : 21 690 6612 Vietnam IWAKI Pumps Vietnam Co.,Ltd. TEL : (84)613 933456 FAX : 613 933399
T683-4 '11/07
Caudalímetro con flotador
Ventajas Presión Nominal (H2O, 20°C)

• Rangos de medición escalonados orientados a la práctica según • PN 10
DIN
• Longitud de montaje = denominación de tipo 165 mm Temperatura Del Medio
• Longitud de montaje = denominación de tipo 170 mm • véase diagrama de presión y temperatura
• Longitud de montaje = denominación de tipo 185 mm Presión De Servicio
• Longitud de montaje = denominación de tipo 200 mm
• Véase diagrama de presión y temperatura
• Longitud de montaje = denominación de tipo 335 mm
• Longitud de montaje = denominación de tipo 350 mm Tamaño Constructivo
• Exactitud de la medición según VDI/VDE 3513 • DN 15
• Materiales con una absorción de humedad reducida aumentan
la estabilidad del valor de medición Viscosidad
• Automatización del proceso por componentes opcionales como • Para fluidos que divergen del H2O
sensor de valores medidos ZE 3000 o contactos de valor límite • DN 10 - DN 40: máximo 200 a 350 mPas
ZE 950/ZE 951 • DN 50 - DN 65: máximo 500 mPas
• Escalas especiales en dependencia de la característica del fluido
Exactitud De La Medición
Aplicaciones • Clase 4 conforme a VDI/VDE 3513, hoja 2
• Construcción de instalaciones químicas • VDI = Asociación de Ingenieros Alemanes
• Tratamiento de aguas • VDE = Asociación de Electrotécnicos Alemanes
Principio De Medición Medida Flotador

• El fluido –agua, aire, químicos líquidos o gaseosos– circula por • PVDF sin magneto
el caudalímetro vertical de abajo a arriba. Por las fuerzas de la • PVDF con magneto encapsulado a prueba de líquido para el
corriente el flotador se eleva exento de rozamiento e indica con registro electrónico de los valores medidos
su canto de lectura superior (diámetro mayor) directamente el
Juntas Tóricas
volumen de flujo en la escala del tubo de medida.
• FPM
Versión • EPDM
• El tubo de medida cónico está equipado en serie con una escala
Conexión
de rango de medición en l/h para el agua de 20°C. El tubo tiene
• Tubo de medida: PVC-U, PA, PSU Unión roscada DIN 8063 con
listones de cola de milano exteriores con dos indicadores de
unión socket para encolar DIN ISO (PVC-U)
valor nominal desplazables para el marcado óptico del volumen
• Tubo de medida: PVDF Unión roscada (rosca especial) con unión
de paso mínimo y máximo o para la recepción del sensor de
socket para soldar DIN ISO (PVDF)
valores medidos ZE 3000 o de los contactos de valor límite ZE
• Unión con rosca interior (GTW/VA) a petición
950, ZE 951.
• Unión socket para soldar DIN ISO (PP, PE) a petición
• En el tubo de medida se encuentra el flotador, en serie de PVDF,
así como el receptor del flotador. Posición De Montaje
• vertical
Gama Rango De Medición
• véase tabla rango de medición Dirección Del Flujo
• De abajo a arriba
Fluidos
• Fluidos líquidos o gaseosos neutros o agresivos, técnicamente Accesorios
puros, si los componentes de las válvulas que contactan con • Escalas especiales
los fluidos son resistentes a la temperatura de servicio conforme • Sensor de valores medidos ZE 3000 para la automatización del
a la lista de resistencia ASV! proceso
• Para los fluidos gaseosos no se debe emplear ningún tubo de • Contacto de valor límite ZE 950, ZE 951 para el registro de flujo
medida de PVC. mínimo o máximo para la automatización del proceso
> hoja técnica n°: 394060 - 2012/05/15 Salvo posible modificaciones técnicas 1
ASV Stübbe GmbH & Co. KG · Hollwieser Str. 5 · D-32602 Vlotho · Tel. +49(0)5733. 799-0 · Fax +49(0)5733. 799-200 · contact@asv-stuebbe.de · www.asv-stuebbe.de
Diagrama de presión y temperatura Diagrama de presión y temperatura

Tubo de medida PVC-U Tubo de medida PVDF
P = Presión de servicio P = Presión de servicio

T = Temperatura T = Temperatura
1 = diagrama PVC-U tubo de medida 1 = diagrama PVDF tubo de medida
2= diagrama PVC-U conexión 2= diagrama PVDF conexión
Diagrama de presión y temperatura
Tubo de medida PA
P = Presión de servicio
T = Temperatura
1 = diagrama PA tubo de medida
2= diagrama PVC-U conexión
Diagrama de presión y temperatura
Tubo de medida PSU
Conversión de las unidades de flujo
P = Presión de servicio
T = Temperatura
1 = diagrama PSU tubo de medida
2= diagrama PVC-U conexión
2 Salvo posible modificaciones técnicas > hoja técnica n°: 394060 - 2012/05/15
Indicación de funcionamiento
Un funcionamiento seguro de la válvula presupone que ésta se
instale, opere, mantenga o repare por personal cualificado y
autorizado conforme a lo prescrito observando la protección en
el trabajo (UVV=Prescripciones de prevención de accidentes), las
prescripciones de seguridad, las normas, directivas o hojas
informativas correspondiente como p. ej. DIN, DIN EN, DIN ISO y
DVS. A un uso conforme a lo prescrito pertenece el cumplimiento
de los valores límites indicados para la presión y la temperatura
así como la comprobación de la resistencia.
¡Todos los componentes que contactan con el medio tienen que
ser »resistentes« conforme a la lista de resistencia ASV!
Indicación:
Para los fluidos gaseosos no se debe emplear ningún tubo de
medida de PVC.
Caudalímetro con flotador, DFM 170
Gama Rango De Medición

• de 5 a 400 l/h
Cuerpo PVC-U
Tamaño d(mm) 20 20 20 20
rango de presión DN(mm) 15 15 15 15
DN(pulgada) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G(pulgada) 1 1 1 1
Gama rango de medición(l/h) 5-50 15-150 25-250 40-400
Conexión Juntas tóricas Nº de ident.
PVC-U EPDM 47504 47505 47506 47507

encolar socket DIN 0,10 kg 0,10 kg 0,10 kg 0,10 kg
ISO
Cuerpo PVC-U flotador imán
Tamaño flotador magnético magnético magnético magnético

rango de presión d(mm) 20 20 20 20
DN(mm) 15 15 15 15
DN(pulgada) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G(pulgada) 1 1 1 1
PVC-U EPDM 47687 47688 47689 47690

ISO
Cuerpo PA
Tamaño d(mm) 20 20 20 20
DN(pulgada) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G(pulgada) 1 1 1 1
PVC-U EPDM 47520 47521 47522 47523

ISO
Cuerpo PA flotador imán

DN(mm) 15 15 15 15
DN(pulgada) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G(pulgada) 1 1 1 1
PVC-U EPDM 47703 47704 47705 47706

ISO
Cuerpo PSU
Tamaño d(mm) 20 20 20 20
DN(pulgada) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G(pulgada) 1 1 1 1
PVC-U EPDM 47536 47537 47538 47539

ISO
Cuerpo PSU flotador imán

DN(mm) 15 15 15 15
DN(pulgada) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G(pulgada) 1 1 1 1
PVC-U EPDM 47719 47720 47721 47722

ISO
Cuerpo PVDF
Tamaño d(mm) 20 20 20 20
DN(pulgada) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G(pulgada) 1 1 1 1
PVDF FPM 141968 141969 141970 141971

soldar socket DIN ISO Peso 0,14 kg 0,14 kg 0,14 kg 0,14 kg
Cuerpo PVDF flotador imán

DN(mm) 15 15 15 15
DN(pulgada) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
G(pulgada) 1 1 1 1
PVDF FPM 141972 141973 141974 141975

soldar socket DIN ISO Peso 0,14 kg 0,14 kg 0,14 kg 0,14 kg
Dimensiones
d(mm) 20
DN(mm) 15
DN(pulgada) 1/2
PN(bar) 10
Dimensiones(mm)
d 20
G 1
L 170
L1 176
Listas de piezas
DFM 165-200 DFM 335-350
Posición Cantidad Denominación dos diferentes receptores de flotador para el rango de medición:
1 1 Tubo de medida de 15 a 150 l/h; de 30 a 300 l/h
2 1 Flotador de 1.000 a 10.000 l/h; de 10.000 a 50.000 l/h
3 1 Receptor del flotador
4 2 Tuerca de racor Posición Cantidad Denominación
5 2 Manguito 1 1 Tubo de medida
6 2 Junta tórica 2 1 Flotador
7 2 Indicador de valor nominal 3 1 Receptor del flotador
4 2 Tuerca de racor
5 2 Manguito
6 2 Junta tórica
7 2 Indicador de valor nominal
Hoja técnica
Liquiphant T FTL 20
Información técnica breve
www.es.endress.com/edirect_es
• Nueva horquilla de pequeñas dimensiones

• Conexiones de 1/2“, 3/4“ y 1”G
• Reducido tamaño para una fácil instalación en lugares de difícil
acceso
• Cabezal en acero (316L/1.4435)
• Protección contra rebose según WHG (Alemania)
• Conexión ASI bus
Aplicación
El Liquiphant T FTL 20 es un detector de nivel límite. Su diseño
compacto lo hace ideal para aplicaciones donde el espacio es
reducido, por ejemplo en depósitos y tuberías, como detector contra
rebose o protección de bomba en sistemas de limpieza y filtrado, así
como en depósitos de lubricantes, enfriadores y líquidos en general.
El FTL20 es ideal para aplicaciones donde hasta ahora se empleaban
flotadores y sensores capacitivos, conductivos y ópticos. Es más, el
FTL20 funciona perfectamente en aplicaciones donde los sistemas
anteriores no podrían hacerlo debido a adherencias, conductividad,
turbulencias, corrientes o burbujas.
Funcionamiento
Las horquillas simétricas, en acero anticorrosivo (1.4435/316L)
vibran a su frecuencia de resonancia. Al introducirse en un líquido,
esta frecuencia varía y la electrónica activa un interruptor eléctrico.
Conexión eléctrica El Liquiphant T FTL 20 está disponible para conexión directa PNP,
� � ��
ASI-Bus o corriente alterna.
��
CC-PNP � �
��
��
� � ��
con conector ��
� ��
M12x1
��
Ejemplo de utilización
� � � �
�
CC-PNP � � �
�
con conector � �
eléctrico ��
�
��
��
��
� �
CA a dos hilos �
con conector �
eléctrico ��
� �
��
��
��
AS-i + 1: BN
Horquilla vibrante en depósito
ASI 2 1
3: BU (líquido hasta 10000 mm2/s)
con conector Horquilla vibrante en tubería
3 4
M12x1 AS-i – (líquido hasta 2000 mm2/s)
TD 131F/23/es/04.01
52013312
UE/INDD 2.0
Datos técnicos Dimensiones (en mm) y materiales
Conector M12x1:
Salida versión CA (150 °C: 173,0)
Alimentación 19... 253 V, 50/60 Hz

Corriente 250 mA ��
��
Conexión eléctrica Conector eléctrico,
��
Salida versión CC
��
�
Alimentación 10... 35 V DC
��
Corriente 250 mA ��
��
Conexión eléctrica Conector eléctrico o M12x1 ��
ASI-bus Por favor, solicite el cable y el
Alimentación 26... 32 V conector por separado.
Corriente Según EN 50295 Conector eléctrico:

Conexión eléctrica M12x1 �� (100°C: 160,0)
Tiempo de respuesta aprox. 0.5 s horquilla cubierta
��
aprox. 1.0 s horquilla descubierta
��
��
Histéresis aprox. 2 mm con montaje vertical
��
�
desde arriba
Conexión a proceso G 1/2”, G 3/4”, G 1” (150 °C) ��
��
��
��
Condiciones de aplicación ��
Montaje según se requiera
Temp. ambiente -40... +70 °C, ASI-bus -25... +70 °C
Instalación según manual de instrucciones KA213F
Temp. del producto -40... +100 °C, opcional +150 °C
Presión de trabajo -1... +40 bar
Temp. de almacenaje -40... +85 °C Densidad producto: mín. 0.7 g/cm3
Protección climática IEC 68, part 2-38 Viscosidad producto: hasta 10.000 mm2/s (cSt)
Protección ambiental IP 65; con conector M12x1: IP 67 Certificados Protección contra rebose según WHG
EMC Emisión interferencias EN 61326 Clase B (Alemania)
Inmunidad a interferencias EN 61326, Garantía En caso de fallo durante el periodo
NAMUR NE21 de garantía le remitiremos un nuevo
instrumento.
Entrega Servicio de entrega en 4 días.
Liquiphant T FTL 20 1 a 3 u. 4 a 10 u. 11 a 35 u.
Conector eléctrico CA/CC, 100 °C 120,00 108,00 98,00 www.e-direct.de
Conector eléctrico CA/CC, 150 °C 129,00 117,00 107,00 0180-343 47 32
Conector M 12x1 X1, CC, 100 °C 120,00 108,00 98,00
Conector M 12x1 X1, CC, 150 °C 129,00 117,00 107,00 0180-343 29 34
Conector M 12x1 X1, ASI-Bus, 100 °C 143,00 131,00 121,00 e-direct@de.endress.com
Conector M 12x1 X1, ASI-Bus, 150 °C 152,00 140,00 130,00
Precios netos aplicables en España hasta 30.09.2005, según modelo y cantidad. Transporte incluido. IVA no incluido.
Entrega en 4 días laborables, en capital de provincia y según existencias.
Pasamos pedido de: * por favor añada el código de la rosca en el pedido: No. 0 = rosca 1/2“;
1 = rosca 3/4“; 6 = rosca 1”
Liquiphant T FTL 20 / CA E-direct

estándar, con conector eléctrico, 100 °C Departamento de Márketing
Ref. pedido FTL20-0_*10 unidades
Endress+Hauser, S.A.
con conector eléctrico, 150 °C
unidades Constitució 3 A
Ref. pedido FTL20-0_*1B
08960 Sant Just Desvern
Liquiphant T FTL 20 / CC
estándar, con conector eléctrico, 100°C
(Barcelona)
con conector eléctrico, 150°C Pedido directo
Ref. pedido FTL20-0_*2B unidades Tel:934 803 366 / Fax: 934 733 839
con conector M12x1, 100°C
Ref. pedido FTL20-0_*25 unidades Compañía
con conector M12x1, 150°C
Ref. pedido FTL20-0_*2D unidades Nombre y apellido:
Liquiphant T FTL 20 / ASI
Dirección:
conector M12x1, ASI bus, 100°C
C.P. y Población:
conector M12x1, ASI bus, 150°C
Ref. pedido FTL20-0_*3D unidades Tel.:
Accesorios
Llave de tubo SW32 Fax:
Ref. pedido 52010156 (9,50 3/u.) unidades
C.I.F.:
5 m de cable, con conector M12x1
Ref. pedido 52010285 (9,50 3/u.) unidades
Fecha/Firma:
Total:
Según condiciones generales de venta, embalaje y transporte incluidos. IVA no incluido.
Catálogo E-direct (gratis)
TD 131F/23/es/01.04
52013312
UE/INDD 2.0
Liquiphant T FTL20H
de - Füllstandgrenzschalter
en - Level Limit Switch
fr - Détecteur de niveau
es - Detector de nivel
it - Interruttore di livello
nl - Niveauschakelaar
KA214F/00/a6/07.04
52019486
de - Inhalt en - Contents fr - Sommaire
Sicherheitshinweise 4 Notes on Safety 4 Conseils de sécurité 4
Geräte-Identifikation 6 Device Identification 6 Dénomination 6
Behandlung 8 Handling 8 Manipulation 8
Einbaubeispiele 10 Mounting examples 10 Exemples d’implantation 10
Einbau 12 Mounting 12 Montage 12
Anschluss DC-PNP 18 Connection DC-PNP 18 Raccordement DC-PNP 18
Anschluss AC 22 Connection AC 22 Raccordement AC 22
Anschluss AS-i-Bus 24 Connection AS-i-Bus 24 Raccordement AS-i-Bus 24
Test 25 Test 25 Test 25
Reinigung 26 Cleaning 26 Nettoyage 26
Technische Daten 27 Technical Data 27 Caractéristiques techniques 27
Zubehör, Ersatzteile 29 Accessories, Spare parts 29 Accessoires, Pièces de rechange 29
Fehlersuche 33 Trouble-shooting 34 Recherche de défauts 35
Ergänzende Dokumentation 39 Supplementary Documentation 39 Documentation complémentaire 39
" Achtung!
= verboten;
führt zu fehlerhaftem Betrieb
" Caution!
= forbidden;
leads to incorrect operation
" Attention!
= interdit; peut provoquer
des dysfonctionnements
oder Zerstörung. or destruction. ou la destruction.
2 Endress+Hauser
es - Indice it - Indice nl - Inhoud
Notas sobre seguridad 5 Note sulla sicurezza 5 Veiligheidsinstructies 5
Identificación del equipo 6 Identificazione dello strumento 6 Instrument-identificatie 6
Modo de empleo 8 Impiego 8 Behandeling 8
Ejemplos de montaje 10 Esempi di montaggio 10 Inbouwvoorbeelden 10
Montaje 12 Montaggio 12 Inbouw 12
Conexiones DC-PNP 18 Collegamento CC-PNP 18 Aansluiting DC-PNP 18
Conexiones AC 22 Collegamento CA 22 Aansluiting AC 22
Conexiones AS-i-Bus 24 Collegamento AS-i-Bus 24 Aansluiting AS-i-Bus 24
Comprobación 25 Test 25 Test 25
Limpieza 26 Pulizia 26 Reiniging 26
Datos técnicos 27 Dati tecnici 27 Technische gegevens 27
Accesorios, Repuestos 29 Accessori, Ricambi 29 Toebehoren, Reserve-onderdelen 29
Identificación de fallos 36 Individuazione e eliminazione Foutzoeken 38
Documentación suplementaria 39 delle anomalie 37 Aanvullende documentatie 39
Documentazione supplementare 39
" Atención!
= Prohibido; peligro
de mal funcionamiento
" Attenzione!
= Vietato; pericolo
di malfunzionamento
" Opgelet!
= verboden;
leidt tot foutieve werking
o de destrucción. o di distruzione. of storing.
Endress+Hauser 3
de - Sicherheitshinweise en - Notes on Safety fr - Conseils de sécurité
Der Liquiphant T FTL20H darf nur The Liquiphant T FTL20H is Le Liquiphant T FTL20H doit être
als Füllstandgrenzschalter für designed for level limit detection in exclusivement utilisé comme
Flüssigkeiten verwendet werden. liquids. détecteur de niveau pour liquides.
Bei unsachgemäßem Einsatz If used incorrectly it is possible that Il peut être source de danger en cas
können Gefahren von ihm application-related dangers may d’utilisation non conforme aux
ausgehen. arise. prescriptions.
Das Gerät darf nur von The device may be installed, L’appareil ne doit être installé,
qualifiziertem und connected, commissioned, raccordé, mis en service et
autorisiertem Fachpersonal operated and maintained by entretenu que par un personnel
unter strenger Beachtung dieser qualified and authorised qualifié et autorisé, qui tiendra
Betriebsanleitung, personnel only, under strict compte des indications contenues
der einschlägigen Normen, observance of these operating dans les instructions de service
der gesetzlichen Vorschriften instructions, any relevant présentes, des normes en vigueur
und der Zertifikate (je nach standards, legal requirements, and, et des certificats disponibles
Anwendung) eingebaut, where appropriate, the certificates. (selon l’application).
angeschlossen, in Betrieb Install an easily accessible power Installer un commutateur réseau à
genommen und gewartet werden. switch in the proximity of the proximité immédiate de l’appareil,
In der Gebäudeinstallation ist ein device. en veillant à ce qu’il soit facilement
Netzschalter für das Gerät leicht Mark the power switch as a accessible.
erreichbar in dessen Nähe zu disconnector for the device. Repérer ce commutateur comme
installieren. sectionneur de l’appareil.
Er ist als Trennvorrichtung für das
Gerät zu kennzeichnen.
4 Endress+Hauser
es - Notas sobre seguridad it - Note sulla sicurezza nl - Veiligheidsinstructies
El detector de nivel Liquiphant T Il Liquiphant T FTL20H è Gebruik de Liquiphant T FTL20H
FTL20H sólo debe utilizarse para la particolarmente studiato per alleen als niveauschakelaar voor
detección de límite en fluidos. l'impiego come soglia di livello in vloeistoffen.
Su empleo inapropiado puede liquidi. Indien niet correct gebruikt
resultar peligroso. El equipo deberá Un'installazione non corretta può kunnen gevaarlijke situaties
ser montado, conectado, instalado determinare pericolo. ontstaan.
y mantenido única y Lo strumento può essere montato Het instrument alleen door
exclusivamente por personal solamente da personale gekwalificeerd en
cualificado y autorizado, qualificato ed autorizzato. geautoriseerd personeel laten
bajo rigurosa observación de las Il montaggio, il collegamento, inbouwen, aansluiten,
presentes instrucciones de servicio, la messa in esercizio e la in bedrijf nemen en onderhouden.
de las normativas y legislaciones manutenzione devono rispettare le Neem de instructies in deze
vigentes, así como de los presenti istruzioni, le norme Inbedrijfstellingsvoorschriften,
certificados (dependiendo de la vigenti e i certificati (a seconda de desbetreffende normen,
aplicación). dell'applicazione). de wettelijke voorschriften en
Instalar un interruptor de fácil Installare un interruttore di eventuele certificaten in acht.
acceso en las proximidades del alimentazione di facile accesso Installeer een makkelijk bereikbare
equipo. nelle vicinanze dello strumento. voedingschakelaar in de nabijheid
Identificar el interruptor como Contrassegnare l'interruttore di van het instrument.
desconectador del equipo. alimentazione come interruttore di Kenmerk de voedingschakelaar
disattivazione dello strumento. specifiek voor het instrument.
Endress+Hauser 5
6
strumento
ENDRESS+HAUSER Z-6
LIQUIPHANT T
it - Identificazione dello
Z-6
en - Device Identification
de - Geräte-Identifikation
FTL20H - # # # #
nl - Instrument-identificatie
es - Identificación del equipo
fr - Désignation de l’appareil
0 ohne / without / sans / sin / senza / zonder, WHG,

Leckage-Detektion / Leakage detection /
Détection de fuite / Detección de la salida /
Rilevazione di perdita / Lekdetectie
3 CSA General Purpose, CSA C US
9 andere / others / autres / otros / altri / andere
GCJ ISO 228 G ½ A, 316L

GDJ ISO 228 G ¾ A, 316L
GEJ ISO 228 G 1 A, 316L, *1
MNJ DIN 11851 DN 25 PN 40, 316L, *2
MPJ DIN 11851 DN 32 PN 40, 316L, *2
MQJ DIN 11851 DN 40 PN 40, 316L, *2
RCJ ANSI ½" NPT, 316L
RDJ ANSI ¾" NPT, 316L
RRJ DIN 2999 R ½, 316L
RSJ DIN 2999 R ¾, 316L
TCJ ISO 2852 DN 25-38 (1...1-½"), 316L, *3
TDJ ISO 2852 DN 40-51 (2"), 316L, *3
UPJ frontbündig / flush-mounted / encastré /
a ras con el frontal / pressato a raso / flush mounted,
1 316L
* , 1" 52001047,
YY9 andere / others / autres / otros / altri / andere
Endress+Hauser
1 19...253V AC, 2-Draht / wire / fil / alambre / bifilare / draad
2 10...35V DC, PNP 3-Draht / wire / fil / alambre / trifilare / draad
Endress+Hauser
3 AS-i Bus
9 andere / others / autres / otros / altri / andere
B Pg 11, ISO4400, IP65, 150 °C

C NPT ½", ISO4400, IP65, 150 °C
D M12, IP67, 150 °C
E Ventilstecker mit QUICKON-Anschluss,
Schneid-Klemm-Anschluss /
Valve plug with QUICKON connection,
Gumption clamping connection /
Prise de valve avec raccord QUICKON,
raccord à borne guillotine /
Enchufe de válvula con la conexión de QUICKON,
Gumption que afianza la conexión con abrazadera /
Connettore valvola con connessione Quickon,
Gumption che preme collegamento /
De stop van de klep met verbinding QUICKON,
Het vastklemmen van Gumption verbinding /
IP65, 150 °C
F M12, IP69K, 316L, 150 °C
Y andere / others / autres / otros / altri / andere
1 Einbau in Zubehör Einschweissadapter /

*
Installation in accessories welding adapter /
Installation dans l’accessoire adaptateur à souder /
Instalación en los accesorios que sueldan con autógena el adaptador /
Installazione in accessori per adattatore a saldare /
Installatie in de toebehoren lasadapter
2 Hygiene-Verbindung / Hygienic connection /
*
Raccordement hygiénique / Conexión higiénica /
Collegamento igienico / Hygiënische verbinding
3 Tri-Clamp-Verbindung / Tri-Clamp connection /
*
Raccordement de Tri-Clamp / Conexión de la Tri-Clamp /
Collegamento del Tri-Clamp / Tri-Clamp aansluiting
7
de - Behandlung
Am Gehäuse anfassen,
nicht an der Schwinggabel
en - Handling
Hold by the housing,
not by the sensor fork
fr - Manipulation
Tenir par le boîtier,
et non par la fourche
es - Modo de empleo D-79689 Maulburg
Made in Germany,
ON
OFF
Coger por el cabezal, Slave Profil

XXXXXXXX
no por las horquillas Ser.-No.:

AS-i
FTL20H- XX
LIQUIPHAN
ENDRESS+
it - Impiego
Afferrare la custodia,
non i rebbi
nl - Behandeling
De behuizing vastpakken,
niet de trilvork
Ra < 1.5 µm
8 Endress+Hauser
de - Nicht verbiegen
Nicht kürzen
Nicht verlängern
en - Do not bend
Do not shorten
Do not lenghen
fr - Ne pas déformer
Ne pas raccourcir
Ne pas rallonger
es - No torcer
No acortar
No alargar
it - Non piegare
Non accorciare
Non allungare
nl - Niet verbuigen
Niet inkorten
Niet verlengen
Endress+Hauser 9
de - Einbaubeispiele
A: Schaltpunkt
B: Schalthysterese
(~0.12 in)
(~0.5 in)
~13 mm
en - Mounting examples
~3 mm
A: Switchpoint
B: Switching hysteresis A
B
fr - Exemples d’implantation
A: Point de commutation
B: Hystérésis de commutation
es - Exemples d’implantation
A: Punto de conmutación
~10.5 mm
(~0.4 in)
B: Histerésis de conmutación
it - Esempi di montaggio
A
A: Punto di commutazione
B: Isteresi
nl - Inbouwvoorbeelden
A: Schakelpunt
B: Schakelhysterese
(~0.07 in)
(~1.2 in)
~30 mm
~2 mm
A
B
10 Endress+Hauser
de - Viskosität und Ansatzbildung
berücksichtigen
A
en - Take account of viscosity and
A B build-up
n = 0...10000 mm²/s fr - Tenir compte de la viscosité et du
(cSt) colmatage
C D
es - Tener en cuenta la viscosidad y la
n = 0... 2000 mm²/s formación de adherencias
(cSt)
it - Attenzione alla viscosità e ai
depositi
nl - Houdt rekening met de viscositeit
B en de vorming van aangroei
min. DN 50
(min. 2 in)
Endress+Hauser 11
de - Einbau
Prozessanschluss G ¾" => 1.) ~63.9 mm / ~2.6 in 2.) ~ 38.0 mm / ~1.5 in
G ½ A, G ¾ A, G 1 A G 1" => 1.) ~78.0 mm / ~3.7 in 2.) ~ 48.0 mm / ~1.9 in
(DIN ISO 228/l)
1.
en - Installation max. 150 °C / 25 bar
Process connection (max. 300 °F / 360 psi)
2.
G ½ A, G ¾ A, G 1 A
(DIN ISO 228/l) max. 100 °C / 40 bar
(max. 210 °F / 580 psi)
fr - Montage
Raccord processus
G ½ A, G ¾ A, G 1 A G1
Einschweißmuffe / KA032F/00
(DIN ISO 228/l) Weld-in socket /
es - Montaje Manchon à souder /
Manguito soldado /
Conexión a proceso Attacco a saldare / G¾
G ½ A, G ¾ A, G 1 A Inlassok KA219F/00
(DIN ISO 228/l)
it - Montaggio
Attacco al processo
G ½ A, G ¾ A, G 1 A
(DIN ISO 228/l)
nl - Inbouw
Procesaansluiting
32
G ½ A, G ¾ A, G 1 A
32 mm 32
(DIN ISO 228/l)
12 Endress+Hauser
de - NPT ½“, ¾“
ANSI B 1.20.1
R ½“, ¾“
DIN 2999
en - NPT ½“, ¾“
ANSI B 1.20.1
R ½“, ¾“
DIN 2999
PTFE
N
fr - NPT ½“, ¾“
FLO
ANSI B 1.20.1
T
E
R ½“, ¾“
DIN 2999
½ NPT (316L): max. 40 bar ¾ NPT (316L): max. 40 bar
es - NPT ½“, ¾“
max. 150 °C max. 150 °C
ANSI B 1.20.1
64.7 –1.6
SW 32 R ½“, ¾“
48.7 –1.6
DIN 2999
it - NPT ½“, ¾“
ANSI B 1.20.1
R ½“, ¾“
R ½ (316L): max. 40 bar R ¾ (316L): max. 40 bar DIN 2999
max. 150 °C max. 150 °C nl - NPT ½“, ¾“
64.7 –1.6 ANSI B 1.20.1
SW 32 48.7 –1.6 R ½“, ¾“
DIN 2999
Endress+Hauser 13
de - A: Prozessanschluss
Triclamp 1 ½“, 2“ (ISO 2852), A
max. 120 °C / 16 bar
B: Hygieneverbindung (max. 250 °F / 230 psi)
DN 25, 32, 40 (DIN 11851)
max. 150 °C / 2 bar
en - A: Process connection (max. 300 °F / 29 psi)
Triclamp 1 ½“, 2“ (ISO 2852),
B: Hygienic connection
DN 25, 32, 40 (DIN 11851)
fr - A: Raccord processus
Triclamp 1 ½“, 2“ (ISO 2852),
B: Raccordement hygiénique
DN 25, 32, 40 (DIN 11851) 47.9 mm
(~1.9 in)
es - A: Conexión a proceso
Triclamp 1 ½“, 2“ (ISO 2852), B
B: Conexión higiénica DN 25, DN 32, DN 40:
max. 100 °C / 40 bar
DN 25, 32, 40 (DIN 11851) (max. 210 °F / 580 psi)
it - A: Attacco al processo max. 140 °C / 25 bar
Triclamp 1 ½“, 2“ (ISO 2852), (max. 284 °F / 360 psi)
B: Collegamento igienico
DN 25, 32, 40 (DIN 11851)
DN 50:
nl - A: Procesaansluiting max. 140 °C / 25 bar
Triclamp 1 ½“, 2“ (ISO 2852), (max. 284 °F / 360 psi)
B: Hygiënische verbinding
DN 25, 32, 40 (DIN 11851) 47.9 mm
(~1.9 in)
14 Endress+Hauser
de - Prozessanschluss
mit Silikondichtung und für ausrichtbaren
Überwurfmutter / 47.9 Einschweissadapter 1“
with silicone seal and en - Process connection
coupling nut /
for alignable weld-in adapter 1"
avec joint silicone et
écrou raccord /
fr - Raccord processus
pour adaptateur à souder 1
con junta de silicona y tuerca
de unión /
orientable
max. 100 °C es - Conexión a proceso
con guarnizione al silicone e max. 40 bar
dado per raccordi / para adaptador soldado orientable
met siliconenafdichting en max. 150 °C de 1"
sok max. 25 bar it - Attacco al processo
per adattatore a saldare orientabile
EHEDG
nl - Procesaansluiting
voor 1" inlassok die kan worden
uitgericht
Endress+Hauser 15
Endress+Hauser 16
n > 2000 mm²/s
AS-i
Ser.-No.:
Made in Germany,
D-79689 Maulburg
LIQUIPHANT T
FTL20H- XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Slave Profile S-3.A.1

Z-65.40-3
Z-65.11-3
ON
OFF
AS-i
Ser.-No.:
XXXXXXXX
Slave Profil
ENDRESS+
Made in Germany,
LIQUIPHAN
D-79689 Maulburg
FTL20H- XX
! n = 0…10000 mm²/s
Let op de markering Æ
nl - Trilvork uitrichten
ENDRESS+HAUSER Z-65.11-3
LIQUIPHANT T Z-65.40-3
FTL20H- XXXX
Osservare il contrassegno Æ
AS-i
Ser.-No.:
XXXXXXXXXXX
Slave Profile S-3.A.1
it - Orientare il rebbio
ENDRESS+ ENDRESS+HAUSER Z-65.11-3
LIQUIPHAN LIQUIPHANT T Z-65.40-3
FTL20H- XX FTL20H- XXXX
AS-i AS-i
Ser.-No.: Ser.-No.:
Made in Germany, XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX
D-79689 Maulburg Slave Profil Slave Profile S-3.A.1
Atención a la marca Æ
OFF
Made in Germany, Made in Germany,
ON D-79689 Maulburg D-79689 Maulburg
es - Orientación de las horquillas
Tenir compte du repère Æ
fr - Orienter la fourche
Note mark Æ
en - Align sensor fork
Markierung beachten Æ
de - Schwinggabel ausrichten
de - Anschluss
52010285 52018763
ye 1 Stecker M12x1
en - Connection
ye 2 gn Plug M12x1
fr - Raccordement
Prise M12x1
es - Conexiones
Enchufe M12x1
it - Collegamento
Spina M12x1
nl - Aansluiting
Stop M12x1
de - Nummer = Farbe
en - Number = Colour
fr - Numéro = Couleur
es - Número = Color
it - Numero = Colore
nl - Nummer = Kleur
1 = BN = braun, brown, brun, marron, marrone, bruin

2 = WT = weiß, white, blanc, blanco, bianco, wit
3 = BU = blau, blue, bleu, azul, blu, blauw
4 = BK = schwarz, black, noir
noir,, negro, nero, zwart
Endress+Hauser 17
de - Anschluss DC-PNP
Stecker M12x1 MAX MIN
en - Connection DC-PNP
Plug M12x1
2 1 2 1
fr - Raccordement DC-PNP
Prise M12x1
3 4 3 4
es - Conexiones DC-PNP
Enchufe M12x1
R 0.5 A R 0.5 A
it - Collegamento DC-PNP
Spina M12x1
nl - Aansluiting DC-PNP
Stop M12x1 L– L+ L– L+
R = externe Last / external load / I max. 250 mA 1: BN

charge externe / carga exterior / U = 10...35 V 2: WT
I carico esterno / externe belasting 3: BU
4: BK
18 Endress+Hauser
de - Funktion
MAX MIN U en - Function
Störung L1 L+ fr - Fonction
Fault
Défaut es - Funcionamiento
Fallo it - Funzione
Guasto 0V
Storing nl - Functie
N L–
U–
... (DC) 1 2 1 2 1 4 1 4
I➞ I➞ I➞ I➞ I➞
DU <100 µA DU <100 µA <100 µA
<3V <3V
+ +
(PNP) 1 2 1 2 1 4 1 4 (3/2) (2/3) (3/2) (2/3)
L+ – L+ – L+ – L+ – L+ – L+ –
leuchtet / lights up / allumé /

ye
gn iluminado / acceso / aan
rd
blinkt / flashes / clignote /

ye 1
parpadea / lampeggia / knippert
ye 2 gn
aus / off / éteint /
apagado / spento / uit
Endress+Hauser 19
de - Anschluss DC-PNP
Ventilstecker MAX MIN
en - Connection DC-PNP
Valve plug
fr - Raccordement DC-PNP
1 2 1 2
Prise de valve
es - Conexiones DC-PNP +
Enchufe de válvula 3 3 +
R
it - Collegamento DC-PNP
– R
Connettore valvola
–
nl - Aansluiting DC-PNP 0.5 A 0.5 A
De stop van de klep
PE L– L+ PE L– L+
(Ground) (Ground)
R = externe Last / external load / I max. 250 mA

charge externe / carga exterior / U = 10...35 V
I carico esterno / externe belasting
20 Endress+Hauser
de - Funktion
Störung L1 L+
fr - Fonction
Fault
Fallo it - Funzione
Guasto 0V
N L–
U–
... (DC) 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3
I➞ I➞ I➞ I➞ I➞
DU <100 µA DU <100 µA <100 µA
<3V <3V
+ +
(PNP) 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 (3/2) (2/3) (3/2) (2/3)
L+ – L+ – L+ – L+ – L+ – L+ –
gn rd
= leuchtet / lights up / allumé / iluminado / acceso / aan

= blinkt / flashes / clignote / parpadea / lampeggia / knippert
= aus / off / éteint / apagado / spento / uit
Endress+Hauser 21
de - Anschluss AC
Ventilstecker MAX MIN
en - Connection AC
Valve plug
fr - Raccordement AC
1 1 2
Prise de valve
es - Conexiones AC
Enchufe de válvula 3
it - Collegamento AC > 19 V > 19 V
Connettore valvola R R
nl - Aansluiting AC 0.5 A 0.5 A
De stop van de klep
PE L1 N PE L1 N
(Ground) (Ground)
R = externe Last / external load / I max. 250 mA

charge externe / carga exterior / U -- 19…253 V DC
I carico esterno / externe belasting
min. 2.5 VA / 253 V (10 mA)

min. 0.5 VA / 24 V (20 mA)
22 Endress+Hauser
de - Funktion
Störung L1 L+
fr - Fonction
Fault
FTL20H- XX
FTL20H- XX
D-79689 Maulburg
D-79689 Maulburg
ENDRESS+
LIQUIPHAN
XXXXXXXX
Slave Profil
Made in Germany,
ENDRESS+
LIQUIPHAN
XXXXXXXX
Slave Profil
Made in Germany,
Ser.-No.:
Ser.-No.:
AS-i
AS-i
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Fallo it - Funzione
Guasto 0V
FTL20H- XX
FTL20H- XX
D-79689 Maulburg
D-79689 Maulburg
ENDRESS+
LIQUIPHAN
XXXXXXXX
Slave Profil
Made in Germany,
ENDRESS+
LIQUIPHAN
XXXXXXXX
Slave Profil
Made in Germany,
Ser.-No.:
Ser.-No.:
AS-i
AS-i
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
N L–
U~ (AC) 1 3 1 3 1 2 1 2
I➞ I➞ I➞ I➞ I➞
DU < 4 mA DU < 4 mA < 4 mA
< 12 V < 12 V
50...60 Hz
1 3 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 (3/2) 1 (3/2)
L1 N L1 N L1 N L1 N L1 N L1 N
gn rd
= leuchtet / lights up / allumé / iluminado / acceso / aan

= blinkt / flashes / clignote / parpadea / lampeggia / knippert
= aus / off / éteint / apagado / spento / uit
Endress+Hauser 23
de - Anschluss AS-i-Bus
AS-i-Profil: S-3.A.1
en - Connection AS-i-Bus Die Adresse ist voreingestellt auf 0 (HEX), änderbar über Busmaster oder Programmiergerät
The address is preset to 0 (HEX), can be changed via Busmaster or programming device
fr - Raccordement AS-i-Bus L'adresse est préréglée sur 0 (HEX) et modifiable via le maître bus ou l'appareil de
programmation
es - Conexiones AS-i-Bus La dirección está preajustada a 0 (HEX) y puede modificarse mediante el Busmaster o el
aparato de programación
it - Collegamento AS-i-Bus L'indirizzo è preimpostato su 0 e può essere modificato tramite il Busmaster o lo strumento
nl - Aansluiting AS-i-Bus di programmazione
Het adres is default 0 (HEX) en kan worden gewijzigd via de Busmaster of programmeereenheid
Datenbit: Parameterbits (P0...P3) werden nicht verwendet /

Data bit: Parameter bits (P0...P3) are not used /
Bit d’information : les bits de paramètres (P0...P3) ne sont pas employés /
Bit de datos: El pedacito del parámetro (P0...P3) no se utiliza /
Bit di dati: I bit di parametro (P0 a P3) non sono utilizzati /
Databit: parameterbits (P0...P3) worden niet gebruikt
D0:1 D1:1 Status gut

Status good
Statut bon
Estado bueno
Condizione buon
AS-i + Status goed
2 1
D0:0 D1:0 Status Störung
Status Fault
Statut Défaut
3 4
Estado Fallo
AS-i – Condizione Guasto
Status Storing
1: BN D2 und D3 werden nicht verwendet / D2 and D3 are not used /

D2 et D3 ne sont pas employés / D2 y D3 no se utilizan /
3: BU D2 e D3 non sono usati / D2 en D3 worden niet gebruikt
24 Endress+Hauser
de - Test
Sie müssen sicherstellen, dass keine gefährlichen Prozesse mit Prüfmagnet
an der Anlage ausgelöst werden /
You must ensure that no hazardous processes on the system en - Test
are triggered / with test magnet
Vous devez vous assurer qu’aucun processus dangereux n’est
déclenché sur l’installation / fr - Test
Deberá asegurarse de que no pueda activarse ningún proceso avec aimant de contrôle
peligroso en la instalación / es - Comprobación
Assicurarsi che non si generino processi pericolosi
nell'impianto / prueba magnética
Zorg ervoor dat er geen gevaarlijke processen in de installatie it - Test
worden gestart
con magnete di prova
nl - Test
1. 2.
MAX met testmagneet
–>
gn ye gn ye
1. 2.
MIN
–>
gn ye gn ye
AS-i:
MAX D0 wird invertiert /
1. 2. D0 is inverted /
D0 est inversé /
MIN D0 se invierte /
–> D0 è invertito /
gn rd gn rd D0 is omgekeerd
Endress+Hauser 25
de - Reinigung
en - Cleaning
CIP, SIP
fr - Nettoyage
es - Limpieza
it - Pulizia
nl - Reiniging
150 °C (300 °F)
26 Endress+Hauser
de - Technische Daten
Abmessungen in mm
en - Technical Data
Dimensions in mm
30 40
fr - Caractéristiques techniques
Dimensions en mm
es - Datos técnicos
ø40 Dimensiones en mm
it - Dati tecnici
Dimensioni in mm
ø31.5 ø31.5
nl - Technische gegevens
184.5
Afmetingen in mm
173
SW 32 SW 32
26.2–0.6
26.2–0.6
38.2–0.4
38.2–0.4
ø17.1 ø17.1
G G
Endress+Hauser 27
de - Umgebungstemperatur TU
Betriebstemperatur TB TU
°C Imax 250 mA
Betriebsdruck pe
70 Imax 150 mA
en - Ambient temperature TU TU
Operating temperature TB 50
Operating pressure pe
fr - Température ambianteTU TB TB
Température de service TB 0
–40 0 50 100 150 °C
Pression de service pe
–25 AS-i
es - Temperatura ambiente TU –40
Temperatura de trabajo TB
Presión de trabajo pe bar
pe = max. 40 bar
it - Temperatura ambiente TU Prozessanschluss
Temperatura d’esercizio TB Process connection
Pressione d’esercizio pe Raccord processus
TB Conexión a proceso
nl - Omgevingstemperatuur TU Attacco al processo
Procestemperatuur TB Procesaansuluiting
Procesdruk pe
Dichte r Viskosität n
Density r Viscosity n
Densité r 0.7 Viscosité n
Densidad r kg Viscosidad n
x °C = (1. 8x + 32) °F 1l
Densità r Viscosità n n max. 10000 mm²/s
1 bar = 14.5 psi
Dichtheid r r min. 0.7 Viskositeit n (n max. 10000 cSt)
100 mm = 3.94 in
28 Endress+Hauser
de - Zubehör
Einschweißmuffe / Weld-in socket / Manchon à souder / Ersatzteile
Manguito soldado / Attacco a saldare / Inlassok
Abmessungen in mm
26.1 –0.2 en - Accessories
G¾
52018765
Spare parts
21
Dimensions in mm
fr - Accessoires
Pièces de rechange
Dimensions en mm
ø32.2 –0.4
ø50 –0.4
ISO 228
G¾
es - Accesorios
Repuestos
Dimensiones en mm
it - Accessori
Ricambi
G1 29.6 Dimensioni in mm
52001051 24.6 nl - Toebehoren
Reserve-onderdelen
Afmetingen in mm
ø60 –0.4
ISO 228
ø41
G1
100 mm = 3.94 in
Endress+Hauser 29
de - Zubehör
Ersatzteile Einschweißadapter / Weld-in adapter / Adaptateur à souder /
Adaptor soldado / Adattatore a saldare / Inlasadapter
Abmessungen in mm
en - Accessories
52001047 4.5
Spare parts
Dimensions in mm
fr - Accessoires
Pièces de rechange
RD 52 x 1/6
Dimensions en mm
ø42.3
es - Accesorios
ø65
Repuestos
Dimensiones en mm
it - Accessori
Ricambi
Dimensioni in mm
~26
nl - Toebehoren
Reserve-onderdelen
Kabel / Cable / câble / cable / cavo / kabel
Afmetingen in mm
4x0.34 1.) 2.)
1.) M12 gewinkelt / M12, angled / M12 coudé /

M12, acodado / ad angolo M12 / M12 haaks
52010285
2.) mit Dose M12 (+LED) / with M12 socket (+LED) /
avec boîtier M12 (+ LED) / con caja M12 (+LED) /
con attacco M12 (+LED) / met aansluiting (+LED)
52018763
30 Endress+Hauser
de - Zubehör
FPM-O-Ring für Einschweißmuffe / Ersatzteile
FPM O-ring for weld-in socket / Dichtungen
Joint torique FPM pour manchon à souder /
Junta en FPM para manguito soldado / en - Accessories
O-ring in FPM per attacco a saldare / Spare parts
FPM O-ring voor inlasadapter Seals
G¾ fr - Accessoires
52018765 Pièces de rechange
G1 Joints
52001051 es - Accesorios
Repuestos
Juntas
MVQ-Dichtung für Prozessanschluss 1" /
it - Accessori
MVQ seal for process connection 1" /
Joint MVQ pour raccord processus 1'' / Ricambi
Sello en MVQ para conexión a proceso 1" / Guarnizioni
Guarnizione in MVQ per attacco al processo 1" /
MVQ-afdichting voor procesaansluiting 1" nl - Toebehoren
Reserve-onderdelen
942816-0000 Afdichtingen
Endress+Hauser 31
de - Zubehör
Ersatzteile Steckschlüssel SW 32 für Prozessanschluss /
Socket spanner 32 AF for process connection /
Für Montage und Test Clé de 32 pour raccord processus /
en - Accessories Llave de fijación SW 32 para conexión a proceso /
Chiave a tubo 32 per attacco al processo /
Spare parts Pijpsleutel SW 32 voor procesaansluiting
For mounting and test
fr - Accessoires 52010156
Pièces de rechange
SW 32
Pour montage et test
es - Accesorios
Repuestos
Para montaje y comprobación
it - Accessori
Ricambi
Di montaggio e verifica
nl - Toebehoren Prüfmagnet /
Test magnet /
Reserve-onderdelen
Aimant de contrôle /
Voor montage en test Imán /
Magnete di prova /
Testmagneet
N TEST
52013204
32 Endress+Hauser
Varianten AC- und DC-PNP mit Ventilstecker de - Fehlersuche
Fehlfunktion Ursache Maßnahme
Grünes Licht Keine Spannungsversorgung Stecker, Kabel und Spannungsversorgung
leuchtet nicht prüfen
Rotes Licht blinkt Überlast oder Kurzschluss im Laststromkreis Kurzschluss beheben
Maximalen Laststrom auf unter 250 mA
reduzieren
Interner Sensorfehler oder Sensor korrodiert Gerät austauschen
Varianten AS-i und DC-PNP mit M12x1 Stecker

Fehlfunktion Ursache Maßnahme
Rotes Licht Adresse 0 eingestellt oder Kommunikations- Adressierung durchführen
leuchtet (AS-i) fehler Slave projektieren
Ggf. Leitungslänge reduzieren
(< 100 m Gesamtlänge)
Rotes Licht Überlast oder Kurzschluss im Laststromkreis Kurzschluss beheben
leuchtet Maximalen Laststrom auf unter 250 mA
(DC-PNP) reduzieren
Grünes Licht Keine Spannungsversorgung Stecker, Kabel und Spannungsversorgung
leuchtet nicht prüfen
Rotes Licht blinkt Interner Sensorfehler oder Sensor korrodiert Gerät austauschen
(2 Hz)
Endress+Hauser 33
en - Trouble-shooting AC and DC-PNP versions with valve plug
Fault Reason Remedy
Green light No voltage supply Check plug, cable and voltage supply
does not light up
Red light flashes Overload or short-circuit in the load-current Rectify short-circuit
circuit Reduce maximum load current to under
250 mA
Internal sensor error or sensor corroded Replace device
AS-i and DC-PNP versions with M12x1 plug

Fault Reason Remedy
Red light lights up Address 0 set or communication error Carry out addressing
(AS-i) Configure slave
If necessary, reduce cable length
(< 100 m total length)
Red light lights up Overload or short-circuit in the load-current Rectify short-circuit
(DC-PNP) circuit Reduce maximum load current to under
250 mA
Green light No voltage supply Check plug, cable and voltage supply
does not light up
Red light flashes Internal sensor error or sensor corroded Replace device
(2 Hz)
34 Endress+Hauser
Variantes AC et DC-PNP pour prise de valve fr - Recherche de défauts
Défaut Cause Mesure
Le témoin vert Pas de tension d'alimentation Vérifier la prise, le câble et l'alimentation
n'est pas allumé en tension
Le témoin rouge Surcharge ou court-circuit dans le cirucit Eliminer le court-circuit
clignote de courant de charge Réduire le courant de charge maximal à
moins de 250 mA
Défaut interne de capteur ou Remplacer l'appareil
capteur corrodé
Variantes AS-i et DC-PNP avec prise M12x1

Défaut Cause Mesure
Le témoin rouge Adresse 0 paramétrée ou défaut de Exécuter l'adressage
est allumé (AS-i) communication Configurer l'esclave
Réduire le cas échéant la longeur de câble
(< 100 m de longueur totale)
Le témoin rouge Surcharge ou court-circuit dans le cirucit Eliminer le court-circuit
est allumé de courant de charge Réduire le courant de charge maximal à
(DC-PNP) moins de 250 mA
Le témoin vert Pas de tension d'alimentation Vérifier la prise, le câble et l'alimentation
n'est pas allumé en tension
Le témoin rouge Défaut interne de capteur ou Remplacer l'appareil
clignote (2 Hz) capteur corrodé
Endress+Hauser 35
es - Identificación de fallos Variantes AC y DC-PNP con enchufe de válvula
Fallo Causa Solución
La luz verde No hay suministro de tensión Comprobar enchufe, cable y suministro
no se enciende de tensión
La luz roja Sobrecarga o cortocircuito en la corriente Subsanar el cortocircuito
parpadea de carga Reducir la corriente de carga por debajo
de 250 mA
Error interno del sensor o sensor corroído Sustituir el aparato
Variantes AS-i y DC-PNP con enchufe M12x1

Fallo Causa Solución
La luz roja Dirección 0 ajustada o error Efectuar direccionamiento
se enciende de comunicación Proyectar esclavo
(AS-i)
Reducir longitud del cable
(< 100 m longitud total)
La luz roja Sobrecarga o cortocircuito en la corriente Subsanar el cortocircuito
se enciende de carga Reducir la corriente de carga por debajo
(DC-PNP) de 250 mA
La luz verde No hay suministro de tensión Comprobar enchufe, cable y suministro
no se enciende de tensión
La luz roja Error interno del sensor o sensor corroído Sustituir el aparato
parpadea (2 Hz)
36 Endress+Hauser
Varianti CA e CC-PNP con connettore valvola
it - Individuazione e
Guasto Motivo Rimedio eliminazione delle anomalie
La luce verde Nessuna alimentazione Controllare le spine, i cavi e
non si accende l'alimentazione
La luce rossa Sovraccarico o cortocircuito nel circuito Eliminare il cortocircuito
lampeggia della corrente di carico Ridurre la corrente di carico massimo
al di sotto di 250 mA
Guasto interno al sensore o corrosione Sostituire lo strumento
del sensore
Varianti AS-i e CC-PNP con spina M12x1

Guasto Motivo Rimedio
La luce rossa Impostato indirizzo 0 oppure errore di Assegnazione indirizzo
è accesa (As-i) comunicazione Registrazione slave
Ev. ridurre la lunghezza della linea
(< 100 m lunghezza totale)
La luce rossa Sovraccarico o cortocircuito nel circuito Eliminare il cortocircuito
è accesa della corrente di carico Ridurre la corrente di carico massimo
(CC-PNP) al di sotto di 250 mA
La luce verde Nessuna alimentazione Controllare le spine, i cavi e
non si accende l'alimentazione
La luce rossa Guasto interno al sensore o corrosione Sostituire lo strumento
lampeggia (2 Hz) del sensore
Endress+Hauser 37
nl - Fout zoeken Varianten AC- en DC-PNP met klepstop
Fout Oorzaak Maatregel
Groene lampje Geen voedingsspanning Steker, kabel en voedingsspanning
brandt niet controleren
Rode lampje Overbelasting of kortsluiting in Kortsluiting opheffen
knippert laststroomkring Maximale belastingsstroom reduceren tot
onder 250 mA
Interne sensorstoring of sensor gecorrodeerd Instrument vervangen
Varianten AS-i en DC-PNP met M12x1 stop

Fout Oorzaak Maatregel
Rode lampje Adres 0 ingesteld, of communicatiefout Adressering uitvoeren
gaat aan (AS-i) Slave projecteren
Indien nodig kabellengte inkorten
(< 100 m totale lengte)
Rode lampje Overbelasting of kortsluiting in Kortsluiting opheffen
gaat aan laststroomkring Maximale belastingsstroom reduceren tot
(DC-PNP) onder 250 mA
Groene lampje Geen voedingsspanning Steker, kabel en voedingsspanning
brandt niet controleren
Rood lampje Interne sensorstoring of sensor gecorrodeerd Instrument vervangen
knippert (2 Hz)
38 Endress+Hauser
Technische Information / Technical Information / Information technique / de - Ergänzende
Información técnica / Informazioni tecniche / Technische Informatie Dokumentation
TI375F en - Supplementary
Documentation
fr - Documentation
Betriebsanleitung / Operating Instructions / Mise en service / Instrucciones complémentaire
de funcionamiento / Istruzioni operative / Inbedrijfstellingsvoorschrift es - Documentación
KA186F Pg11 adicional
KA187F NPT ½“ it - Documentazione
supplementare
KA188F QUICKON
nl - Aanvullende
documentatie
Zertifikat / Certificate / Certificat / Certificado / Certificato / Certificaat
ZE247F (WHG)
Allgemeine bauaufsichtliche Zulassung Z-65.11-311
ZE248F (WHG, Leckage)
Allgemeine bauaufsichtliche Zulassung Z-65.40-312
ZE249F (As-interface)
Nummer / Number / Numéro / Número / Numero / Nr. : 37102
ZE250F (CSA General Purpose, C+US)
Nummer / Number / Numéro / Número / Numero / Nr. : 1238461
–> www.endress.com/ftl20
Endress+Hauser 39
www.endress.com/worldwide
KA214F/00/a6/07.04, 52019486, CCS/FM6 52019486

ELECTROVANNE 2/2 NF
2 VOIES A COMMANDE ASSISTEE
A MEMBRANE
SOLENOID VALVE 2/2 NC
2 WAYS PRESSURE ASSISTED
WITH MEMBRANE
TYPE 21260
Construction INOX 316L / AISI 316L
SPECIFICATIONS TECHNIQUES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fluides admis : air - eau - gaz - huile légère Media: air - water - gas - light oil
Pression différentielle : 0.3 à 10 bar maxi Pressure range : 0.3 to 10 bar max
Température du fluide : 100° C maxi Media temperature : 100° C max
Température ambiante : -10° à +50° C maxi Ambient temperature : -10° to +50° C max
Viscosité : 40 centistokes maxi Media viscosity : 40 centistokes max
Position de fonctionnement : indifférente Mounting : any position
Cycle de fonctionnement : 1 cycle par minute Cycle range : 1/mn
Poids (avec bobine) : 800 g Weight (including coil) : 800 g
Temps d’ouverture ou fermeture: 50 millisecondes maxi Opening or closing time : 50 milliseconds maximum
PRESSION
PRESSURE
.
Pression / Pressure (bar)
Codification pour commande
  passage Fluid
air - gaz / air - gas Voir tableau des codifications
Raccord (mm) Kv Etanchéité temp.
eau - huile / water - oil Code to order
 Port  seat L/mn seals Max
mini See table of references
(mm) °C
CA/AC CC/DC CA/AC CC/DC
NBR 60° 21260+100381+voltage+option

3/8 GAZ
12 30 0.3 10 10 10 10 EPDM 100° 21260+300381+voltage+option
3/8 BSP
FKM 100° 21260+200381+voltage+option
NBR 60° 21260+100121+voltage+option
1/2 GAZ
12 30 0.3 10 10 10 10 EPDM 100° 21260+300121+voltage+option
1/2 BSP
FKM 100° 21260+200121+voltage+option
CARACTERISTIQUES ELECTRIQUES
ELECTRICAL DATA
Puissance / Power Classe Raccord
Tension / voltage (-10% + 15%) Degré de
Taille d’isolation électrique
Durée d’enclenchement 100% protection
Size A l’appel Au maintien Insulation Electrical
Continuous duty 100% Inrush Holding Enclosure
class connections
IP 65 3 fiches
 12-24-48-110-230 (50 ou/or 60 Hz) 26 VA 14 VA avec 3 spades
30 F 155°C connecteur DIN 43650
with DIN 40050
= 12-24-48 10 W connector VDE 0110
C2AI – Parc des Pivolles – 9, rue de Catalogne 69153 Décines cedex

Tél. : 04 72 15 88 70 - Fax : 04 78 26 41 35
ELECTROVANNE 2/2 NF
2 VOIES A COMMANDE ASSISTEE A MEMBRANE
SOLENOID VALVE 2/2 NC
2 WAYS PRESSURE ASSISTED WITH MEMBRANE
TYPE 21260
Construction INOX 316L / AISI 316L
ENCOMBREMENT
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION
Corps, tube et pièces internes : acier inoxydable Body, tube and internal parts : stainless steel
Joints, clapets et membrane : NBR ou EPDM ou FKM Seals, gaskets and membrane : NBR or EPDM or FKM
Bobine surmoulée : Polyamide Moulded coil : Polyamide
OPTIONS
OPTIONS
Connecteur PG9 – DIN 43650 A Connector PG9 – DIN 43650 A

Capot anti-déflagrant : mode de protection II 2 G/D Explosion proof enclosure: protection II 2 G/D
EEx d IIC T6 suivant ATEX EEx d IIC T6 according to ATEX
KITS DE MAINTENANCE
REPAIR KIT
Désignation Codification pour commande

designation Code to order
Bobine Voir tableau des codifications bobines
Coil See table of coils references
Noyau équipé + joints + membrane KIT21260 + matière d’étanchéité
Complete plunger + O’rings + membrane KIT21260 + seals material
C2AI – Parc des Pivolles – 9, rue de Catalogne 69153 Décines cedex

Tél. : 04 72 15 88 70 - Fax : 04 78 26 41 35
0255
2/2-way Solenoid Valve

for high pressures and temperatures
• Seat valve, direct-acting

• Pressure range up to 100 bar
• Media temperature up to 250 °C
• Push-over solenoid system
• For gases and fluids
Type 0255 can be combined with...
Type 2508 Type 1078 Type 2511

Cable plug Timer unit ASI cable plug
The direct-acting plunger solenoid valve

Technical data
Type 0255 is also suitable for high pressures
Orifice DN 1.0 - 6.0 mm
and high temperatures.
Body material Brass with stainless steel seat 1.4305
or stainless steel body 1.4581
Circuit function A Coil material Epoxy
Coil insulation class H
2/2-way valve, normally Seal material FKM, PTFE
closed by spring force (others on request)
Media
FKM Hot air, hot oils, oils with additives,
per-solutions
PTFE Water, steam, fuels, hydraulic materials, alcohol,
organic solvents, waste gas
Media temperature
FKM -10 to +130 °C
PTFE -40 to +180 °C
Steel Up to + 250 °C (on request)
Viscosity Max. 21 mm2/s
Ambient temperature Max. + 55°C (250 °C on request),
please see ordering chart
Voltage tolerance ± 10%
Duty cycle 100% continuous rating
Electrical connection Cable plug for Ø 7 mm cable, acc. to DIN EN
175301-803 Form A (supplied as standard)
Protection class IP 65 with cable plug
Weight [kg] 0.6 (brass version)
Installation As required, preferably with actuator upright
Power consumption Response times

Inrush Hold (hot coil) 1) Orifice [mm] Opening [ms] Closing [ms]
AC [VA] AC [VA/W] DC [W] AC DC AC DC
35-40 16/10 approx.12 (13) 1.0-6.0 10-20 20-80 20-30 20-30
1)
value in brackets at coil temperature 20 ºC
www.burkert.com p. 1/4
0255
Materials
Locknut: Steel (thick-film passivated acc. to Rohs)
Coil: Epoxy
Stopper: 1.4105
Shading ring: Copper (MS version) only AC
Silver (SS version) only AC
Spring: 1.4310
Guide tube: 1.4571
Plunger: 1.4105
Hexagon nut: 1.4401 or 1.4571
Seal: FKM, PTFE
Valve Seat: 1.4305 or 1.4112 (only brass body)
Body: Brass or stainless steel 1.4581
Mounting set
M5 x 35
• 2 M5 x 35 cheesehead screws
• 1 mounting bracket
Valve mounted using mounting kit

Refer to the dimensional drawings for the valve
37 mm separation between the M5 threaded holes

48 mm separation between the Ø7 bores Item no. 151 287
(only for brass body versions)

Mounting set for stainless steel versions on request
p. 2/4
0255
Ordering chart for valves (other versions on request)

All valves with brass body and stainless steel seat or stainless steel body with cable plug included
2)
Pressure range [bar]
1)
Port connection
Circuit function
Item no. per voltage/frequency [V/Hz]
Kv value water
DC AC
Orifice [mm]
for gases
for gases
material
024/DC
024/50
110/50
230/50
liquids
liquids
[m3/h]
Seal
and
for
A Brass body
G 1/4 1.0 0.03 0-100 0-100 0-100 PTFE 058 360 020 755 – 067 692
2.0 0.12 0-20 0-60 0-35 FKM 089 888 020 033 020101 064 119
3.0 0.25 0-10 0-25 0-16 PTFE 052 872 058 421 058 888 046 865
2/2-way valve NC 4.0 0.5 0-4 0-12 0-10 PTFE 058 796 065 454 023 897 053 188
5.0 0.65 0-2 0-7 0-6 PTFE 020 164 049 194 049 830 050 879
5.0 0.65 0-2 0-7 0-6 FKM – – – 052 424
G 3/8 4.0 0.5 0-4 0-12 0-10 PTFE 065 438 059 100 046 886 051 143
5.0 0.65 – 0-16 0-6 FKM – 022 551 – 025 885
5.0 0.65 0-2 0-7 0-6 PTFE 020 664 057 644 023 581 050 880
6.0 0.8 0-1 0-5 0-4 PTFE 053 764 050 389 066 222 051 324
G 1/23) 4.0 0.5 0-4 0-12 0-10 PTFE 089 404 – 089 403 076 551
6.0 0.8 0-1 0-5 0-4 FKM 135 958 135 959 135 947 135 950
Stainless steel body
G 1/43) 1.0 0.03 0-100 0-100 0-100 PTFE 018 004 078 420 – 019 862
3.0 0.25 0-10 0-25 0-16 PTFE 021 554 018 593 – 061 010
4.0 0.5 0-4 0-12 0-10 PTFE 021 251 020 468 – 023 279
5.0 0.65 0-2 0-7 0-6 PTFE 125 097 019 991 086 924 025 250
G 1/23) 3.0 0.25 0-10 0-25 0-16 PTFE 019 204 059 254 – 055 506
4.0 0.5 0-4 0-12 0-10 PTFE 065 684 066 932 – 054 473
6.0 0.8 0-1 0-5 0-4 FKM 022 504 052 859 067 990 054 811
1)
Flow rate; Kv value water [m3/h] measured at +20°C, 1 bar pressure at valve inlet and free outlet
2)
Pressure valves [bar]; gauge pressures with respect to the prevailing atmosphere pressure (the pressure rates for liquids are specified on the type plate)
3)
All versions with mounting bracket included
i Further versions on request

Approvals
UL, UR, CSA, ATEX, CGA/AGA
Temperature
High temperature version up to 250 ºC
Materials
Seal material EPDM, NBR
Analytical
Silicon, oil and fat-free version for oxygen

Pressure
BAR High performance version with high power
electronic for higher pressures.
p. 3/4
0255
Dimensions [mm]
Stainless steel version
Brass version
48
40 45.5 29
108.5 (with G1/2)
105 (with G1/4)
105
ø 6.3
ø7
16
25
D 37
74.5
35 56
with port connection G 1/2 with port connection G 1/4, G 3/8

(without mounting bracket)
To find your nearest Bürkert facility, click on the orange box www.burkert.com
In case of special application conditions, Subject to alterations

please consult for advice. © Christian Bürkert GmbH & Co. KG 0809/3_EU-en_00891614
p. 4/4
Type 0255 / 0355
2/2- and 3/2-way solenoid valve
2/2- und 3/2-Wege-Magnetventil
Électrovanne 2/2 et 3/2 voies
Bedienungsanleitung
Manuel d‘utilisation
Bürkert Fluid Control Systems

Sales Center
Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17
D-74653 Ingelfingen
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448
E-mail: info@de.buerkert.com
International address
www.burkert.com
Manuals and data sheets on the Internet: www.burkert.com
Bedienungsanleitungen und Datenblätter im Internet: www.buerkert.de
Manuel d'utilisation et fiches techniques sur Internet : www.buerkert.fr
© Bürkert Werke GmbH, 2014

Operating Instructions 1404/04_EU-ML_00893044 / Original DE
www.burkert.com
Type 0255 / 0355
1 Operating instructions 2 Intended use
The operating instructions contain important information. Incorrect use of the solenoid valve Type 0255 / 0355 can be
▶▶ Read the operating instructions carefully and follow the safety instruc- dangerous to people, nearby equipment and the environment.
tions in particular, and also observe the operating conditions. ▶▶ The device is designed to control, shut off and meter neutral media up
▶▶ Operating instructions must be available to each user. to a viscosity of 21 mm2/s.
▶▶ The liability and warranty for the device are void if the operating instruc- ▶▶ Provided the cable plug is connected and installed correctly, e.g. Bürk-
tions are not followed. ert Type 2508, the device satisfies protection class IP65 in accordance
with DIN EN 60529 / IEC 60529.
1.1 Symbols ▶▶ Use according to the permitted data, operating conditions and con-
▶▶ Designates an instruction to prevent risks. ditions of use specified in the contract documents and operating
instructions.
→→designates a procedure which you must carry out. ▶▶ Correct transportation, correct storage and installation and careful use
Warning of injuries: and maintenance are essential for reliable and problem-free operation.
Danger! ▶▶ Use the device only as intended.
Imminent danger! Serious or fatal injuries.
Warning! 2.1 Definition of term
Potential danger! Serious or fatal injuries.
Caution! In these operating instructions, the term “device” always refers to the
Danger! Minor or moderately severe injuries. solenoid valve Type 0255 and 0355.
Warns of damage to property:

Note!
2 english
3 Basic safety instructions Risk of injury due to malfunction of valves with alternating
These safety instructions do not make allowance for any contingencies▶ current (AC)!
and events which may arise during installation, operation and maintenance. Sticking core causes coil to overheat, resulting in a malfunction.
▶▶ Monitor process to ensure function is in perfect working order!
Risk of short-circuit/escape of media through leaking screw joints!
Danger – high pressure! ▶▶ Ensure seals are seated correctly.
▶▶ Before loosening the lines and valves, turn off the pressure and vent ▶▶ Carefully screw valve and connection lines together.
the lines.
Risk of electric shock!
▶▶ Before reaching into the system, switch off the power supply and
secure to prevent reactivation! General hazardous situations.
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for To prevent injury, ensure that:
electrical equipment! ▶▶ Do not make any internal or external changes. Ensure that the system
cannot be activated unintentionally.
Risk of burns/Risk of fire if used continuously through hot device
▶▶ Installation and repair work may be carried out by authorized techni-
surface!
cians only and with the appropriate tools.
▶▶ Keep the device away from highly flammable substances and media
▶▶ After an interruption in the power supply or pneumatic supply, ensure
and do not touch with bare hands.
that the process is restarted in a defined or controlled manner.
▶▶ Do not put any loads on the body.
▶▶ The general rules of technology apply to application planning and
operation of the device.
english 3
3.1 Warranty 4 Technical data

The warranty is only valid if the device is used as intended in accordance
4.1 Operating conditions
with the specified application conditions.
The following values are indicated on the type label:
3.2 Information on the internet • Voltage (Tolerance ± 10 %) / Current type
The operating instructions and data sheets for type 0255 / 0355 can be • Coil power consumption (active power in W - at operating
found on the internet at: temperature)
www.burkert.com Type 0255, 0355 • Pressure range
• Body material: Brass (MS), Stainless steel (VA)
• Sealing material: FKM, EPDM, NBR, PTFE, Steel
Circuit function Type 0255:

A
A 2/2-way valve; closed in rest position

P
Circuit function Type 0355:

A
3/2-way valve; closed in rest position,
C
P R
output A unloaded
4 english
Type 0255 / 0355
A Service life High switching frequency and high pressures
3/2-way valve; in rest position output A reduce the service life
D
P R
pressurized
4.2.1 Permitted temperature
A 3/2-way valve; in rest position, Permitted temperature depending on coil material and sealing material:
E pressure connection P2 connected to
P1 P2 output A. P1 closed Coil material Sealing material Medium
temperature
4.2 Application conditions Epoxy, ▶ NBR -10 - +90 °C
Ambient temperature Standard: max. +55 °C▶ Metal1) FKM -10 - +130 °C
High temperature: max. +250 °C
Protection class IP65 in accordance with DIN EN 60529 / EPDM -40 - +130 °C
IEC 60529 with cable plug, e.g. Bürkert Type PTFE -40 - +180 °C
2508 or cable design
Steel -40 - +180 °C
Operating duration Unless otherwise indicated on the type label,
Metal 2)
Steel -40 - +250 °C
the solenoid system is suitable for con-
tinuous operation Coil with electronic3) max. +90 °C
Important information for functional reliability during continuous 1)
Coil with metal housing and copper wire winding
operation: If standstill for a long period at least 1-2 activations 2)
Coil with metal housing and aluminum wire winding
per day are recommended. 3)
Switching frequency: max. 6 switching operations/min
english 5
4.2.2 Permitted media 4.4 Standards

Permitted media depending on sealing material The applied standards, which verify conformity with the EC Directives,
can be found on the EC-Type Examination Certificate and / or the EC
Sealing
Permitted media Declaration of Conformity.
material
NBR Neutral media, such as compressed air, 4.5 Type label
water, hydraulic fluid, oils and greases without Orifice
additives
Sealing material
FKM Oxygen4) , hot air, hot oils, oils with additives, Circuit▶
per solutions function
Type Body material
EPDM Oil and grease-free media, e.g. hot water,
alkaline suds and bleaching lyes 0255 A 4,0 FKM MS
Made in Germany
PTFE, Steel Water, steam, organic solvents, oils, fuel, G1/4 P N 0 - 10 bar Connection thread, Operating
230V 50 Hz 10 W pressure
alcohol, hydraulic substances
Voltage, Frequency, ▶
4)
for special design only 00135952 W12MN Power consumption
Id.-Number
4.3 Conformity Manufacturer code
In accordance with the EC Declaration of conformity, Type 0255 / 0355
is compliant with the EC Directives.
6 english
5 Installation 5.2 Before installation

Installation position: any, actuator preferably upwards.
5.1 Safety instructions
Procedure:
Danger!
→→Check pipelines for dirt and clean.
Risk of injury from high pressure in the equipment! →→Install a dirt filter before the valve inlet (≤ 500 µm).
▶▶ Before loosening the pipes and valves, turn off the pressure and vent
the lines. 5.3 Installation
Risk of injury due to electrical shock! Note!
▶▶ Before reaching into the device or the equipment, switch off the power
supply and secure to prevent reactivation. Caution risk of breakage!
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for • Do not use the coil as a lever arm.
electrical equipment.
→→Hold the device with a open-end wrench on the body and screw
Warning! into the pipeline.
Risk of injury from improper installation!
Valve body must not be installed under tension.
▶▶ Installation may be carried out by authorized technicians only and with
the appropriate tools.
Risk of injury from unintentional activation of the system and an →→Observe direction of flow:▶
uncontrolled restart! The arrow on the body indicates the direction of flow.
▶▶ Secure system from unintentional activation.
▶▶ Following assembly, ensure a controlled restart.
english 7
Type 0255 / 0355
5.4 Electrical connection of the cable plug Seal▶
(ensure position
Warning! is correct)
Authorized cable plug ▶
Risk of injury due to electrical shock! e.g. Type 2508 or other suitable
▶▶ Before reaching into the system, switch off the power supply and cable plug in accordance with ▶
secure to prevent reactivation. DIN EN 175301-803 Form A
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for max. 1 Nm
electrical equipment.
If the protective conductor is not connected, there is a risk of electric
shock!
▶▶ Always connect protective conductor and check electrical continuity.
Note the voltage and current type as specified on the label.
Procedure:
→→Tighten cable plug (for permitted types see data sheet), observing
max. torque 1 Nm.
→→Check that seal is fitted correctly.
→→Connect protective conductor and check electrical continuity.
8 english
6 Maintenance, Troubleshooting • adequately high power supply is applied.
6.1 Safety instructions

Malfunction Possible cause
Warning!
Valve does not switch Short-circuit or coil interrupted
Risk of injury from improper maintenance!
▶▶ Maintenance may be carried out by authorized technicians only and Inadequate power supply
with the appropriate tools!
Risk of injury from unintentional activation of the system and an
uncontrolled restart! Core / core area is dirty
▶▶ Secure system from unintentional activation. Medium pressure outside the permitted
▶▶ Following maintenance, ensure a controlled restart. pressure range
6.2 Malfunctions
Valve does not close Internal space of the valve is dirty
If malfunctions occur, check whether:
• the device has been installed according to the instructions,
• the electrical and fluid connections are correct,
• the device is not damaged,
• all screws have been tightened,
• the voltage and pressure have been switched on,
• the pipelines are clean,
english 9
7 Spare Parts 7.2 Overview of spare parts

Caution! Type 0255 Type 0355
Risk of injury and/or damage by the use of incorrect parts!

Incorrect accessories and unsuitable spare parts may cause injuries and
damage the device and the surrounding area. 1
1
▶▶ Use only original accessories and original spare parts from Bürkert.
7.1 Ordering spare parts

Order the spare-part sets specifying the positions (Pos. 1: Coil set,
Pos. 2: Wearing parts set) and the identification number of the device.
10 english
Type 0255 / 0355
8 Transport, Storage, Disposal
Note!
Transport damages!
Inadequately protected equipment may be damaged during
transport.
• During transportation protect the device against wet and dirt in
shock-resistant packaging.
• Avoid exceeding or dropping below the allowable storage
temperature.
Incorrect storage may damage the device.
• Store the device in a dry and dust-free location!
• Storage temperature -40 - +80 °C.
Damage to the environment caused by device components con-
taminated with media.
• Dispose of the device and packaging in an environmentally friendly
manner.
• Observe applicable regulations on disposal and the environment.
english 11
D9ed1 IT/UK - installazione 29-04-2008 15:32 Pagina 5
DIN rail mounting

E 2 channels data
S E R I E S
acquisition module
D9 line
ASCON spa
D9 line c
ISO 9 0 0 1 Installation manual • M.I. D9-3/08.04 • Cod. J30-658-1AD9 IE
Installation C e r t i f i e d
C
UL US
manual LISTED
Table of contents
- General description
- Model code
- Electric safety
- Installation kit ASCON spa
Via Falzarego 9/11
- Installation 20021 Baranzate
(Milano) Italy
- Remove/insert the module in its Tel. +39 02 333 371
housing Fax +39 02 350 4243
http://www.ascon.it
- Electrical connections e-mail support@ascon.it
General description
Simplified assembly and 1 DIN-rail, EN60022 6 Female connector, with termination Easy to replace
connection 2 Spring loaded slide for rail fastening resistor for serial communications even if powered
5
3 Side connector, build-in, to connect one 7 Four Output status leds (red)
instrument to another (up to 31) 8 Green Status led: 9
10 4 5-pole male connector, with screw ter- - ON: power on
6 11
minals, for power supply and serial - flashing: serial communications
4
communications bus in progress
5 Four quick polarised connectors with 4 9 Couple of connector protections
screw terminals for I/O 10 Wiring label
11 Model identification label
7
Common power supply Withdrawable
8 4
3
1
2
Model code
Mod. D 9 5 B 5 0 - 0 F 0 0
Line Basic Accessories
The product code indicates the specific hardware configuration of

the instrument, that can be modified by specialized engineers only.
Line D 9
OP1-OP2 outputs B User manual F
Relay - Relay 1 Italian/English (std) 0
Relay - SSR drive 2 French/English 1
SSR drive - SSR drive 3 German/English 2
SSR - SSR 4 Spanish/English 3
SSR - SSR drive 5
c Notes on electric safety and electromagnetic compatibility Installation kit

Please, read carefully these instructions before proceeding with the installation of the instrument
Each set of interconnected controllers requires one
Class II instrument, rear panel mounting. It is important to understand that it’s responsibility of the model AD3-KIT/BA.RT.PC.CD kit:
installer to ensure the compliance of the regulations on safe-
This instrument has been designed in compliance with: Power supply and
ty requirements and EMC. Couple of con-
Regulations on electrical apparatus: serial comm.s
5
This controller has no user serviceable parts and requires special 4

nectors protec-
according to regulations on the essential protection connector
3
equipment and specialised engineers. Therefore, a repair can be 2

tions code
requirements in electrical apparatus EN 61010-1 code AD3/BA
1
hardly carried on directly by the user. For this purpose, the manu- AD3/PC
Regulations on Electromagnetic Compatibility:
facturer provides technical assistance and the repair service for its
according to: Connector with CD Rom with
Customers.
- Regulations on RF emissions: termination configuration
Please, contact your nearest Agent for further information.
EN61000-6-4 industrial environments; resistor for serial software tool
All the information and warnings about safety and electro-
- Regulation on RF immunity: magnetic compatibility are marked with the B sign, at communications code AD3/CD
EN61000-6-2 industrial equipment and system. the side of the note. code AD3/RT
1
Installation Remove/insert the module from/in its housing

Dimensions How to remove the module from the housing
22.5 mm 1 Insert the blade of a negative
0.89 in screwdriver under the I/O 3
polarised connectors;
99 mm 2 Moving the screwdriver as
indicated, unplug the connec-
3.9 in
114.5 mm tor from the module;
4.5 in 3 Remove the connector and
repeat these steps in order
to unplug all the external
connections;
6.3 mm
4 With the blade of the screw-
0.25 in driver, press the two slots
(at the top and bottom of the
Environmental condition B Suggestion module) in order to free the
T
I/O module from the housing;
Temperature 0...50 °C
Operating
conditions
%Rh Relative humidity 5...95% Rh non-condensing
T Temperature > 50 °C Use forced ventilation
Special
conditions %Rh > 95% RH Warm up
P Conducting atmosphere Use filter 5 Firmly grip the front panel in

the terminal block area and
Forbidden
condition C Corrosive atmosphere E Explosive atmosphere pull the module outside the
housing.
UL note: Operating surrounding temperature: 50°
Mounting on DIN rail (EN60022)

5
Mounting
1 Clip the upper part of the instru-
CLICK
ment on the rail; 2
1
2 Rotate the instrument downwards
until the click.
When 2 or more instruments are How to re-insert the I/O module in the housing
installed on the same DIN rail, con- 1 In order to correctly re-insert
nect the communications/ power the module in its housing,
bus sliding the instruments side by invert the previous extracting
side as explained in the following sequence, paying particular
attention in inserting the
paragraphs. printed circuit board in the
slots present at the top and
Disassembly bottom of the case.
Switch the instrument off
When 2 or more instruments are
installed on the same DIN rail, dis-
connect the communications/power
bus separating the selected instru-
ment from the others;
1 Lower the spring slide by insert-
ing a flat-blade screwdriver as 1
indicated; 2
2 Turn and lift the instrument
upwards.
Mounting several instruments (up to 31) side by side
1 After the mounting of instruments
on the rail, put them side by side
so that the male side connector 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
fits into the corresponding female

2 5 6 7 8 1 5 6 7 8 3
D9 D9
OP1 OP1
connector; OP2 OP2
OP3 OP3
2 After mounting all the instruments OP4

PWR
OP4
PWR
COM COM
side by side insert the female 5-

9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
pole connector with the termina- 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
tion resistor of the serial commu-

nications into the corresponding
50 mm
1.969 in
male connector;
50 mm
1.969 in
3 Wire the 5-pole male power supply

and serial communications connec- 4
tor and insert it in the correspon-
ding female connector; 1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
D9 D9 D9
4 When assembled insert the con- OP1 OP1 OP1
OP2 OP2 OP2
nectors protection on both sides. OP3 OP3 OP3
OP4 OP4 OP4
PWR PWR PWR
COM
9 10 11 12
COM
9 10 11 12
COM
9 10 11 12
3
13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
50 mm
1.969 in
Connectors protection
22.5 x N + 53 mm
2
Electrical connections B
Terminal connectors and plugs
4 terminal connectors OP1 OP2
A 1 2 3 4
A
RS 485
IC NO NO IC 5
OP3 OP4 4
B B 5 6 7 8 NC 3
24 V ~
N 2
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 C 9 10 11 12 L 1
B b A
D9 DI
RTD2
OP1 TC2
OP2 D 13 14 15 16
B b A
OP3
RTD1
OP4 TC1
Female plug with PWR
Male connector for
termination resistor for COM ADDRESS power supply and Features Terminal connector A-B-C-D Power supply and comm.s connector
serial communications 9 10 11 12
serial communications Flexible cable section: 0.2...2.5 mm2 (AWG24...AWG12) 0.08...1.5 mm2 (AWG28...AWG16)
bus 13 14 15 16 bus Stripped
L 7 mm - 0.28 in 7 mm - 0.28 in
wire
Flat blade
C screwdriver
0.6 x 3.5 mm 0.4 x 2.5 mm
Tightening
0.5...0.6 Nm 0.22...0.25 Nm
D torque
UL note: Use 60°C copper (Cu) conductor only.
Input
Isolated PV inputs: L-J-K-S-R-T-B-N-E-W thermocouple type Isolated PV inputs: for DC input mA, mV
C 9 10 11 12 D 13 14 15 16 C 9 10 11 12 D 13 14 15 16
External External
• Respect the polarity shown; shunt shunt
• To extend the connection, use always mA 2.5Ω mA 2.5Ω
compensation cable of the correct type mV mV
Line 150Ω max. for the thermocouple used;
• When present the shield must be con-
nected to a proper earth (at only one end). • Respect the polarity shown.
Isolated PV inputs: Pt100 resistance thermometer Isolated PV inputs: Pt100 resistance thermometer for ∆T
• If a 3 wires system is used, always measures (2 x Pt100) special
use cables of the same section (1mm2
Pt100 Pt100 min.)(max. resistance 20Ω/line); ∆T (2 x Pt100) ∆T (2 x Pt100)
• When using a 2 wires system, always
C 9 10 11 12 D 13 14 15 16 use cables of the same section (1.5mm2 C 9 10 11 12 D 13 14 15 16
min.) and put a jumper between termi-
nals 13 and 14;
B b A B b A A When the distance between the A B A A B A A When the distance between the
instrument and the sensor is 15 m,the instrument and the sensor is 15 m,the
R2 R1 R2 R1
use of a 1.5 mm2 section cable pro- use of a 1.5 mm2 section cable pro-
R1+R2<320Ω
duces a 1°C (1.8°F) measure error. duces a 1°C (1.8°F) measure error.
Digital input for external commands Digital inputs
NPN o.c. NPN o.c.

Isolated Isolated
C 9 10 11 12
NPN o.c. contact contact
• ON OP3 OP4
IL1 The input is active when the logic
D 13 14 15 16
B 5 6 7 8
state is ON, corresponding to the
contact closed;
Isolated
contact
TTL o.c.
• OFF A When terminals 5, 6 and 7, 8 are
The input is inactive when the logic not configured as OP3 and OP4
state is OFF, corresponding to the outputs, they can be used as vol-
contact open tage or isolated contact inputs.
3
Precautions B Notes B
A 1 Make sure that the power supply voltage is the
same indicated on the instrument.
All the wiring must comply with the local reg- A 1 2 3 4
Configuration
OP1 OP2 and Supervision 2 Switch on the power supply only after all the electri-
ulations.
cal connections have been completed.
TC
The supply wiring should be routed away from the Female plug Power supply and 3 In accordance with the safety regulations, the
power cables. with termination serial communications
resistor for serial bus male connector power supply switch shall bring the identification
communications of the relevant instrument. The power supply
Avoid to use electromagnetic contactors, power bus B 5 6 7 8
RS485 switch shall be easily accessible from the operator.
relays and high power motors nearby. 5
Avoid power units nearby, especially if controlled 4 4 The instrument is PTC protected.
in phase angle. NC 3 In case of failure it is suggested to return the
TC N
2 instrument to the manufacturer for repair.
Keep the input low voltage sensor wires away 24 V~
L
1
from the power lines and the output cables. Power supply
5 To protect the instrument internal circuits use:
C 9 10 11 12
- 2 AT fuses for relay outputs with 250 Vac load
If this is not achievable, use shielded cables on the switch
sensor input, with one end of the shield connect- - 4 AT fuses for relay outputs with 120 Vac load
ed to earth. - 1 A~T for SSR outputs.
IL Commands
D 13 14 15 16
6 Relay contacts are already protected with varistors.
Only in case of 24 Vac inductive loads,
use model A51-065-30D7 varistors
(on request).
OP1 - OP2 - OP3 - OP4 ouptuts
Alarms on OP1 and OP2 Load Load Alarms on OP3 and OP4
Relay (SSR or SSR drive) SSR drive
Fuse
Fuse
V~
A 1 2 3 4
B 5 6 7 8
OP1 OP2
OP3 OP4 A When terminals 5, 6 and
7, 8 are not configured as
OP3 and OP4 outputs, they
can be used as voltage or
isolated contact inputs
OP1-OP2-OP3-OP4 output characteristics

Power supply bus and serial communication RS485 B
Output Type For resistive load or auxiliary circuit breaker
5
SPST Relay N.O., 2A/250 Vca External fuse 2A~T at 250Vac RS485 Power supply: Switching type with double
OP1 - OP2 Relay 4 insulation with incorporated PTC (resettable fuse).
4A/120Vac External fuse 4A~T at 120Vac
3 NC Rated voltage: 24 Vac(-25...+12%) 50/60 Hz;
OP1 - OP2 SSR 1A/250 Vac External fuse 1A~T N 24 Vdc (-15...+25%).
2
OP1 - OP2 SSR drive Not isolated: 0...5 Vdc, ±20% 30 mA max. 24 V~ Power consumption:3 W max.
1
L
OP3 - OP4 SSR drive Not isolated: 0...5 Vdc, ±20% 30 mA max. Protection: PTC protected.
Serial communications: Passive and galvanically
isolated interface 500 Vac/1 min.
Conforms to standard EIA RS 485, Modbus/Jbus protocol.
4
D9ed1 IT/UK - uso 29-04-2008 16:56 Pagina 6
DIN rail mounting

E 2 channels data S E R I E S
acquisition module
c
ASCON spa
D9 line ISO 9 0 0 1
D9 line
Installation manual • M.U. D9-3/08.04 • Cod. J30-478-1AD9 IE
User manual C e r t i f i e d
C
UL US
LISTED
Table of contents
- Resources
- Operating modes
- Model code
- Table and description of standard
parameters
- Technical specifications
- Commands ASCON spa
- Communications parameters reset Via Falzarego 9/11
20021 Baranzate
- Serial communications connection (Milano) Italy
example Fax +39 02 350 4243
http://www.ascon.it
- Warranty e-mail info@ascon.it
Resources Operating modes

Operating mode Alarms
Main universal inputs Digital outputs [1]

12 PV1 OP1
PV1 1 Acquisition OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4
PV2 2 Acquisition
12 PV2 OP2
PV1 3 Acquisition OP1 OP2 OP3
Digital inputs [2] PV2 4 Acquisition OP4
Digital input for external commands
IL1 OP3 PV1 5 Acquisition OP1 OP2
PV2 6 Acquisition OP3 OP4
OP4
D9
IL1 connected functions Available functions
Not
Modbus RS485 Notes: 1. Each output (OP1...OP4) can freely be associated with one of the two inputs (PV1 or PV2).
Parameterisation Supervision 2. When outputs OP3 and OP4 are not used as such, they can be used as voltage free or voltage digital inputs.
Model code
Configuration
The product code indicates the specific hardware coniguration of
Mod. D 9 5 B 5 0 - 0 F 0 0 / I L M N - 0 0 0 0
Line Basic Accessories the instrument, that can be modified by specialized engineers only
1st part 2nd part
Line D 9
Output OP1-OP2 B User manual F
Relay - Relay 1 Italian - English (std) 0
Relay - SSR Drive 2 French - English 1
SSR Drive - SSR Drive 3 German - English 2
SSR - SSR 4 Spanish - English 3
SSR - SSR Drive 5
Input type Range PV1 I L

Input type Range PV2 M N
TR Pt100 IEC751 -99.9…300.0 °C -99.9…572.0 °F 0 0
TR Pt100 IEC751 -200…600 °C -328…1112 °F 0 1
TC L Fe-Const DIN43710 0…600 °C 32…1112 °F 0 2
TC J Fe-Cu45% Ni IEC584 0…600 °C 32…1112 °F 0 3
TC T Cu-CuNi -200 …400 °C -328…752 °F 0 4
TC K Chromel -Alumel IEC584 0…1200 °C 32…2192 °F 0 5
TC S Pt10%Rh-Pt IEC584 0…1600 °C 32…2912 °F 0 6
TC R Pt13%Rh-Pt IEC584 0…1600 °C 32…2912 °F 0 7
TC B Pt30%Rh-Pt Pt6%Rh IEC584 0…1800 °C 32…3272 °F 0 8
TC N Nichrosil-Nisil IEC584 0…1200 °C 32…2192 °F 0 9
TC E Ni10%Cr-CuNi IEC584 0…600 °C 32…1112 °F 1 0
TC Ni-NiMo 18% 0…1100 °C 32…2012 °F 1 1
TC W3%Re-W25%Re 0…2000 °C 32…3632 °F 1 2
TC W5%Re-W26%Re 0…2000 °C 32…3632 °F 1 3
0…50mV linear Engineering units 1 4
10…50mV linear Engineering units 1 5
mV “Custom” input range On request 1 6
1
Table of standard parameters

If not specified, each the parameter must be doubled: one set for LOOP1 and one set for LOOP2. If the parameter is unique (1 parameter for both the loops) it is pointed out in
the notes column
Configuration
Mnemonic Factory
code Parameter descritption Setting range Unit setting Notes
IL Digital input function IL see table 1 not used
Prot Communication protocol M.bus/Jbus M.bus
Valid for both the channels
baud Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 baud 9600
PStr Instrument position Alone/left side/central/right side Alone
Unit Engineering unit see table 2 none
Sc.dd N° of decimals 0...3 0 Linear scales only
Sc.Hi Low range -999...9999 Engineering unit Low range
Range min. 100 digit (linear scales only)
Sc.Lo High range -999...9999 Engineering unit High range
Alarms and auxiliary
Mnemonic Factory
code Parameter descritption Setting range Unit setting Notes
A1hy AL1 hysteresis 0.1...10.0 % range 0.5
A1SR AL1 alarm source Loop 1/loop 2 Loop 1
The same parameters are available also
A1.tp AL1 alarm type See table 3 Inhibited
for AL2, AL3 and AL4 alarms
A1Lb Latching/blocking alarm functions None/Ltch/Bloc/LtbL None
A1.O AL1 output Internal status/OP1/OP2/OP3/OP4 Internal status
t.Fil Filter time constant OFF/1...30 s Inhibited
In.Sh Input shift OFF/-60...+60 Digit Inhibited
Addr Communications address 1...247 247 Valid for both the channels
Hi.PV PV (measure) Hold 0/1 0
OP.lk Output lock 0/1 0 Locks the outputs OP1, OP2, OP3, OP4
Ack Alarms acknowledge 0/1 0 Valid for both the channels
Nt.O1 Negate (NOT) OP1 0/1 0 Available also for OP2 - OP3 - OP4
RF.L RF low range low range...RF. H Engineering unit ----
RF.H RF high range RF. L...high range Engineering unit ----
RF Reference value range Engineering unit ----
Standard parameters description

The parameters shown in the table are divided into groups which work in the same way. Below they will be described as they are listed in the table.
Configuration Setpoint (SP) Auxiliary parameters
IL Digital input function - Table 1 A1S.P AL1 - AL2 - AL3 - AL4 threshold A1.tp Alarm type
A2S.P Alarm occurrences of AL1,AL2,AL3 and OP4. A2.tp The parameter allows to specify how each
Parameter decription The range of the alarm threshold shoud function.
A3.tp
Not used A3S.P correspond to the whole span and it is not The types of alarm available are:
A4.tp
Loop 1 measure hold A4S.P limited by the SP Setpoint span.
Loop 2 measure hold Value Action
Hold both the measuring loops 0 Disable
Output locks 1 Sensor/Loop Break
Alarms acknowledge 2 Absolute high
3 Absolute low
unit Engineering units - Table 2
In.Sh
Input shift
Parameter description Parameter description This function shifts the whole PV scale of up to ±60 digits.
°C (Centigrade degrees) A (Ampere)
Addr Controller address
°F (Fahrenheit degrees) bar
None psi The address range is from 1 to 247 and must be unique
for each instrument on the communications bus to the
mV (millivolt) Rh
supervisor.
V (Volt) pH
mA (milliampere)
2
AL1 - AL2 - AL3 - Al4 Alarms

For each alarm is possible to configure:
A - Source C - The functionality of the alarm acknowledgement E - Loop break or sensor break
B - The type and the operating condition of the alarm D - The blocking function on start-up F - Output linked to each alarm
A - Source C/D - Latching, blocking and acknowledge functions enable
A1Sr Alarm source A1L.b AL1, AL2, AL3 and AL4 Alarm acknowledge function Start-up disabling
Each alarm AL1, AL2, AL3 and AL4 A2L.b
latching and blocking The alarm, once occurred, is maintained Ramp down
A2Sr Disable
can be freeely associated to one of For each alarm it is pos- until to the time of acknowledgement. ∆SP
A3Sr A3L.b sible to select the fol- The acknowledge operation is performed SP
the two input channels.
A4Sr The threshold is compared with the A4L.b lowing functions: by serial communications. ack On
After this operation, the alarm leaves Off
Setpoint of the selected channel (SP). - None Start-up
the alarm state only when the alarm
- Latching Ramp up
condition is no longer present. SP
- Blocking
∆SP Disable
- Both latching and blocking
On
Off
Start-up
B - Alarm type and function ∆SP Threshold = SP±range
A1tp Absolute alarm On

Active
A2tp
Off
high F - Alarm addressing Input digital filter
On Active Physical Output linked to the alarm Time constant, in seconds,
A3tp A1.O 100%
Off low One or more alarms (OR function) can be 63.2% PV of the RC input filter applied
A4tp hy A2.O
linked to the physical outputs OP1...OP4. to the PV input.
A3.O The parameter can assume the following When set to “inhibited”
low range high range
alarm values: Internal status, OP1, OP2, OP3, OP4. 0 t.Fil Time the filter is bypassed.
threshold A4.O
Technical specifications
Features Description
(at 25°C T. env.)
Total configurability By means of the configuration tool it is possible to select: - type of input - type of output - type and functionality of the alarms
A/D converter with resolution of 50,000 points
Common Update measurement time: 0.2 s
characteristics Sampling time: 0.5 s (max. measurement updating time)
Input bias: -60…+60 digit
Input filter: 1…30 s (0 = OFF)
0.25% ±1 digit (for temperature sensor) Between 100…240Vac
Accuracy 0.1% ±1 digit (for mA and mV) the error is minimal
Resistance thermometer 2 or 3 wires connection Line: 20Ω max. (3 wires)
(for ∆Τ: R1+R2 Pt100Ω at 0°C(IEC 751) Burnout (with any Input drift: 0.35°C/10°C Env.Temp.
°C/°F selectable
must be <320Ω) combination) <0.35°C/10Ω Wire Res.
PV1 and PV2 inputs
Internal cold junction Line 150Ω max.
L, J, T, K, S, R, B, N, E, W3, W5 (IEC 584) compensation with NTC Input drift:
Thermocouple °C/°F selectable Error 1...20°C ±0,5°C <2µV/1°C Env. Temp.
Burnout <5µV/10Ω Wire Res.
DC input (current) 0/4…20mA, 2.5Ω ext. shunt Burnout. Engieering inputs,
Rj >10MΩ decimal point position configurable Input drift:
10...50mV, Low range: -999…9999 <0.1%/20°C Env. Temp.
DC input (voltage) 0...50mV high range: -999…9999 <5µV/10Ω Wire Res.
Rj >10MΩ (min. range: 100 digits)
Mutual isolation Isolation voltage 500V
Digital input Closing the external
contact allows: Measure hold, alarms acknowledge, outputs lock
Operating mode 2 acquisition channels with 1, 2, 3 or 4 alarms
SPST relay NO, 2A/250Vac (4A/120 Vac) for resistive load
OP1 - OP2 outputs SSR, 1A/250Vac for resistive load
SSR drive: 0/5Vdc, ±10% 30 mA max.
To meet the double isolation requirements, OP1 and OP2 must have the same load type
OP3 - OP4 outputs Non isolated logic: 0/5Vdc, ±10% 30 mA max.
Outputs functions For all the outputs the inversion function (NOT) is available
Hysteresis 0.1…10.0%
Active high
Active low Action type Absolute threshold on the whole range
AL1 - AL2 Action Special Sensor break, Loop break
AL3 - AL4 functions Alarm acknowledge (latching), activation inhibit (blocking)
alarms
Alarm source Assignes the alarms to PV1 or PV2
Alarm output Assignes the alarm condition to an output (OP1, OP2, OP3, OP4).
If not configured, the alarm status is available on the coil
Serial communications RS 485 isolated, Modbus/Jbus protocol, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600 bit/s 2 wires
Measure input Detection of out of range, or input problems causes automatic activation of the safety strategies
Operational safety Parameters Parameters and configuration data are stored in a non volatile memory for an unlimited time
Outputs lock
Power supply (PTC protected) 24Vac (-25...+12%) 50/60Hz and 24Vdc (-15...+25%) Power consumption 3 W max.
Safety EN61010-1 (IEC1010-1), installation class 2 (2.5kV), pollution degree 2, instrument class II
Electromagnetic compatibility Compliance with the CE standards
General characteristics UL and cUL Approval File E176452
Protection Terminal blocks: IP20
Dimensions Pitch: 22.5 mm - height: 99 mm - depth: 114.5 mm - height: 53 mm
Weight 156 g approx.
3
Commands Communications parameters reset

Alarms acknowledge Ack The serial communications parameters can be reset to
the original factory settings (protocol: Modbus, Baud
The acknowledge operation is performed by serial communications. Rate: 9600, Address: 247).
Negate output status Nt.0x The instructions to remove/re-insert the I/O module from/in
its plastic case are described in the “Installation manual”.
Is possible to enable, separately for each output (DO1... DO4), the negate (NOT) fuction of the output internal logic status. After having removed the module, use the instructions
Internal On that follow to reset the communications parameters:
logic status Off 1) Use a jumper to short-circuit the terminals shown in
the drawing that follows;
Enable NOT On 2) Insert the I/O module in its housing and power ON the
function Off instrument;
3) Extract the I/O module from its plastic case and remove
Output On the short circuit jumper;
status Off 4) Reinstall the module in its housing.
At the end to this procedure, the communications parame-
PV Measure Hold Hl.PV ters will be reset to its factory settings.
Through the digital input IL is possible to hold the value of the PV measure (PV1, PV2 or PV1 and PV2).
Outputs lock OP.lk

Output ports can be switched to OFF through the serial communications port. Relay
AOOutputs lock status is maintained if the module is powered OFF Relay
µP
Digital input commands
Performed operation
Function Notes
Off On
T
None Not used
Hold PV1 measure Normal operation PV1 is hold The value of PV (PV1 or/and PV2) is
Hold PV2 measure Normal operation PV2 is hold “frozen” at the time the digital input
Hold PV1 and PV2 measures Normal operation PV1 and PV2 are hold goes to the close state In order to reset the serial communication
parameters to their default values, use a
Outputs status not junper to short-circuit the indicated
Outputs in OFF status The digital IL command inhibits all the
Outputs lock terminals
influenced outputs at the same time
Alarms acnowledged The digital IL command acnowledges
Alarms acknowledge Alarms active all the alarms active at the same time
A function can be assigned, through the configuration procedure, to digital input. The configured function is activated when
the digital input (free voltage contact or open collector output) is in the ON status (closed). The function is reset to the nor-
mal operation by setting the input to the OFF status (open).
Activating the function through the digital input has the highest priority than the keypad or the serial communications com-
mand activation.
Serial communications connection example Warranty

Configuration We warrant that the products will be free from
D9
defects in material and workmanship for 3 years
Configuration
Cd-Rom from the date of delivery.
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
RS485 The warranty above shall not apply for any failure
D9
OP1
OP2
caused by the use of the product not in line with
OP3
OP4
PWR
the instructions reported on this manual.
COM
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
For SCADA Local control

PC with OP35
Autolink operator
panel
31 max. instruments D9 31 max. instruments D9
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
RS485 1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
RS485
D9 D2 D2 D2 D9 D9 D2 D2 D2 D9
OP1 OP1 OP1 OP1
OP2 OP2 OP2 OP2
OP3 OP3 OP3 OP3
OP4 OP4 OP4 OP4
PWR PWR PWR PWR
COM COM COM COM
9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
4
5835_60_C_N2
Address Description Value
7 Contrôle d'Overshoot OC Loop1 100
16 Limite inférieure Valeur Alarm Reference Loop1 0
17 Limite supérieure Valeur Alarm Reference Loop1 3000
18 Rampe sur consigne montée SLU Loop1 -1
19 Rampe sur consigne descente SLD Loop1 -1
6 Bande Proportionnelle PB (%) Loop1 1000
8 Temps intégrale Ti (mn) Loop1 0
9 Temps Dérivée TD (mn) Loop1 0
63 Valeur seuil d'alarme 3 (A3SP) Loop1 0
67 Hystérésis alarme 3 (A3HY) (%) Loop1 5
22 Filtre sur Mesure TFiL (sec) Loop1 2
23 Décallage de Mesure (INSH) Loop1 0
12 Limite haute Sortie régul chaude OPH (%) Loop1 1000
10 Temps de Cycle sortie régul chaude TC (s) Loop1 -1
13 Hystérésis sortie chaude HY (%) Loop1 0
95 Adresse Comm série Esclave ADDR 2
117 Vitesse de comm BAUD 9600
116 Protocole de comm PROT ModBus
91 Lancement AutoRéglage TUNE Loop1 Non actif
0 Type signal entrée mesure PV Loop1 Pt100 échelle -99.9...300.0
°C
106 Position Pt décimal SCDD Loop1 0
105 Unité de la mesure UNIT Loop1 Celsius
0 Type de régulation Loop1 TOUT ou RIEN avec hystérésis, mode
Inverse
70 Fonction Alarme 1 AL1 Désactivée
14 Bande morte d'erreur DERR (%) Loop1 0
15 Valeur sortie sécurité SOUT(%) Loop1 -1
43 Limite basse de sortie régulation (%) Loop2 0
0 Sortie de régulation Loop1 Désactivée
107 Valeur basse de l'échelle d'entrée SCLO Loop1 -999
108 Valeur haute de l'échelle d'entrée SCHI Loop1 3000
64 Valeur seuil d'alarme AL4 0
68 Hystérésis alarme AL4 5
69 Source alarme AL1 PV Ch.1
113 Code PASS de config 0
103 Second code de configuration ?Ü?ö?ý? @ ˜ 00
0'0>0D0o0u00•0ª0Ã0111131;1B1]1
72 Sortie alarme AL1 soft - pas de sortie relais
1001 Etat sortie OP1 0
1005 Acquittement alarmes 0
1006 Blocage des sorties Non
1007 Hold mesure PV1 (maintien) Loop1 Non
1009 Auto/Manu Loop1 Auto/Man Loop1 disabled
118 Fonction entrée logique IL1 Aucune
1033 Inversion sortie OP1 Non
93 Selection consigne mémorisée Consigne Locale seulement
71 Inhibition alarme 1 Non
Pge p
5835_60_C_N2
61 Valeur seuil d'alarme 1 A1SP 0
65 Hystérésis alarme 1 A1HY (%) 5
11 Reset Manuel MRES (%) Loop1 500
20 Mémoire consigne SP1 Loop1 -1
0 Type de consigne SSEL Consigne Locale
92 Délai alarme rupture de boucle LBA (sec) -1
2 Valeur Alarm Reference Loop1 0
3 Sortie Loop1 0
96 Position relative de l'instrument Instrument intermédiaire sur
le rail DIN
°C
Inverse
33 Sortie Loop2 0
1011 Mesure PV1 hors échelle Loop1 0
1013 Etat alarme AL1 0
1017 Etat de l'entrée logique 0
1020 Autoréglage Loop1 0
83 Inhibition à la montée sans acquittement ni inhibition
(standard)
94 SP Selection channel2 Consigne Locale seulement
220 ADDREG 221 1
221 ADDREG 222 5350
222 ADDREG 223 8224
223 ADDREG 224 8224
224 ADDREG 225 8224
225 ADDREG 226 8224
226 ADDREG 227 8224
227 ADDREG 228 8224
228 ADDREG 229 -1
229 ADDREG 230 -1
Pge p
5835_60_C_N2
99 Input Offset Loop1 0
24 Input Span Loop1 10000
Pge p
5835_60_C_N3
°C
Inverse
0'0>0D0o0u00•0ª0Ã0111131;1B1]1
Pge p
5835_60_C_N3
3 Sortie Loop1 0
le rail DIN
°C
Inverse
33 Sortie Loop2 0
(standard)
220 ADDREG 221 1
221 ADDREG 222 5350
222 ADDREG 223 8224
223 ADDREG 224 8224
224 ADDREG 225 8224
225 ADDREG 226 8224
226 ADDREG 227 8224
227 ADDREG 228 8224
228 ADDREG 229 -1
229 ADDREG 230 -1
Pge p
5835_60_C_N3
Pge p
5835_60_C_N4
°C
Inverse
0'0>0D0o0u00•0ª0Ã0111131;1B1]1
Pge p
5835_60_C_N4
3 Sortie Loop1 0
le rail DIN
°C
Inverse
33 Sortie Loop2 0
(standard)
220 ADDREG 221 1
221 ADDREG 222 5350
222 ADDREG 223 8224
223 ADDREG 224 8224
224 ADDREG 225 8224
225 ADDREG 226 8224
226 ADDREG 227 8224
227 ADDREG 228 8224
228 ADDREG 229 -1
229 ADDREG 230 -1
Pge p
5835_60_C_N4
Pge p
D3ed1 UK installazione 17-04-2003 16:25 Pagina 1
DIN-rail mounting
E double action controller
S E R I E S
with analogue output
D3 line
ASCON spa
D3 line c
ISO 9 0 0 1 I n s t a l l a t i o n m a n u a l • M . I . U . D3-3/03.04 • C o d . J 3 0 - 6 5 8 - 1 A D 3 F E
Installation certified
manual
Table of contents
- Model code
- Electric safety ASCON spa
- Accessories 20021 Bollate
(Milan) Italy
- Installation Tel. +39 02 333 371
- Electrical connections Fax +39 02 350 4243
http://www.ascon.it
e-mail info@ascon.it
General description
Simplified assembly and 1 DIN-rail, EN50022 6 Female connector, with termination Easy to replace even if
connection 2 Sping loaded slide for rail fastening resistor for serial communications powered
5
3 Side connector, build-in, to connect 7 Three Output status leds (red)
one instrument to another (up to 31) 8 Green Status led: 9
10 4 5-pole male connector, with screw - ON: power on
6 11
terminals, for power supply and - flashing: serial communications
4
serial communications bus in progress
5 Four quick polarised connectors with 9 Couple of connector protections
4 screw terminals for I/O 10 Wiring label
7
Common power supply 4 Withdrawable
8
3
1
2
Model code
Mod. D 3 5 B C D - E F 0 0
The product code indicates the specific hardware configuration of Serial communications C Special functions E
the instrument, that can be modified by specialized engineers only. CanBus 3 Not fitted 0
RS485 Modbus/Jbus SLAVE 5 Start-up + Timer 2
Line D 3
OP1-OP2 outputs B Options D User manual F

Relay - Relay 1 None 0 Italian/English (std) 0
SSR - SSR 5 Valve drive output 2 French/English 1
Analogue output 5 German/English 2
Valve drive output + Analogue output (retr.) 7 Spanish/English 3

Please, read carefully these instructions before proceeding with the installation of the controller Each set of interconnected controllers requires one
It is important to understand that it’s responsibility of the model AD3-KIT/BA.RT.PC.CD kit:
Class II instrument, rear panel mounting.
This controller has been designed with compliance to: installer to ensure the compliance of the regulations on
Regulations on electrical apparatus: according to safety requirements and EMC.
The repair of this controller has no user serviceable parts Power supply and 5
Couple of connec-
directive 73/23/EEC amended by directive 93/68/EEC and serial comm.s
4
tor protections
the Regulations on the essential protection requirements and requires special equipment and specialised engineers. 3
2
Therefore, a repair can be hardly carried on directly by the connector 1

code AD3/PC
in electrical apparatus EN61010-1 : 93 + A2:95 code AD3/BA
Regulations on Electromagnetic Compatibility: according to user. For this purpose, the manufacturer provides technical
assistance and the repair service for its Customers. CD Rom with
the directive n089/336/EEC, amended by directive n° 92/31/EEC, Connector with
Please, contact your nearest Agent for further information. configuration soft-
93/68/EEC, 98/13/EEC and the following regulations: termination
All the information and warnings about safety and elec- ware tool
Regulations on RF emissions resistor for
EN61000-6-4 : 2001 industrial environments tromagnetic compatibility are marked with the B serial comm.s
code AD3/CD
Regulation on RF immunity sign, at the side of the note. code AD3/RT
EN61000-6-2 : 2001 industrial equipment and system
1
Installation
Dimensions
22.5 mm
0,89 in
99 mm
3,9 in
114,5 mm
4,5 in
6.3 mm
0,25 in
Conditions d'environnement B Suggestion
Conditions T Température 0…50°C
standards %Rh Humidité relative 5...95% sans condensation

T Température > 50 °C Use forced ventilation
Special
conditions
%Rh > 95% RH Warm up
P Conducting atmosphere Use filter
C E
Forbidded
Corrosive atmosphere Explosive atmosphere
condition
Mounting
1 clip the upper part of the
CLICK
instrument on the rail 2
1
2 rotate the instrument down-

wards until the click
Disassembly
1 lower the spring slide by

inserting a flat-blade screw-
driver as indicated
2 turn and lift the instrument

upwards.
2
1

1 After the mounting of instru-
ments on the rail, put them side
by side so that the male side 2
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8 1
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8 3
connector fits into the corre- D3 D3
sponding female connector OP1

OP2
OP1
OP2
OP3 OP3
PWR PWR
COM COM
2 After mounting all the instru-
9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
ments side by side insert the 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
female 5-pole connector with

the termination resistor of the
serial communications into the
50 mm
1,969 in
50 mm
1,969 in
corresponding male connector

4
3 Wire the 5-pole male power
supply and serial communica- 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
tions connector and insert it in 5

D3
6 7 8 5
D3
6 7 8 5
D3
6 7 8
the corresponding female OP1 OP1 OP1
connector OP2
OP3
OP2
OP3
OP2
OP3
PWR PWR PWR
COM COM COM
4 When assembled insert the con- 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12

3
13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
nector protection on both sides
50 mm
1,969 in
50 mm
1,969 in
connectors protection
22.5 x N + 53 mm
2
Termination unit
4 terminal connectors OP3 OP5
A A 1 2 3 4
RS 485
NO IC 5
B OP1 OP2 4
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 B 5 6 7 8 NC 3
D3 IC NO NO IC
24 V ~
N 2
OP1
OP2
C 9 10 11 12 L 1
OP3
PWR DI OP4
Termination COM Power supply
connector and serial D 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12 comm. B b A
13 14 15 16 connector
RTD + 24 VDC
C TC OUT
D
Features Terminal connector A-B-C-D Power supply and comm.s connector
Flexible cable section: 0,2...2,5 mm2 (AWG24 - AWG12) 0,08...1,5 mm2 (AWG28-AWG16)
L Stripped wire 7 mm - 0.28 in 7 mm - 0.28 in

Negative
0,6 x 3,5 mm 0,4 x 2,5 mm
screwdriver
Holding screw 0,5 - 0,6 Nm 0,4 - 0,5 Nm
Input
PV control input: L-J-K-S-R-T-B-N-E-W thermocouple type
• Connect the wires with the polarity as shown
• Use always compensation cable of the correct type for the
D 13 14 15 16 thermocouple used
• The shield, if present, must be connected to a proper earth.
Line 150Ω max
PV control input: For Pt100 resistance thermometer - ∆T (2 x Pt100) special
Pt100 ∆T (2 x Pt100) • If a 3 wires system is used, use always

cables of the same section (1mm2 min.)
D 13 14 15 16 D 13 14 15 16 (maximum line resistance 20 Ω/line)
• When using a 2 wires system, use always
cables of the same section (1,5mm2 min.) and
B b A A B A put a jumper between terminals 13 and 14
AWhen the distance between the controller
and the sensor is 15 mt. using a cable of
R2 R1
1.5 mm2 section, produces an error on the
R1+R2<320Ω measure of 1°C (1,8°F).
PV control input: for mA, mV PV control input: With 2 wires transducers

Auxiliary power
24 V
supply for external

D 13 14 15 16 D 13 14 15 16 transmitter
- 24V– ±20%
- 30mA max
External 4...20 mA - without short
shunt circuit protec-
mA 2.5Ω
tion
mV External
mA PV
shunt
2.5Ω
Transmitter
PV control input: With 3 wires transducer Digital input

• ON
Auxiliary power The input is active
24 V
IL
supply for exter- when the logic
D 13 14 15 16
nal transmitter C 9 10 11 12
state is ON, corre-
- 24V– ±20% sponding to the
- 30mA max contact closed
Isolated
External - without short contact • OFF
shunt circuit protec-
2.5Ω The input is inac-
tion NPN o.c.
tive when the
mA PV logic state is OFF,
4...20 mA TTL o.c.
corresponding to
Trasmettitore
Transmitter the contact open
3
Precautions B Example of wiring diagram (Heat / Cool control) Notes B
1 Make sure that the power supply voltage is
A [5] 3...15 PSI the same indicated on the instrument.
Alarm 4…20mA I
All the wiring must comply with the local [6] P
regulations . I/P converter 2 Switch on the power supply only after that all the
V~
A 1 2 3 4 electrical connections have been completed.
The supply wiring should be routed away from OP3
OP5
the power cables 3 In accordance with the safety regulations,
mA Configuration the power supply switch shall bring the
Avoid to use electromagnetic contactors, power V~ and Supervision identification of the relevant instrument.
Relays and high power motors nearby. [5] [6] The power supply switch shall be easily
Heating
Avoid power units nearby, especially if con- RS485 accessible from the operator.
5
trolled in phase angle . B 5 6 7 8
OP1 4 4 The instrument is protected with a 0.5 A~ T
Keep the input low voltage sensor wires away NC 3 Power supply switch fuse. In case of failure it is suggested to return
N the instrument to the manufacturer for repair.
from the power lines and the output cables. 2
24 V~
If this is not achievable, use shielded cables on IL L
1
Cooling 5 To protect the instrument internal circuits use:
the sensor input, with the shield connected to C 9 10 11 12 Power supply and serial communications - 2 A~ T fuses for Relay outputs
earth Male connector, bus male connector
with termination - 1 A~ T fuses for SSR outputs.
resistor for serial
communications line 6 Relay contacts are already protected with
D 13 14 15 16 Commands
varistors.
Only in case of 24 V ~ inductive
loads, use model A51-065-30D7
varistors (on request).
OP1 - OP2 - OP3 - OP4 - OP5 outputs

Single action Single action Single action OP1-OP2-OP3-OP4-OP5 output characteristics
Relay (SSR) SSR Drive Analogue output Output Type For resistive load or auxiliary circuit breaker
OP1 - OP2 Relay SPST Relay N.O., 2A/250 V~ External fuse 2A ~ T

Fuse
Load
OP4
Load
OP1 - OP2 SSR 1A/250 V~ External fuse 1A ~ T

C 9 10 11 12
OP3 Relay SPST Relay N.O., 2A/24 V ~ External fuse 2A ~ T
B 5 6 7 8 A 1 2 3 4 OP4 Digital Not isolated: 0...5 V–, ±20% 30 mA max

OP1
OP5 For control or PV / SP retransmission
Load
OP5 Analogue
mA isolation 500V~/1 min: 0/4...20 mA - 750 Ω / 15 V max
Double action Double action For valve driver - Relay (SSR) / Relay (SSR)
Relay (SSR) / Relay (SSR) Relay (SSR) / SSR Drive
M Valve drive PID without potentiometer
~
Fuses
Fuse
3 pole output with NO contacts (raise, lower, stop)

Heat load
Cool load
Heat load
OP4
Close
Open
9 10 11 12 V~
B 5 6 7 8 B 5 6 7 8 B 5 6 7 8
Cool load
OP1 OP2 OP1 OP1 OP2
Double action Double action Alarm output

SSR Drive/ Relay (SSR) Relay (SSR) / Analogue output
A The relay/SSR output OP1, OP2
Fuse
Fuse
Cool load
can be used as alarm outputs only

Heat load
AL1 load
AL2 load
Cool load
OP4 AL3
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
load if they are not used as control out-

C 9 10 11 12 V~
puts
B 5 6 7 8 B 5 6 7 8 A 1 2 3 4 B 5 6 7 8 A 1 2 3 4
Heat load
OP2 OP1 OP1 OP2 OP3

OP5
mA
Double action Double action Power supply bus and serial communication RS485 B
Analogue output / Relay (SSR) Analogue output / SSR Drive
5
RS485 Power supply: Switching type with double insulation
Cool load
Heat load
Heat load
Fuse
OP4 4
with incorporated PTC (fuse which can be reset)..
3 NC
C 9 10 11 12
N
Rated voltage: 24 V~(-25% +12%) 50/60 Hz;
2 24 V- (continuous) (-15% +25%).
24 V~ Power consumption: 3 W max.
1
L Protection: Incorporated PTC.
A 1 2 3 4 B 5 6 7 8 A 1 2 3 4
Cool load
OP2 Serial communication: Passive and galvanically iso-

OP5 OP5
lated interface 500 V~/1 min. Conforms to standard
mA mA EIA RS 485, Modbus/Jbus protocol
4
D3ed1 UK - uso 22-04-2003 12:59 Pagina 3
DIN-rail mounting
E double action controller S E R I E S
with analogue output
D3 line ASCON spa D3 line c
ISO 9 0 0 1 User Manual • M.I.U. D3-3/03.04 • Cod. J30-478-1AD3 EF
User manual certified
Table of contents
- Resources
- Model code
- Description and table of standard
ASCON spa
parameters 20021 Bollate
- Description and table of special (Milan) Italy
function parameters Tel. +39 02 333 371
Fax +39 02 350 4243
- Technical specifications http://www.ascon.it
e-mail info@ascon.it
Resources Operating mode

D3 Control Alarms Retransmission
Main universal input PV/SP
12 PV OP1 1 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP5

Single
2 OP4 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP5
action
Digital input (option) OP2
3 OP5 OP1 OP2 OP3
IL
4 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP5
OP3
5 OP1 OP4 OP2 OP3 OP5
OP4 6 Double OP4 OP2 OP1 OP3 OP5
7 action OP1 OP5 OP2 OP3
OP5 8 OP5 OP2 OP1 OP3
(option) 9 OP5 OP4 OP1 OP2 OP3
10 Valve OP1 OP2 OP3 OP5
Setpoint Special function Digital input IL function Fuzzy tuning with automatic selection
(option) Modbus RS485
One shot One shot
Parameterisation
Supervision Auto tuning Natural frequency
Model code
Configuration
Mod. D 3 5 B C D - E F 0 0 / I L M N - O P Q R
Line Basic Accessories 1st part 2nd part
The product code indicates the specific hardware coniguration of
the instrument, that can be modified by specialized engineers only Serial communications C Special function E
CanBus 3 Not fitted 0
Line D 3 RS485 Modbus/Jbus SLAVE 5 Start-up + Timer 2
Ouput OP1-OP2 B Options D User manual F

Relay - Relay 1 None 0 Italian/English (std) 0
SSR - SSR 5 Valve drive output 2 French/English 1
Analogue output 5 German/English 2
Valve drive output + Analogue output (retr.) 7 Spanish/English 3
Input type and range I L
TR Pt100 IEC751 -99.9…300.0 °C -99.9…572.0 °F 0 0 Control mode M Alarm 1 type and O P Q
TR Pt100 IEC751 -200…600 °C -328…1112 °F 0 1 ON-OFF reverse action 0 function AL.. 1 2 3
TC L Fe-Const DIN43710 0…600 °C 32…1112 °F 0 2 ON-OFF direct action 1 Disabled or used by Timer
P.I.D. single reverse action 0 0 0
TC J Fe-Cu45% Ni IEC584 0…600 °C 32…1112 °F 0 3 2 (only for AL3)
TC T Cu-CuNi -200 …400 °C -328…752 °F P.I.D. single direct action 3 Sensor break / LBA 1 1
0 4 1
Linear cool output 4 active high
TC K Cromel-Alumel IEC584 0…1200 °C 32…2192 °F 0 5 P.I.D. Absolute 2 2 2
ON-OFF cool output 5 active low
TC S Pt10%Rh-Pt IEC584 0…1600 °C 32…2912 °F 0 6 3 3 3
double action Water cool output 6 active high
TC R Pt13%Rh-Pt IEC584 0…1600 °C 32…2912 °F 0 7 Oil cool output Deviation 4 4 4
7 active low 5 5
TC B Pt30%Rh Pt6%Rh IEC584 0…1800 °C 32…3272 °F 0 8 5
TC N Nicrosil-Nisil IEC584 0…1200 °C 32…2192 °F Output configuration active out 6 6 6
0 9 N Band
Single Action Double action active in 7 7 7
TC E Ni10%Cr-CuNi IEC584 0…600 °C 32…1112 °F 1 0
TC NI-NiMo18% 0…1100 °C 32…2012 °F Relay Heat Relay, Cool Relay 0
1 1
SSR drive Heat Relay, Cool SSR Drive 1
TC W3%Re-W25%Re 0…2000 °C 32…3632 °F 1 2 Analogue Heat SSR Drive, Cool Relay 2 Setpoint type R
TC W5%Re-W26%Re 0…2000 °C 32…3632 °F 1 3 Heat Relay, Cool Analogue 3 Local only 0
Dc input 0…50mV Engineering units 1 4 Heat Analogue, Cool Relay
Valve drive 4 Local and 2 tracking stored Setpoint
Dc input 10…50mV Engineering units 1 5 Heat SSR Drive, Cool Analogue 5 1
Custom input range 1 6 Heat Analogue, Cool SSR Drive 6 Local and 2 Stand-by stored Setpoint 2
1
D3ed1 UK - uso 22-04-2003 12:59 Pagina 4
Standard parameters description Table of standard parameters

The parameters shown in the table are divided Configuration
into groups which work in the same way. Below Mnemonic Factory
they will be described as they are listed in the code Parameter description Range Units setting Notes
table. IL Digital input function IL see table 1 not used
Sc.dd N° of decimals 0...3 0 linear scale only
Configuration
Sc.Lo Low range -999...9999 engineer. units Low range
minimum range 100 digit
Sc.Hi High range -999...9999 engineer. units High range
IL Digital input function - Table 1
Prot Communications protocol M.bus/Jbus M.bus
Parameter description
baud Baud rate 1200,2400,4800,9600 baud 9600
Not used retr Output range 0...20/4...20 mA 4-20 if output OP5 option is present
PV measure hold rtH Retransmitted signal PV/SP PV unless used as a control analogue output
Auto/Man
Setpoint
1st stored Setpoint
Mnemonic Factory
2st stored Setpoint code Parameter description Range Units setting Notes
Run Timer A1S.P AL1 alarm threshold PV range engineer. units 0 It is not enabled if the controller has been
A2S.P AL2 alarm threshold PV range engineer. units 0 configured with alarm n° 2 not active or of
unit Engineering units - Table 2 A3S.P AL3 alarm threshold PV range engineer. units 0 sensor break type
Parameter descr. Parameter descr. SL. u Setpoint ramp up OFF / 0.1...999.9 digit/min inhibited With OFF the new Setpoint is reached
°C (degree Centigrade) A (Ampere) SL. d Setpoint ramp down OFF / 0.1...999.9 digit/min inhibited immediately after being entered.
°F (degree Fahrenheit) bar SP L Setpoint low range low range...SP H engineer. units low range
- ( none) psi SP H Setpoint high range SP L...high range engineer. units high range
mV (millivolt) Rh SP 1 1st stored Setpoint PV range engineer. units ----
V (Volt) pH SP 2 2nd stored Setpoint PV range engineer. units ----
mA (milliampere) SP Setpoint PV range engineer. units ----
Control mode
Setpoint (SP) Mnemonic Factory Algorithm
code Parameter description Range Units setting Notes Type
A1S.P AL1 - AL2 - AL3 threshold hy. Control output hysteresis 0.1...10.00 % range 0.5 On - Off
Alarm occurrences of OP1,OP2 and tune Tune run/stop Start/stop
A2S.P
OP3 outputs, respectively linked to P.b. Proportional band 0.5...999.9 % range 5.0
A3S.P AL1, AL2 and AL3.
t.i. Integral time OFF / 0.1...100.0 min 5.0
The range of the alarm threshold correspond to the
t.d. Derivative time OFF / 0.01...10.00 min 1.00
whole span and it is not limited by the SP Setpoint
span. O.C. Overshoot control 0.01...1.00 1.00 Setting 1 is disabled
M.res Manual reset 0.0...100.0 % output 5.0 Without integral time PID
d.err Error dead band OFF / 0.01...10.0 digit inhibited
SL. u Setpoint ramp up- Setpoint ramp down t.c. Cycle time 1...200 sec 20 Time proportional only
rump up This parameter specifies the maximum OP. H Control output high limit 10.0...100.0 % output 100.0
rate of change of the SP in digit/min. S.Out Output safety value 0.0...100.0 % output 0 -100.0...+100.0 Heat/Cool
SL. d
rump down
The SP value is reached according to MV.tM Motor travel time 15...600 sec 60 Valve
the configured rate of change. The new MV.hy Minimum output step 0.1...5.0 % output 0.5 drive
SP value is called "Target SP" (avail- dbnd Dead band -10.0...10.0 % output 0.5
able via serial communications). r.C.G.a Cool relative gain 0.1...10.0 1
Heat
hy. C Cool output hysteresis 0.1...10.0 % range 0.5 On/Off only
Cool
t.c. C Cool cycle time 1...200 sec 20 Time proportional only
Example:
OP. HC Cool control output high limit 10.0...100.0 % ouput 100.0 PID only
350°
350° A.Man Auto/man selection Auto/Man Auto
Target Setpoint
Setpoint Alarm and auxiliary
change SL. u
Mnemonic Factory
10 digit/minutes code Parameter description Range Units setting Notes
250° A1hy AL1 hysteresis 0.1...10.0 % range 0.5 The same parameters are available for AL2
Initial Latch.and blocking alarm functions and AL3 alarms
Setpoint A1Lb none / Ltch / Bloc / LtbL none
t.Lba LBA delay OFF / 1...9999 sec inhibited OFF = sensor break
0 t = 10
St.OP Soft-start output value OFF / 0.1...100.0 % ouput 0.5 t.mod = OFF only
St.tn Soft-start activation time 1...9999 sec 1 Only if sT.OP different than OFF
When the parameter is OFF, this function is dis- Filter time costant OFF / 1...30 sec inhibited
t.Fil
abled and the new Setpoint is reached immedi- Input shift OFF / -60...+60 digit
In.Sh inhibited
ately after being entered.
Addr Communications address 1...247 247
rt.lo Retransmission low range PV range engineer. units ---- If OP5 output is present and not configu-
Setpoint low limit and Sepoint high limit Retransmission high range red as control output
rt.hi PV range engineer. units ----
Low / high limit of the Setpoint value.
Control mode B - Natural frequncy
Instrument range tune Automatic tune
The Fuzzy-Tuning determines automatically the best PID Setpoint change
term with respect to the process behaviour. End of the tuning
The controller provides 2 types of “one shot” tuning algo- Tuning start operating and setting
rithm, that are selected automatically according to the of the new calculated terms
Low limit SP. L SP. H High limit process conditions when the operation is started Control output
A - STEP respose
Setpoint range
SP
End of the tuning
Setpoint change operating and setting This type is selected when the PV is close to the SP
of the new calculated terms
SP. 1 1st stored SP - 2nd stored SP Setpoint.
PV variable Tuning start This method has the advantage of a better accuracy in the
SP. 2
Values of the two Setpoints, that are
activated by mean of digital input or term calculation with a reasonable speed calculation.
communications parameters. If configured with Control output
“Tracking”, the previous Local Setpoint value will be The Fuzzy Tuning determines automatically the best
lost, when the stored Setpoint is selected. This type is selected when, at the start of the autotune method to use to calculate the PID term, according the
If configured with “Stand-by” the Local Setpoint operation, the PV is far from the Setpoint of more than process conditions.
value will not be lost, when the Stand-by Setpoint is 5% of the span. This method has the big advantage of fast cal-
selected. It will operate again when back to Local. culation, with a reasonable accuracy in the term calculation.
2
D3ed1 UK - uso 22-04-2003 12:59 Pagina 5
Standard parameters description - follows

Control mode - follows Heat/Cool control
p.B. Proportional band By a sole PID control algorithm, the controller handles two different outputs, one of these performs the Heat action, the
This parameter specifies the proportional band coeffi- other one the Cool action. It is possible to overlap the outputs.
cient that multiplies the error (SP - PV)
A - Heat/Cool actions separated C - Cool action adjusting

t.i. Integral time
d.bnd positive 0...10.0% Example with different relative cool gains
It’s the integral time value, that specifies the time
required by the integral term to generate an output 100% -100% =2.0 r.Cga 0.1…10.0
equivalent to the proportional term. When Off the integral OP. H OP. HC 100% =1.0 -100%
=0.5
term is not included in the control algorithm.
t.d. Derivative time d.bnd
It is the time required by the proportional term P to repeat Heat Cool d.bnd
the output provided by the derivative term D. When Off the output output Heat Cool
0% output
derivative term is not included in the control algorithm. 0% output
100% 50% 0%
O.C. Overshooot control PID output 100% 50% 0%
This parameter specifies the span of action of the overshoot PID output
control. Setting lower values (1.00 —> 0.01) the overshoot
generated by a Setpoint change is reduced. The overshoot B - Heat/Cool actions overlapped D - On-Off Cool action
control doesn’t affect the effectiveness of the PID algorithm. d.bnd negative -10.0....0%
Setting 1, the overshoot control is disabled. hy. C
100% -100% 100% On
M.res OP. H OP. HC
Manual reset
This specifies the control output value when PV = SP, in d.bnd
a PD only algorithm (lack of the integral term).
d.err Error Dead Band Heat Cool Heat Cool

0% output output 0% output output Off
Inside this band for (PV - SP), the control output does
not change to protect the actuator 100% 50% 0% 100% 50% 0%
(output Stand-by) PID output PID
d.bnd output
t.c. Control output cycle time
control output It’s the cycle time of the time proportioning Alarm occurances of OP1 - OP2 - OP3 outputs, respectively linked to AL1 - AL2 - AL3
t.c. C
control output. The PID control output is
cool output provided by the pulse width modulation of The relay/SSR output OP1, OP2 and OP3, can be used as alarm outputs only if they are not used as control outputs.
the waveform.
For each alarm is possible to configure: C - The blocking function on start-up
OP. H Control output high limit A - The type and the operationg condition of the alarm D - Loop break or sensor break
control output It specifies the maximum value the control B - The functionality of the alarm acknowledgement
OP.HC
output can be set.
Separate parameters for both heat and cool A- Alarm type and function
cool output
outputs limitation are available. Absolute alarm Deviation alarm Band alarm
S.Out Output safety value On Active SP On Active SP On Active
Off high Off high Off out
Output Value in case of input anomaly.
On On Active On
Off Active Off Off Active
MV.tM low
Travel time hy
low hy hy hy
in
It provides the time required to the valve to go from the
0% position to 100% low range high range - low range + high range low range high range
alarm threshold alarm threshold alarm threshold
MV.hy Minimum step
It specifies the minimum allowed time of activation of B/C- Latching and blocking enable
the output to a valve that produces a sensible effect. It is
related to the deadband of the valve A1L.b AL1, AL2, AL3 Alarm acknowledge function Start-up disabling
latching and blocking The alarm, once occurred, is maintained
d.bnd Dead band A2L.b
For each alarm it is pos- until to the time of acknowledgement. The Ramp down
It is the zone where it is possible to separate or overlap A3L.b sible to select the fol- acknowledge operation is performed by Disable
∆SP
the heat and cool actions. lowing functions: serial communications. SP
After this operation, the alarm leaves On
r.Cga Relative cool gain None the alarm state only when the alarm Off
It permits to adjust the proportional cool action. condition is no longer present. Start-up
latching
blocking Ramp up
Auxiliary both latching and blocking SP
∆SP Disable
In.Sh Input shift On
D- “Loop Break Alarm” LBA or sensor break
This value is added to the measured PV input value. Its effect Off
is to shift the whole PV scale of up to ± 60 digits. LBA delay t.Lba Setting a value between 1 and 9999 sec Start-up
Setting “none” the alarm works as LBA+Sensor ∆SP Threshold = SP±range
The address range is from 1 to 247 and must be unique for the alarm works as Sensor break with break with delay.
each controller on the communications bus to the supervi- immediate action.
sor.
When the cause of the alarm disappears, the alarm status stops.
OP5 Retransmission output (if option installed) Soft-start control output function Input digital filter
St.OP OP 100%
When OP5 output 20 retr = 4-20 Soft-Start value 100%
is present and not mA Value of the control output during the 63,2% PV
configured as con- rtH = P.V.
trol output, it Soft-start activation time.
rt.Lo = 800 St.OP
retransmits rt.Hi = 1200
linearised PV or SP. St.TM Soft-Start activation 0
Soft-start t.Fil Time
time
With rt.Lo greater 4 Time duration (starting from the 0% Time constant, in sec, of the RC input fil-
than rt.Hi it is possi- °C power on) of the Soft-start function. St.tM Time ter applied to the PV input.
ble to obtain a When this parameter is set to
reverse scale. 800 1200 1600
Power-on “inhibited” the filter is bypassed.
3
D3ed1 UK - uso 22-04-2003 12:59 Pagina 6
Special parameters description Table of special function parameters - (if option installed)
In order to have the above functions the product code Timer and Start-Up
digit emust be 2 Mnemonic Factory
For example: mod. D3 3100-2000 code Parameter description Range Unit setting Notes
To improve the instrument performances and to reduce t.Mod Timer/Start-up operation mode see table 3 0
the wiring and installation costs, two special functions t.Act Timer action see table 4 0 tMode ≠ to 1
are available: time Timer setting 1...9999 sec/min 0.5
- Start-up S.P.Sb Standy-By Setpoint SP L...SP H 0 For t.Mod = 7
- Timer t.h.SU Start-Up hold time 0...500 min 1
S.P.SU Start-Up Setpoint SP L...SP H 0
A This functions is disable with Heat/Cool control. 100.0
OP.HS Control output high limit 5.0...100.0 output %
Selecting Timer or Start-up, the Soft-start func-
tion is disabled, therefore the parameters
Start-Up function
St.TM St.OP will not be enabled .
1 To select these two functions to use set the parame- Setting t.Mod to 1 The Start-up function includes three phases:
ter as in table 1: Three parameters are associated to the Start-up func- 1a “Limy” - The control output is limited to the OP.HS
tion:
Timer/Start-Up operating mode 2a “Hold” - The process variable is maintained to the
t.Mod This parameter defines (see table 3): t.h.S.U Start-Up hold time Start-up Setpoint for the time fixed by the
- When the count starts. parameter t.h.S.U
- The state of the control output at the end of the count S.P.S.U Start-Up Setpoint
3rd “Off” - When the t.h.S.U time is elapsed the
2 To select the Start-up function select 1
OP.HS Control output high limit process variable is maintained to the wor-
3 To select the Timer function select the value from 2 king Setpoint.
to 6 and use alarm AL3 (output OP3) configured with noise There are two possibilities:
configuration code q= 0. power-on Setpoint SP
Example: conf. i l m n-o p 0 r A - Start-Up Setpoint SP.SU
lower thant the local
Table 3 PV
Setpoint
th.SU 1 digit th.SU
SP.SU The “Hold” phase starts when
the process variable PV achie-
Timer/Start-up counting mode Output to 0
40 digit ves the SP.SU (with a tole-
Disabled 0
OP= OP.HS rance of 1 digit).
Start-up function 1 with TC = 25%
Counting start time End mode 1sec min. B - Start-Up Setpoint SP.SU ≥
Control mode 2 1 “Limy” 2a “Hold”
a
3a “Off” 1a “Limy” 2a “Hold” 3a “Off” greater or equal to the local
When inside the band
Output to 0 3
Setpoint
Control mode 4 power-on SP.SU
When lauched When the process variable PV
Output to 0 5
noise achieves the local Setpoint
When launched PV 1 digit
Control disabled Output to 0 6 Setpoint SP
(with a tolerance of 1 digit),
40 digit the Start-up function passes
When launched Output to 0 7
stand-by Setpoint OP= OP.HS directly to the “Off” phase.
with TC = 25%
1sec min. If, at the controller power-on, the
a
1 “Limy” 3a “Off” 1a “Limy” 3a “Off”
process variable PV is greater
4 If Timer function is selected it will show the parame-
ter above: than the lowest between the
Whether the process variable, for any reason (e.g. load change), decreases at a
SP.SU and the working
t.Act Timer action OP.HS
value lower than ( - 40 digits), the Start-up function starts again from
By this parameter can be defined:(see table 4) Setpoint , the next phase (“Hold”
- the time units the “Limy” phase.
or “Off”) will be executed instead
- the starting mode When the Start-up is in Hold phase, if the local Setpoint becomes lower than
- the OP3 status when the timer is running. of the “Limy” phase.
the Start-up Setpoint or if the operating mode changes to manual, the Start-
When the timer is not running, the OP3 takes the oppo-
site status up function passes to the “Off” phase.
Timer setting
time Timer counting modes
Timer (1…9999 sec/min.)
A - Counting start time inside the band, end in control B - Counting start time inside the band, end with con-
S.P.SB Stand-by Setpoint mode. trol output forced to zero.
(only for t.Mod = 7)( SP L … SP H )
The time counting starts only when the error is inside a The time counting starts only when the error is inside a
± 1 digit band. The control action is not affected by the ± 1 digit band. At the end, the control output is forced to
Timer function. zero. [1]
Table 4
Timer launch Timer launch
OP3 time t.Mod =2 time t.Mod =3
Time units Starting mode Value Setpoint Setpoint
status [1]
Manual by serial Off 0 ±1 digit ±1 digit
communications On 1 Process band Process band
Seconds variable PV variable PV
Automatic Off 2
at the power on [2] On 3 Output OP Output OP
Manual by serial Off 4
Minutes
communications On 5
Automatic Off 6
at the power on [2] On 7 AL3 AL3
[1] If used by Timer

[2] Using this selection, manual [1] When the Timer is not running the control output is
starting mode is possible too forced to zero, also before the Timer launch.
4
D3ed1 UK - uso 22-04-2003 12:59 Pagina 1
Special function parameters description Technical specifications

Timer function mode Features
Description
(at 25°C T. envir. temp)
C - Counting start time = timer launch time,
end in control mode. By means of the confiurguration tools is possible to choose:
Total - the type of input - the type and functionality of the alarms
configurability - the type of control input - the type of Setpoint
The time counting starts when the timer is - the type of output - control parameter values
launched. The control action is not
affected by the Timer function.
Common A/D converter with resolution of 50.000 points; Update measurement time: 0.2 sec;
Timer launch
time
t.Mod =4 characteristics Sampling time: 0.5 sec; Input bias: - 60…+ 60 digit; input filter: 1…30 sec. OFF = 0
Setpoint 0,25% ± 1 digit (per termoelementi) Between 100…240V~

Accuracy 0,1% ± 1 digit (per mA e mV) the error is minumal
Resistance 2 or 3 wires Max. wire Res:
Process Pt100Ω a 0°C connection
variable PV thermometer 20Ω max (3 wires)
(IEC 751)
(for ∆T: R1+R2 Burnout Sensitivity: 0.35°C/10° E. T.
°C/°F selectable
Output OP must be < 320 Ω) (with any combination) <0.35°C / 10Ω Wire Res.
PV Input
L,J,T,K,S, R, B, N, E,W3,W5 Internal cold junction Line: 150Ω max
(IEC 584) compensation con NTC Input drift:
Thermocouple Rj >10MΩ Error 1°C/20°C ±0.5°C <2µV/°C.Env. Temp
AL3 °C/°F selectable Burnout <5µV / 10Ω Wire Res.
4…20mA,0-20mA Burnout. Engineering units
D - Counting start time = timer launch time, DC input (current) with external shunt 2.5Ω Conf. decimal point position Input drift:
end with control output forced to zero. Rj >10MΩ Init. Scale -999…9999 <0.1% / 20°C Env. Temp.
Full Scale -999…9999 <5µV / 10Ω Wire Res.
DC input (voltage) 10…50mV, 0-50mV (min. range of 100 digits)
The time counting starts when the timer is Rj >10MΩ
launched. At the end, the control output is forced to Digital The closure of the external contact produces Auto/Man mode change, Stored Setpoints activation,
zero. [1] input any of the following actions measure hold . Timer activation (if options installed)
Mode of
Timer launch 1 single or double action P.I.D. loop or ON/OFF with 1, 2 or 3 alarms
time t.Mod =5 operation
Setpoint Algorithm PID with overshoot control or On-off - PID with valve drive algorithm,
for controlling motorised positioners
Proportional band (P) 0.5...999.9%
Process
variable PV Integral time (I) 01...100.0 min
Derivative time (D) 0.01...10.00 min OFF = 0
Output OP
Error dead band 0.1...10.0 digit
Overshoot control 0.01...1.0
AL3 Single action PID algorithm
Manual reset 0.0...100.0%
[1] When the Timer is not running the control output Cycle time (Time proportional only) 1...200 sec
is forced to zero, also before the Timer launch. Control output high limit 10.0...100%
Control mode Soft-start output value 0.1...100.0%
E - No control action during OFF = 0
the counting time. Output safety value 0.0...100.0% (-100.0...100.0% for Heat / Cool)
The time counting starts when the timer is Control output hysteresis 0.1...10.0% On-Off algorithm
launched and the control output is forced to zero. At Dead band -10.0...10.0%
the end, the control action starts.
Relative cool gain 0.1...10.0 Double action
Cycle time (Time proportional only) 1...200 sec PID algorithm
(Heat / Cool)
Timer launch
time
t.Mod =6 Control output high limit 10.0...100.0% with overlap
Setpoint Cool output hysteresis 0.1...10.0%

Process Motor travel time 15...600 sec Valve drive PID algorithm without
variable PV
Motor minimum step da 0.1...5.0% feedback potentiometer
Output OP
AL3 Performed operation

Function Notes
Off On
F - Control action with stand-by Setpoint None — — Not used

during the counting time The value of PV is “frozen” at the time the digital
PV measure hold Normal operation PV is hold input goes to the close state
The time counting starts when the timer is
Set manual mode Automatic Manual
launched and the control action use the Stand-by
Setpoint. At the end, the control action use the 1st stored
working Setpoint. Local 1st SP The permanent closure forces the chosen stored
Setpoint
Standard
Setpoint
value. Setpoint modification is not possible.

The impulsive closure, selects the stored value.
Timer launch
time
t.Mod =7 2nd stored
Local 2nd SP Setpoint modification is allowed.
Setpoint
Setpoint
Process Timer
variable PV
Timer — The impulsive closure is enough to start the Timer
S.P. 2 start
A function is assigned, through the configuration procedure to digital input.
Output OP The configured function is activated when the digital input (free voltage contact or open collector output) is in the On state
(closed).
It is deactivated by setting the input to the Off state (open).
The activation of the function through the digital input has the highest priority than through the keypad or through the seri-
AL3
al communications.
5
D3ed1 UK - uso 22-04-2003 12:59 Pagina 2
Technical specifications Commands

Features Auto/Manual
Description
(at 25°C T. envir. temp)
OP1-OP2 SPST Relay N.O., 2A/250V~ for resistive load The bumpless action is present switching between AUTO,
outputs SSR, 1A/250V~ for resistive load
Too meet the double isolation requirements OP1 and OP2 must have the same load voltage MAN and vice versa with the parameter A.Man .
OP3 output SPST Relay N.O. 2A/150V~ for resistive load AUTO MAN AUTO
100%
OP4 output Logic not isolated: 0/5V-, ±10% 30 mA max Setpoint SP
SP (PV) SP
OP5 output (opt.) Control or PV/SP retr.; Galvanic isolation: 500 V~/1 min; Res. 12bit (0.025%); Accuracy 0.1%; 4/20 mA 750 Ω 15 V max PV Op.r
Hysteresys 0.1...10.% 0 SP = PV
100%output OP OPMAN=OPAUTO
Active high Deviation threshold ± range OP setting Y
Action type OP
Band threshold 0...range
AL1 - AL2 - OP
AL3 Active low Absolute threshold whole range 0 OPAUTO=OPMAN
Alarms Action
Sensor break, Heater break and Loop break detection
Special functions Acknowledge (latching), activation inhibit (blocking) A In case of power failure, the AUTO/MAN status
Connected to Timer or program (if options installed) and the output value remain stored in the
controller memory
Local Up and down ramps 0.1…999.9 digit/min. (OFF=0)
Setpoint Low limit: from low range to high limit
Local plus 2 stored with tracking or Stand-by High limit: from low limit to high range
Timer starting
Automatic start at the power on, Digital inputs or serial comm.s
Timer Setting time: 1…9999 sec/min
Special Stand-by Setpoint: SC.LO <= SP >= SL.HI Depending on the Timer action t.Act selection,
functions there can be two different starting ways:
(option) Start-up Setpoint: SC.LO <= SP >= SL.HI - Automatic at the power on
Start-up Hold time : 0...500 min - Manual by digital inputs or serial communications.
Control output high limit: 5.0...100.0%
One shot Auto tuning The Timer function can be started or stopped any time.
Fuzzy-Tuning The controller selects automatically the best method
one shot according to the process conditions One shot Natural frequency
Auto/Man Output lock
Standard with bumpless function, digital input or serial communications
station
Serial comm.s RS485 isolated, Modbus/Jbus protocol, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bit/sec, 3 wires The outputs are switched to the OFF via serial communications.
Auxiliary
Supply
+24V– ± 20% 30mA max - for external transmitter supply A The outputs lock/unlock is maintained in
case of power failure.
Detection of out of range, short circuit or sensor break with automatic activation of the
Measure input safety strategies and alerts on display
Operational Control output Safety value: -100%…100%
Safety
Parameters Parameter and configuration data are stored in a non volatile memory for an
unlimited time
Outputs lock
Power supply 24V~ (-15% +25%) 50/60Hz e 24V-(dc voltage) (-15% +25%) Power consumption
(PTC protected) 3W max
EN61010-1 (IEC1010-1). installation class 2 (2500V), pollution class 2,
Safety instrument class II
General
characteristics Electromagnetic
compatibility Compliance to the CE standards
Protection Terminal strip IP20
Dimensions Pitch: 22.5 mm - depth: 114.5 mm - with: 53
Serial communications connection example

Configuration
D3
1 2 3 4
Configuration
5 6 7 8 Cd-Rom
D3
RS485
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
For SCADA Local control Warranty

COM ALM
PC with OP30 OP30
operator We warrant that the products will be free from

Autolink
panel defects in material and workmanship for 3 years
D3 - 31 max instruments D3 - 31 max instruments OPR PAR ALM
from the date of delivery.
The warranty above shall not apply for any failure
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
D3 D3 D3 D3 D3
RS485
5
D3
6 7 8 5
D3
6 7 8 5
D3
6 7 8 5
D3
6 7 8 5
D3
6 7 8
RS485 the instructions reported on this manual.
9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
6
5835_60_C_N5
0 7 Contrôle d'Overshoot OC 100
1 30 Limite inférieure consigne SPL 0
2 31 Limite supérieure consigne SPH 1000
3 35 Rampe sur consigne montée SLU 0
4 36 Rampe sur consigne descente SLD 0
5 6 Bande Proportionnelle PB (%) 5
6 8 Temps intégrale Ti (mn) 50
7 9 Temps Dérivée TD (mn) 100
8 14 Valeur seuil d'alarme 3 A3SP 0
10 16 Hystérésis alarme 3 A3HY (%) 5
12 37 Filtre sur Mesure TFiL (sec) 2
13 38 Décallage de Mesure INSH 0
14 33 Limite haute Sortie régul chaude OPH (%) 1000
15 10 Temps de Cycle sortie régul chaude TC (s) 20
16 6 Hystérésis sortie chaude HY (%) 5
17 41 Adresse Comm série Esclave ADDR 5
18 109 Vitesse de comm BAUD 9600
19 108 Protocole de comm PROT ModBus
20 39 Lancement AutoRéglage TUNE Non
21 0 Type signal entrée mesure PV Pt100 échelle -99.9...300.0 °C
22 105 Position Pt décimal SCDD 0
23 104 Unité de la mesure UNIT Celsius
24 0 Type de régulation TOUT ou RIEN avec hystérésis, mode Inverse
25 0 Fonction Alarme 1 AL1 Désactivé
26 0 Fonction Alarme 2 AL2 Désactivé
27 32 Bande morte d'erreur DERR (%) 0
28 27 Valeur régul soft-start STOP (%) 0
29 34 Valeur sortie sécurité SOUT(%) 0
30 28 Durée activation SoftStart STTM (s) 1
31 0 Sortie(s) de régulation Relais
32 106 Valeur basse de l'échelle d'entrée SCLO 0
33 107 Valeur haute de l'échelle d'entrée SCHI 9999
34 110 Campo uscita continua 4-20 mA
35 43 Valeur basse retransmission RTLO 0
36 44 Valeur haute retransmission RTHI 1000
37 113 Code PASS de config 33
40 103 Valeur seuil AL3 Désactivé
41 112 CT primary Hi range 100
42 17 Gain relatif froid RCGA 10
43 18 Hystérésis sortie Froide HYC (%) 5
44 0 Temps dérivé Froid (mn) 100
45 21 Temps de cycle Froid TCC (mn) 20
46 22 Limite haute Sortie régul froide OPHC (%) 1000
47 20 Bande morte chaud-froid DBND 10
48 116 Mode de fonctionnement Timer/Start-up TMOD Désactivée
49 117 Action du Timer TACT SEC-MAN-AL3 OFF
50 45 Consigne de StartUp SPSU 0
51 47 Limite haute sortie StartUp OPHS (%) 1000
52 46 Temps maintien StartUp THSU (mn) 1
53 25 Réglage Durée Timer TIME (mn) 1
54 26 Consigne StandBy de TIMER SPSB 0
55 111 Variable retransmise RTH SP
56 118 Fonction entrée logique 1 IL1 Non utilisée
57 23 Temps de parcours servomoteur MVTM (sec) 60
58 24 Résolution de la sortie servomoteur MVHY (%) 10
59 50 Selection consigne mémorisée Consigne Locale seulement
60 1002 Auto / Man Auto
61 59 Acquittement ou inhibition alarme 1 A1LB Auto
Pge p
5835_60_C_N5
66 101 Remote Set Conf Auto
67 29 Reset Manuel MRES (%) 500
68 54 Ratio de consigne externe RTIO 100
69 55 Décallage de consigne externe BIAS 0
70 51 Valeur Mémoire consigne SP1 0
71 0 Type de consigne SSEL Consigne Locale
72 0 Fonction Alarme 3 AL3 OFF ou affectée au Timer
73 52 Valeur Mémoire consigne SP2 0
74 62 Délai alarme rupture de boucle LBA (sec) 0
75 5 Consigne SP 500
76 3 Sortie 1000
77 63 Position relative de l'instrument Instrument intremédiaire
sur le rail DIN
78 40 Overshoot control beta ratio 5
79 42 Auto tune with bias 0
80 220 ADDREG 221 0
81 221 ADDREG 222 5155
82 222 ADDREG 223 8224
83 223 ADDREG 225 8224
84 224 8224
85 225 ADDREG 226 8224
86 226 ADDREG 227 8224
87 227 ADDREG 228 8224
88 228 ADDREG 229 -1
89 229 ADDREG 230 -1
90 100 Input Offset 0
91 56 Input Span 10000
Pge p
D1ed3-IT-UK-inst 16-09-2008 16:35 Pagina 5
DIN rail mounting

E temperature controller
S E R I E S
with current transformer input
D1 line
ASCON spa
D1 line c
ISO 9 0 0 1 Installation manual • M.I. D1-2/04.05 • Cod. J30-658-1AD1 IE
Installation certified
C
UL US
manual LISTED
Table of contents
- Model code ASCON spa
- Electric safety Via Falzarego 9/11
20021 Baranzate
- Installation kit (Milano) Italy
- Installation Fax +39 02 350 4243
http://www.ascon.it
- Electrical connections e-mail support@ascon.it
General description
Simplified assembly and 1 DIN-rail, EN50022 6 Female connector, with termination Easy to replace even if
connection 2 Sping loaded slide for rail fastening resistor for serial communications powered
5
3 Side connector, build-in, to connect 7 Three Output status leds (red)
one instrument to another (up to 31) 8 Green Status led: 9
10 4 5-pole male connector, with screw - ON: power on
6 11
terminals, for power supply and - flashing: serial communications
4
serial communications bus in progress
5 Four quick polarised connectors with 9 Couple of connector protections
4 screw terminals for I/O 10 Wiring label
7
Common power supply 4 Withdrawable
8
3
1
2
Model code
Mod. D 1 5 B 5 D - E F 0 0
The product code indicates the specific hardware configuration of the instrument, that can be modified by specialized engineers only.
Line D 1
OP1-OP2 outputs B Options D User manual F

Relay - Not fitted 0 None 0 Italian/English (std) 0
Relay - Relay 1 Current transformer (CT) 3 French/English 1
SSR - Not fitted 3 German/English 2
SSR - SSR 5 Special functions E Spanish/English 3
Not fitted 0
Start-up + Timer 2

Please, read carefully these instructions before proceeding with the installation of the I/O module Each set of interconnected controllers requires one
model AD3-KIT/BA.RT.PC.CD kit:
Class II instrument, rear panel mounting. It is important to understand that it’s responsibility of the
This instrument has been designed in compliance with: installer to ensure the compliance of the regulations on
Regulations on electrical apparatus: safety requirements and EMC. Power supply and 5
Couple of connec-
according to regulations on the essential protection This device has no user serviceable parts and requires serial comm.s
4
3
tor protections
requirements in electrical apparatus EN 61010-1 special equipment and specialised engineers. Therefore, a connector 2
1
code AD3/PC
Regulations on Electromagnetic Compatibility: repair can be hardly carried on directly by the user. For code AD3/BA
according to: this purpose, the manufacturer provides technical assis- CD Rom with
tance and the repair service for its Customers. Connector with
- Regulations on RF emissions: configuration
Please, contact your nearest Agent for further information. termination
EN61000-6-3 residential environments, software tool
All the information and warnings about safety and resistor for
EN61000-6-4 industrial environments; code AD3/CD
electromagnetic compatibility are marked with the serial comm.s
- Regulation on RF immunity: B sign, at the side of the note. code AD3/RT
EN61000-6-2 industrial equipment and system.
1
Installation
Dimensions
22.5 mm
0.89 in
99 mm
3.9 in
114.5 mm
4.5 in
6.3 mm
0.25 in
Environmental condition B Suggestion
Operating T Temperature 0...50 °C

conditions
%Rh Relative humidity 5...95% Rh non-condensing
T Temperature > 50 °C Use forced ventilation
Special
conditions
%Rh > 95% RH Warm up
P Conducting atmosphere Use filter
C E
Forbidden
Corrosive atmosphere Explosive atmosphere
condition
Mounting
1 clip the upper part of the
CLICK
instrument on the rail 2
1
2 rotate the instrument down-

wards until the click
Disassembly
1 lower the spring slide by

inserting a flat-blade screw-
driver as indicated
2 turn and lift the instrument

upwards.
2
1

1 After the mounting of instru-
ments on the rail, put them side
by side so that the male side
connector fits into the corre-
2 1 3
sponding female connector
2 After mounting all the instru-

ments side by side insert the
female 5-pole connector with
the termination resistor of the
serial communications into the
50 mm
1.969 in
50 mm
1.969 in
corresponding male connector

4
3 Wire the 5-pole male power
supply and serial communica-
tions connector and insert it in
the corresponding female
connector
4 When assembled insert the con- 3

nector protection on both sides
50 mm
1.969 in
Connectors protection
22.5 x N + 53 mm
2
Terminal connectors and plugs
4 terminal connectors
OP3 TA
A A 1 2 3 4
RS 485
NO IC 5
B
OP1 OP2 4
B 5 6 7 8 NC 3
IC NO NO IC
24 V ~
N 2
C 9 10 11 12 L 1
Female plug Male connector
with termination for power supply DI OP4
resistor for serial and serial
communications communications D 13 14 15 16
bus bus B b A
C
RTD + 24 VDC
D TC OUT
Terminal plugs Power supply and

Features
A-B-C-D communications connectors
Flexible cable section: 0.2...2.5 mm2 0.08...1.5 mm2

(AWG24...AWG12) (AWG28...AWG16)
L Stripped wire 7 mm...0.28 in 7 mm...0.28 in
Negative
screwdriver 0.6 x 3.5 mm
0.4 x 2.5 mm
Tightening torque 0.5...0.6 Nm 0.4...0.5 Nm
Input
PV control input: L-J-K-S-R-T-B-N-E-W thermocouple type
• Connect the wires with the polarity as shown
• Use always compensation cable of the correct type for the
D 13 14 15 16 thermocouple used
• The shield, if present, must be connected to a proper earth.
Line 150Ω max.
PV control input: For Pt100 resistance thermometer - ∆T (2 x Pt100) special

• If a 3 wires system is used, use always cables
Pt100 ∆T (2 x Pt100) of the same section (1mm2 min.) (maximum
line resistance 20 Ω/line)
D 13 14 15 16 D 13 14 15 16
• When using a 2 wires system, use always
cables of the same section (1.5mm2 min.) and
put a jumper between terminals 13 and 14
B b A A B A
AWhen the distance between the controller
and the sensor is 15 m using a cable of 1.5
R2 R1 mm2 section, produces an error on the
R1+R2<320Ω measure of 1°C (1.8°F).
PV control input: for mA, mV PV control input with 2 wires

transducers
Auxiliary power
supply for external
24 V
D 13 14 15 16 D 13 14 15 16
transmitter
- 24Vdc ±20%
- 30mA max.
External
- without short cir-
shunt 4...20 mA cuit protection
mA 2.5Ω
mV External
mA PV
shunt
2.5Ω
Transmitter
PV control input with 3 wires Digital input

transducer • ON
Auxiliary power The input is active
IL
supply for external
24 V
C 9 10 11 12 when the logic

transmitter state is ON, corre-
D 13 14 15 16
- 24Vdc ±20% sponding to the
- 30mA max. contact closed
Isolated
- without short contact • OFF
External circuit protection
shunt The input is inacti-
2.5Ω NPN o.c. ve when the logic
state is OFF, corre-
mA PV TTL o.c.
4...20 mA sponding to the
Trasmettitore
Transmitter contact open
3
Precautions B Example of wiring diagram (Heat/Cool control) Notes B
A Cooling Vac [5]
1 Make sure that the power supply voltage is
the same indicated on the instrument.
All the wiring must comply with the local Fuse
regulations . A 1 2 3 4
Fuse 2A ~T
2 Switch on the power supply only after that all the
OP3
electrical connections have been completed.
The supply wiring should be routed away from Vac
Alarm
[5] 3 In accordance with the safety regulations,
the power cables
Fuse Configuration the power supply switch shall bring the
[6] and Supervision identification of the relevant instrument.
Avoid to use electromagnetic contactors, power
5 RS485 The power supply switch shall be easily
Relays and high power motors nearby. B 5 6 7 8
OP1 OP2 4 accessible from the operator.
Avoid power units nearby, especially if con-
NC 3 Power supply switch
trolled in phase angle . N 4 The instrument is protected with a PTC fuse. In
2
24 Vac case of failure it is suggested to return the
TC 1
Keep the input low voltage sensor wires away IL L instrument to the manufacturer for repair.
from the power lines and the output cables. Female connector,
C 9 10 11 12 Power supply and serial communications
with termination bus male connector 5 To protect the instrument internal circuits use:
If this is not achievable, use shielded cables on resistor for serial
TA - 2 A~ T fuses for Relay outputs (4 A at 120Vac)
the sensor input, with the shield connected to communications line
Heating - 1 A~ T fuses for SSR outputs.
earth Vac D 13 14 15 16
Commands 6 Relay contacts are already protected with

varistors.
Only in case of 24 Vdc inductive

loads, use model A51-065-30D7
varistors (on request).
OP1 - OP2 - OP3 - OP4 ouptut

OP1-OP2-OP3-OP4 output characteristics
Output Type For resistive load or auxiliary circuit breaker
OP1 - OP2 Relay SPST Relay N.O., 2A/250 Vca (4A/120Vac) External fuse 2A~T at 250Vac (4A~T at 120Vac)
OP1 - OP2 SSR 1A/250 Vac External fuse 1A~T
OP3 Relay SPST Relay N.O., 2A/150Vac External fuse 2A~T at 150Vac
OP4 Digital Not isolated: 0...5 Vdc, ±20% 30 mA max.
Single action Single action Double action Alarm output

Relay (SSR) SSR Drive Relay (SSR) / Relay (SSR)
A The relay/SSR output OP1, OP2 and
AL1 load
AL2 load
AL3
Cool load
Heat load
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
load OP3, can be used as alarm outputs

OP4
Load
Vac
only if they are not used as control
C 9 10 11 12
outputs
B 5 6 7 8 B 5 6 7 8 B 5 6 7 8 A 1 2 3 4
OP1 OP1 OP1 OP1 OP2 OP3
Load
Double action Double action

SSR Drive / Relay (SSR)
Power supply bus and serial communication RS485 B
Relay (SSR) / SSR Drive
5
Fuse
Fuse
RS485 Power supply: Switching type with double insulation with

Cool load
Heat load
OP4 OP4 4 incorporated PTC (fuse which can be reset).

9 10 11 12 C 9 10 11 12 3 NC Rated voltage: 24Vca (-25...+12%) 50/60 Hz;
2 N 24Vdc (-15...+25%).
24 Vac Power consumption: 3 W max.
1
L Protection: Incorporated PTC.
B 5 6 7 8 B
Heat load
5 6 7 8
Cool load
OP1 OP2 Serial communication: Passive and galvanically isolated

interface 500Vca/1 min. Conforms to standard EIA RS 485,
Modbus/Jbus protocol
Auxiliary input
For current transformer CT - Not isolated
Jumper for 100 mA
For the measure of the load current secondary
transformer coil
D 1 2 3 4 • Primary coil 10A…100A
• Secondary coil 50mA default
100mA S3 internal jumper selectable
50/100mA
5 Watt burden resistor
TA 0.5Ω for 1A secondary transformer coil
load 10…100A 0.1Ω for secondary transformer coil
~
4
D1ed4-IT-UK-uso 16-09-2008 16:33 Pagina 9
DIN-rail mounting
E temperature controller S E R I E S
with current transformer input
D1 line ASCON spa D1 line c
ISO 9 0 0 1 User Manual • M.I.U. D1-4/08.09 • Cod. J30-478-1AD1 IE
User manual certified C
UL US
LISTED
Table of contents
- Resources
- Model code
- Description and table of standard ASCON spa
Via Falzarego 9/11
parameters 20021 Baranzate
- Description and table of special (Milano) Italy
function parameters Fax +39 02 350 4243
http://www.ascon.it
- Technical specifications e-mail support@ascon.it
Resources Operating mode

D1 Control Alarms
Main universal input

12
PV OP1 1 OP1 OP2 OP3
Single
2 action OP4 OP1 OP2 OP3
Auxiliary input (option) OP2
4 OP1 OP2 OP3
(option)
Double
AUX 5 action OP1 OP4 OP2 OP3
OP3
(option)
6 OP4 OP2 OP1 OP3
Digital input (option)
OP4
IL
Setpoint Special functions Digital input Modbus RS485 Fuzzy tuning with automatic selection
(option) IL function Parameterisation
Supervision
One shot One shot
Auto tuning Natural frequency
Model code
Model Configuration
Mod. D 1 5 B 5 D - E F 0 0 / I L M N - O P Q R The product code indicates the specific hardware coniguration of

Line Basic Accessories the instrument, that can be modified by specialized engineers only
1st part 2nd part
Line D 1
Output OP1-OP2 B Options D User manual F
Relay - Not fitted 0 None 0 Italian/English (standard) 0
Relay - Relay 1 Current transformer (CT) 3 French/English 1
SSR - Not fitted 3 German/English 2
SSR - SSR 5 Special functions E Spanish/English 3
None 0
Start up + Timer 2
Input type and range I L Control mode M Alarm type and function OPQ
TR Pt100 IEC751 -99.9…300.0 °C -99.9…572.0 °F 0 0 ON-OFF reverse action 0 AL1, AL2 and AL3 AL.. 1 23
TR Pt100 IEC751 -200…600 °C -328…1112 °F 0 1 ON-OFF direct action 1 Disabled or used by Timer (AL3 only) 0 0 0
TC L Fe-Const DIN43710 0…600 °C 32…1112 °F 0 2 P.I.D. single reverse action 2 Sensor break/LBA 1 1 1
TCJ Fe-Cu45% Ni IEC584 0…600 °C 32…1112 °F 0 3 P.I.D. single direct action 3 active high 2 2 2
TC T Cu-CuNi -200 …400 °C -328…752 °F 0 4 Linear cool output 4 Absolute
attivo basso 3 3 3
TC K Chromel-Alumel IEC584 0…1200 °C 32…2192 °F 0 5 P.I.D. ON-OFF cool output 5 active high 4 4 4
TC S Pt10%Rh-Pt IEC584 0…1600 °C 32…2912 °F 0 6 double action Water cool output 6 Deviation
attivo basso 5 5 5
TC R Pt13%Rh-Pt IEC584 0…1600 °C 32…2912 °F 0 7 Oil cool output 7 active out 6 6 6
TC B Pt30%Rh Pt6%Rh IEC584 0…1800 °C 32…3272 °F 0 8 Banda
active in 7 7 7
TC N Nichrosil-Nisil IEC584 0…1200 °C 32…2192 °F 0 9 Output configuration Heater Break active during ON output state 8 8 8
TC E Ni10%Cr-CuNi IEC584 0…600 °C 32…1112 °F 1 0 Single action Double action N from CT active during OFF output state 9 9 9
TC NI-NiMo18% 0…1100 °C 32…2012 °F 1 1 Relay Heat Relay, Cool Relay 0
TC W3%Re-W25%Re 0…2000 °C 32…3632 °F 1 2 Heat Relay, Cool SSR Drive 1 Setpoint type R
SSR drive
TC W5%Re-W26%Re 0…2000 °C 32…3632 °F 1 3 Heat SSR Drive, Cool Relay 2 Local only 0
Dc input 0…50mV Engineering units 1 4 Local and 2 tracking stored Setpoint 1
Dc input 10…50mV Engineering units 1 5 Local and 2Stand-by stored Setpoint 2
Custom input range 1 6
1
Standard parameters description Table of standard parameters

Configuration parameters, shown in the Configuration
parameters table, have been divided into groups Mnemonic Factory
with homogeneous functionalities. The Parameter description Range Units Notes
code setting
parameters described hereafter are in the same IL Digital input function IL see table 1 not used
order as they are listed in the parameters table. PStr Instrument position Alone/left side/central/right side Alone
Sc.dd No. of decimals 0...3 0 Linear scales only
Configuration SC.Lo Low range -999...9999 engineer. units Low range
Minimum range 100 digit
Sc.Hi High range -999...9999 engineer. units High range
IL Digital input function Prot Communications protocol Modbus/Jbus Modbus
Table 1 baud Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 baud 9600
O.C.rb Enhanced Overshoot management 0.2...5.0 0.5 P.I.D. only
Not used
PV measure hold Setpoint
Auto/Man Mnemonic Factory
Parameter description Range Units Notes
1st stored Setpoint code setting
2st stored Setpoint A1S.P AL1 alarm threshold PV range engineer. units 0 not enabled if the controller has been
Run Timer A2S.P AL2 alarm threshold PV range engineer. units 0 configured with alarm not active or
A3S.P AL3 alarm threshold PV range engineer. units 0 with sensor break alarm
unit SL. u Setpoint ramp up OFF/0.1...999.9 digit/min inhibited With OFF the new Setpoint is reached
Engineering units
SL. d Setpoint ramp down OFF/0.1...999.9 digit/min inhibited immediately after being entered.
Table 2 SP. L Setpoint low range low range...SP. H engineer. units low range
C (degree Centigrade) A (Ampere) SP. H Setpoint high range S.P L...high range engineer. units high range
°F (degree Fahrenheit) bar SP. 1 1st stored Setpoint PV range engineer. units ----
SP. 2 2nd stored Setpoint PV range engineer. units ----
- None psi
SP Setpoint PV range engineer. units ----
mV (millivolt) Rh
V (Volt) pH Control mode
mA (milliampere) Mnemonic Factory Algorithm
Parameter description Range Units Notes
code setting type
hy Control output hysteresis 0.1...10.00 % PV range 0.5 ON - OFF
Setpoint (SP) tune Tune run/stop Start/stop
P.b. Proportional band 0.5...999.9 % PV range 5.0
A1S.P AL1 threshold t.i. Integral time OFF/0.1...100.0 min 5.0
A2S.P AL2 threshold t.d. Derivative time OFF/0.01...10.00 min 1.00
O.C. Overshoot control 0.01...1.00 1.00 Setting 1 is disabled
A3S.P AL3 threshold M.res Manual reset 0.0...100.0 % ouput 50.0 Without integral time P.I.D.
Alarm occurrences of OP1,OP2 and OP3 outputs, d.err Error dead band OFF/0.01...10.0 digit inhibited
respectively linked to AL1, AL2 and AL3. t.c. Cycle time 1...200 s 20 Time proportional only
The range of the alarm threshold correspond to the OP. H Control output high limit 10.0...100.0 % ouput 100.0
S.Out Control output safety value 0.0...100.0 % ouput 0 -100.0...+100.0 Heat/Cool
whole span and it is not limited by the SP Setpoint span.
dbnd Dead band -10.0...10.0 % ouput 0.5
r.C.G.a Cool relative gain 0.1...10.0 1
SL. u Setpoint ramp up Heat/
hy. C Cool output hysteresis 0.1...10.0 % PV range 0.5 ON/OFF only
Cool
SL. d Setpoint ramp down t.c. C Cool cycle time 1...200 s 20 Time proportional only
OP. HC Cool control output high limit 10.0...100.0 % ouput 100.0 P.I.D. only
This parameter specifies the maximum rate of
A.Man Auto/man selection Auto/Man Auto
change of the SP in digit/min. The SP value is
reached according to the configured rate of change. Alarm and Auxiliary
The new SP value is called "Target SP" (available via Mnemonic Factory
serial communications). code Parameter description Range Units setting Notes
A1hy AL1 hysteresis 0.1...10.0 % range 0.5 The same parameters are available for
Example:
A1LB Alarm Latching and Blocking none/Ltch/Bloc/LtbL none AL2 and AL3 alarms
SP Target Setpoint = 350°C
350°C t.Lba LBA delay OFF / 1...9999 s inhibited OFF = sensor break
St.OP Soft-start output value OFF/0.1...100.0 % ouput 0.5 t.mod = OFF only
Setpoint
change SL. u St.tn Soft-start activation time 1...9999 s 1 ONly if sT.OP different than OFF
t.Fil Filter time costant OFF/1...30 s inhibited
10 digit/minutes in.Sh Input shift OFF/-60...+60 digit inhibited
250°C Addr Communications address 1...247 247
Initial Ht.F.S. CT primary high range OFF/1...200 A 100
Setpoint t
Control mode
0 t = 10 minutes tune Automatic tune p.B. Proportional band
When the parameter is OFF, this function is dis- The Fuzzy Tuning determines automatically the best This parameter specifies the proportional band coefficient
abled and the new Setpoint is reached immedi- method to use to calculate the P.I.D. term, according the that multiplies the error (SP - PV)
ately after being entered. process conditions. t.i. Integral time
Method 1: SP It’s the integral time value, that specifies the time required
Setpoint change
SL. u Setpoint low limit STEP respose by the integral term to generate an output equivalent to the
Tuning start End of the tuning
SL. d operating and proportional term. When OFF the integral term is not includ-
Sepoint high limit
PV variable setting of the new ed in the control algorithm.
Low / high limit of the Setpoint value. calculated terms
t.d. Derivative time
Setpoint Setpoint Control output It is the time required by the proportional term P to repeat the
Low limit High limit output provided by the derivative term D. When OFF the deriva-
Instrument range This type is selected when, at the start of the autotune tive term is not included in the control algorithm.
operation, the PV is far from the Setpoint of more than O.C. Overshooot control
5% of the span. This parameter specifies the span of action of the overshoot con-
This method has the big advantage of fast calculation, with trol. Setting lower values (1.00 —> 0.01) the overshoot generat-
SP. L SP. H a reasonable accuracy in the term calculation. ed by a Setpoint change is reduced. The overshoot control does-
Method 2: Setpoint change n’t affect the effectiveness of the P.I.D. algorithm. Setting 1, the
Setpoint range
Natural frequency overshoot control is disabled.
SP. 1 1st stored SP Tuning start End of the tuning OC.rb
phase and setting of
Enhanced overshoot management
SP. 2 2nd stored SP the new calculated Configuration parameter. Defines a zone across the Setpoint
Values of the two Setpoints, that are activated by terms where the P.I.D. algorithm is not affected by overshoot control.
Control output
mean of digital input or communications parame- Setting range 0.2... 5.0.
ters. If configured with “Tracking”, the previous Default value 0.5.
Local Setpoint value will be lost, when the stored If OC.rb < 1 the non influenced zone is inside the proportio-
This type is selected when the PV is close to the SP
Setpoint is selected. nal band, if OC.rb > 1 the non influenced zone is outside the
Setpoint.
If configured with “Stand-by” the Local Setpoint proportional band
This method has the advantage of a better accuracy in the
value will not be lost, when the Stand-by Setpoint is Reducing the OC.rb value causes higher overshooting effect
term calculation with a reasonable speed calculation.
selected. It will operate again when back to Local. and longer times in reaching the Setpoint.
2
Standard parameters description - follows

OC.rb (continue) Heat/Cool control
Increasing the OC.rb value increases the zone, near the
Setpoint, in which the P.I.D. functions with its natural dina- By a sole P.I.D. control algorithm, the controller handles two different outputs, one of these performs the Heat action, the
mic mode, this reduces the time in reaching the Setpoint. other one the Cool action. It is possible to overlap the outputs.
Setting procedure for OC and OC.rb parameters A - Heat/Cool actions separated C - Cool action adjusting
1 Set O.C. = 1 and OC.rb = 0.5 and observe the process
d.bnd positive 0...10.0% Example with different relative cool gains
behaviour.
2 If overshoot or undershoot is not acceptable, set O.C. = 0.5. =2.0 r.Cga 0.1…10.0
3 If overshoot or undershoot is still not acceptable, redu- 100% -100% 100% =1.0 -100%
OP. H OP. HC =0.5
ce the O.C. value.
4 If there is no overshoot o undershoot, record the time
required by the PV to reach the Setpoint.
5 If the time required by the process variable to reach d.bnd d.bnd
the Setpoint value is too long, gradually increase the Heat Cool Heat Cool
output output output output
value of “OC.rb” (suggested steps = 0.5). 0% 0%
6 If an acceptable time to reach the Setpoint cannot be 100% 50% 0% 100% 50% 0%
obtained with “OC.rb” values up to 2, increase the O.C. PID output PID output
value and repeat the procedure re-starting from item 3.
M.res B - Heat/Cool actions overlapped D - ON-OFF Cool action
Manual reset
This specifies the control output value when PV = SP, in d.bnd negative -10.0....0%
hy. C
a PD only algorithm (lack of the integral term). 100% On
d.err Error Dead Band 100% -100%
OP. H OP. HC
Inside this band for (PV - SP), the control output does not
change to protect the actuator (output Stand-by) d.bnd
t.c. Control output cycle time Heat Cool
t.c. C Heat Cool 0% output output Off
Cool output cycle time output output
It’s the cycle time of the time proportioning control out- 0% 100% 50% 0%
PID output
put. The P.I.D. control output is provided by the pulse 100% 50% 0% d.bnd
width modulation of the waveform. PID output
OP. H Control output high limit Alarm occurances of OP1 - OP2 - OP3 outputs, respectively linked to AL1 - AL2 - AL3
OP.HC Cool output high limit
It specifies the maximum value the control output can be set. The relay/SSR output OP1, OP2 and OP3, can be used as alarm outputs only if they are not used as control outputs.
Separate parameters for both heat and cool outputs limita- For each alarm is possible to configure: A - The type and the operationg condition of the alarm
tion are available. B - The functionality of the alarm acknowledgement
S.Out Output safety value C - The blocking function on start-up
Output Value in case of input anomaly. D - Loop break or sensor break
d.bnd Dead band A - Alarm type and function

It is the zone where it is possible to separate or overlap Absolute alarm Deviation alarm Band alarm
the heat and cool actions. ON Active ON Active SP ON Active
SP
r.Cga OFF high OFF high OFF out
Relative cool gain
It permits to adjust the proportional cool action. ON ON ON
Active Active OFF Active
OFF OFF low
low in
hy hy hy hy
Auxiliary parameters
low range high range - low range + high range low range high range
alarm threshold
In.Sh Input shift alarm threshold alarm threshold
This value is added to the measured PV input value. Its effect
is to shift the whole PV scale of up to ±60 digits.
B/C - Latching and blocking enable
The address range is 1... 247 and must be unique for each con- A1L.b AL1, AL2, AL3 For each alarm it is possible to select Start-up disabling
troller on the communications bus to the supervisor. the following functions:
A2L.b latching and
- none Ramp down
A3L.b blocking - latching Disable
Soft-start control output function ∆SP
- blocking SP
St.OP Soft-Start value - both latching and blocking
ON
Value of the control output during the Soft-start activa- Alarm acknowledge function OFF Start-up
tion time. The alarm, once occurred, is maintained until to the time of acknowledgement.
The acknowledge operation is performed by serial communications. Ramp up
St.TM Soft-Start activation time After this operation, the alarm leaves the alarm state only when the alarm SP
Time duration (starting from the power on) of the Soft- condition is no longer present. ∆SP Disable
start function.
D - “Loop Break Alarm” LBA or sensor break ON
100% OP OFF Start-up
t.Lba LBA delay
∆SP Threshold = SP±range
Setting “none”: the alarm works as Sensor break with immediate action.
Setting a value between 1 and 9999 s: the alarm intervention is delayed; if the
St.OP alarm is caused by a sensor break, the intervention is immediate.
When the cause of the alarm disappears, the alarm status stops.
Soft-start
0%
St.tM Time Input digital filter
Power-on
100% Time constant, in s, of the RC input filter applied to the PV input.
63.2% PV When this parameter is set to “inhibited” the filter is bypassed.
0 Time
t.Fil
3
Special parameters description Table of special function parameters - (if option installed)
- Start-up Timer and Start-Up
- Timer Mnemonic Factory
In order to have the above functions the product code Parameter description Range Units Notes
code setting
digit emust be ! t.Mod Timer/Start-up operation mode see table 3 0
For example: mod. D1 3100-2000 t.Act Timer action see table 4 0 Only for t.Mod ≠ to OFF and 1 ≠ to
time Timer setting 1...9999 s/min 0.5
A These functions are not available when the S.P.Sb Standy-By Setpoint SP L...SP H 0 For t.Mod = 7
instrumen is configured for Heat/Cool control. t.h.SU Start-Up hold time 0...500 min 1
S.P.SU Setpoint di Start-Up SP L...SP H 0
1 To select these two functions to use set the parame- Control output high limit
ter as in table 3: OP.HS 5.0...100.0 % output 100.0
during the Start-Up phase
t.Mod Timer/Start-Up operating mode
This parameter defines (see table 3): Start-Up functions
- When the count starts.
Setting t.Mod to 1 The Start-up function includes three phases:
- The state of the control output at the end of the count
Three parameters are associated to the Start-up function: 1a “Limy” - The control output is limited to the OP.HS
2 To select the Start-up function select the code &
3 To select the Timer function select the value bet-
t.h.S.U Start-Up hold time 2a “Hold” - The process variable is maintained to the
ween 2...6 and use alarm AL3 (output OP3) configu- Start-up Setpoint S.P.S.U for the time
red with configuration code q= 0. S.P.S.U Start-Up Setpoint fixed by the parameter t.h.S.U
Example: conf. i l m n-o p 0 r
OP.HS Control output high limit 3rd “OFF” - When the t.h.S.U time is elapsed the
Table 3 process variable is maintained to the wor-
king Setpoint.
Timer/Start-up counting mode Value
Disabled 0 Notes:
Power-ON 1 - The “Hold” phase starts when
Start-up function 1
Conting start time End mode the process variable PV achieves
Control mode 2 Setpoint SP the SP.SU (with a tolerance
When inside the band a) Light intensity
Output to 0 3 disturbance of 1 digit).
Control mode 4 SP.SU 2 - Whether the process variable,
When launched th.SU 1 digit th.SU
Output to 0 5 PV for any reason (e.g. load chan-
When launched with ge), decreases at a value lower
Control mode 6 40 digit than ( OP.HS - 40 digits), the
start-up and control S.P.SU -40 digit
When launched with Start-up function starts again
Control mode 7 OP= OP.HS b) heavy intensity
stand-by Setpoint with TC = 25% disturbance from the “Limy” phase.
1s min.
3 - When the Start-up is in Hold
4 If Timer function is selected it will show the parame- 1 “Limy” 2 “Hold” 3 “Off” 1 “Limy” 2 “Hold” 3 “Off” phase, if the local Setpoint
ter above: Start-Up at Power ON Start-Up caused by “b” disturbance
becomes lower than the
t.Act Timer action Start-up Setpoint SP.SU
By this parameter can be defined:(see table 4) or if the operating mode
- the time units changes to manual, the
- the starting mode Start-up function passes to
- the OP3 status when the timer is running. the “OFF” phase.
When the timer is not running, the OP3 takes the
opposite status
Timer setting
Timer counting modes
time
Timer (1…9999 s/min.) A - Counting start time inside the band, B - Counting start time inside the band,
end in control mode end with control output forced to zero
S.P.SB Stand-by Setpoint
The time counting starts only when the error is inside a The time counting starts only when the error is inside a ±1
(only for t.Mod = 7)( SP L … SP H )
±1 digit band. The control action is not affected by the digit band. At the end, the control output is forced to zero [1].
Table 4 Timer function.
Timer launch Timer launch
Time
units Strating mode
AL3
status [1] Value time t.Mod =2 time t.Mod =3
Setpoint Setpoint
Manual through serial OFF 0
communications ON 1 ±1 digit
Seconds Process ±1 digit band Process band
OFF 2
Automatic at power ON [2] variable PV variable PV
ON 3
Manual through serial OFF 4 Output OP Output OP
communications ON 5
Minutes
OFF 6
Automatic at power ON [2]
ON 7 AL3 AL3
[1] If used by Timer
[2] Using this selection, manual starting mode is possi- [1] When the Timer is not running the OP control output
ble too (through the serial communications port) is forced to zero, also before the Timer launch.
4
Special function parameters description Technical specifications

Timer function mode Features Description
(at 25°C env. temp.)
C - Counting start time = timer launch time, By means of the confiurguration tools is possible to choose:
end in control mode. Total - the type of input - the type and functionality of the alarms
configurability - the type of control input - the type of Setpoint
The time counting starts when the timer is - the type of output - control parameter values
launched. The control action is not
affected by the Timer function. Common A/D converter with resolution of 50,000 points; update measurement time: 0.2 s;
characteristics sampling time: 0.5 s; input bias: - 60…+ 60 digit; input filter: 1…30 s. OFF = 0
Timer launch
time
t.Mod =4 0.25% ±1 digit (for T/C and Pt100) Between 100…240Vac
Accuracy
0.1% ±1 digit (for mA and mV) the error is minimal
Setpoint
Resistance Max. wire Res:
Pt100Ω à 0°C 2 or 3 wires connection
thermometer 20Ω max.: (3 wires)
Process (IEC 751) Burnout (with any
variable PV (for ∆T: R1+R2 Input drift: 0.35°C/10°C Env. temp.
°C/°F selectable combination)
must be <320Ω) <0.35°C/10Ω Wire Resistance
Output OP Compensation interne Line: 150Ω max.
PV Input L, J, T, K, S, R, B, N, E,
soudure froide Input drift:
Thermocouple W3, W5 (IEC 584)
Erreur 1°C/20°C ±0.5° <2µV/1°C Env. temp.
°C/°F selectable
AL3 Rupture capteur <5µV/10Ω Wire Resistance
0…20mA, 4…20mA Burnout. Engineering units
DC input current with external shunt 2.5Ω Decimal point position
D - Counting start time = timer launch time, Input drift:
Rj >10MΩ selectable by the user
end with control output forced to zero. <0.1%/20°C Env. Temp.
10...50mV, 0...50mV Init. Scale -999…9999 <5µV/10Ω Wire Resistance
DC input voltage Full Scale -999…9999
The time counting starts when the timer is Rj >10MΩ
(min. range of 100 digits)
launched. At the end, the control output is forced
to zero. [1] 50 or 100mA Current visualization via serial comm.s 10...200 A
Auxiliary input CT current
input hardware With 1A resolution
transformer
Timer launch selection And heather break alarm
time t.Mod =5 The closure of the external contact produces any of the following actions: Auto/Man mode change,
Setpoint Digital input
Stored Setpoints activation, measure hold. Timer activation (if options installed)
Mode of
operation 1 single or double action P.I.D. loop or ON/OFF with 1, 2 or 3 alarms
Process
variable PV
P.I.D. with overshoot control or ON-OFF
Algorithm
Output OP P.I.D. with valve drive algorithm, for controlling motorised positioners
Proportional band (P) 0.5…999.9%
Integral time (I) 0.1…100.0 min
AL3 Derivative time (D) 0.01…10.00 min OFF = 0
Error dead band 0.1…10.0 digit
[1] When the Timer is not running the control output Overshoot control 0.01…1.00
is forced to zero, also before the Timer launch. Manual reset 0.0…100.0%
E - No control action during Cycle time Simple action
1…200 s
the counting time. Control mode (time proportional only) P.I.D. algorithm
Control output high limit 10.0…100.0%
The time counting starts when the timer is Soft start output value 0.1…100.0% OFF = 0
launched and the control output is forced to zero.
Output safety value 0.0…100.0% (-100.0…100.0% for Heat/Cool)
At the end, the control action starts.
Control output hysteresis 0.1…10.0% ON-OFF algorithm
Timer launch
time
t.Mod =6 Dead band -10.0…10.0%
Relative cool gain 0.1…10.0 Double action
Setpoint Cycle time P.I.D. algorithm
1…200 s
Process (time proportional only) (Heat/Cool)
variable PV
Cool output high limit 10.0…100.0% with overlap
Cool output hysteresis 0.1…10.0%
Output OP

AL3
Performed operation
Function associated to the
IL logical input Open Closed Notes
F - Control action with stand-by Setpoint
during the counting time None Not used
— —
The time counting starts when the timer is Normal The value of PV is “frozen” at the time the digital input
PV measure hold PV is hold
launched and the control action use the Stand-by operation goes to the close state
Setpoint. At the end, the control action use the Set manual mode Automatic Manual
working Setpoint.
Timer launch t.Mod =7 1st stored Setpoint Local 1st SP The permanent closure forces the chosen stored value.
time Standard Setpoint modification is not possible.
Setpoint Setpoint The impulsive closure, selects the stored value. Setpoint
2nd stored Setpoint Locale 2nd SP modification is allowed.
Process
variable PV
S.P. 2 Timer start
Timer — The impulsive closure is enough to start the Timer
(RUN)
Output OP A function is assigned, through the configuration procedure to digital input.
The configured function is activated when the digital input (free voltage contact or open collector output) is in the ON state (closed).
It is deactivated by setting the input to the OFF state (open).
AL3 The activation of the function through the digital input has the highest priority than through the keypad or through the seri-
al communications.
5
Technical specifications Current trasformer input (optional)

Features With CT option, it is possible to set an alarm threshold.
(at 25°C Env.Temp.) Description
The setting can be done by means the 8 or 9 configuration
SPST Relay N.O., 2A/250Vac for resistive load (4A at 120 Vac) index of the codes O, P or Q (see page 1). It is possible to set
OP1-OP2
SSR, 1A/250Vac for resistive load one of the alarms (see page 1) to have an alarm when, dur-
outputs
Too meet the double isolation requirements OP1 and OP2 must have the same load voltage ing the ON time of the time proportional output, the load cur-
OP3 output SPST Relay N.O. 2A/150Vac for resistive load rent is less then the specified threshold (index 8), or during
OP4 output Logic not isolated: 0/5Vdc, ±10% 30 mA max. the OFF time there is a value > 3% of full scale load current.
The alarm condition must be longer than 120 ms to set
Hysteresis 0.1…10.0%
the alarm. By the parameter
Active high Deviation threshold: ± range
Action
Band threshold: 0…range
AL1 - AL2 - AL3 Active low type Ht.F.S. CT primary high range
Alarms Action Absolute threshold: whole range
the load current display can be adapted to the trans-
Sensor break, Heater break and Loop break detection
Special former characteristics. (OFF means disabled)
functions Acknowledge (latching), activation inhibit (blocking)
Connected to Timer or program (if options installed) During the OFF time the parameter t.Cur latches
Local Up and down ramps 0.1…999.9 digit/min. (OFF=0) the last on time current value.
Setpoint Local plus 2 stored with Low limit: from low range to high limit
tracking or Stand-by High limit: from low limit to high range Example: CT input on OP1, alarm on AL2 during on time
Automatic start at the power on, Digital inputs or serial (configuration digit p = 8 , see page 21)
Timer Comm.s Setting time: 1…9999 s/min
Special Stand-by Setpoint: SC.LO <= SP >= SL.HI 120 ms 120 ms
functions
(option) Start-up Setpoint: SC.LO <= SP >= SL.HI OP1 ON OFF ON
Start-up Hold time: 0...500 min t.Cur
Control output high limit: 5.0...100.0%
A2s.p
Fuzzy-Tuning The controller selects automatically
One shot Auto tuning
one shot the best method according
One shot Natural frequency
to the process conditions
3%
Auto/Man Standard with bumpless function, digital input or
station serial communications
Serial comm.s RS485 isolated, Modbus/Jbus protocol, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bit/s, 3 wires AL2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Auxiliary Supply +24Vdc ±20% 30mA max. - for external transmitter supply
Detection of out of range short circuit or sensor break Commands

Measure input
with automatic activation of the safety strategies
Operational
Control output Safety value: -100…100% Auto/Manual
Safety
Parameters Parameter and configuration data are stored in a
The bumpless action is present switching between AUTO,
output lock non volatile memory for an unlimited time
power supply 24Vac (-25...+12%) 50/60Hz and Power consumption MAN and vice versa with the parameter A.Man .
(PTC protected) 24Vdc (-15...+25%) 3W max.
AUTO MAN AUTO
Safety EN61010-1 (IEC1010-1) installation class 2 (2.5kV), pollution class 2, 100%
instrument class II Setpoint SP
SP (PV) SP
Electromagnetic PV Op.r
General Compliance to the CE standards
characteristics compatibility 0 SP = PV
UL and cUL approval File 176452 100%output OP OPMAN=OPAUTO
Protection OP setting Y
Terminal strip IP20 OP
Dimensions Pitch: 22.5 mm - depth: 114.5 mm - width: 53 OP
0 OPAUTO=OPMAN
Weight 159 g approx.
A In case of power failure, the AUTO/MAN status

and the output value remain stored in the
controller memory
Timer starting
Depending on the Timer action t.Act selection,
Serial communications connection example there can be two different starting ways:
- Automatic at the power on
D1 Configuration - Manual by digital inputs or serial communications.
Configuration The Timer function can be started or stopped any time.
Cd-Rom
RS485
Output lock
The outputs are switched to the OFF via serial communications.
A The outputs lock/unlock is maintained in

case of power failure.
For SCADA Local control
PC with OP35 Warranty
Autolink operator
panel We warrant that the products will be free from
D1 - 31 max. instruments D1 - 31 max. instruments
defects in material and workmanship for 3 years
from the date of delivery.
RS485 RS485 The warranty above shall not apply for any failure
the instructions reported on this manual.
6
5835_60_C_N6
7 Contrôle d'Overshoot OC 100
30 Limite inférieure consigne SPL 0
31 Limite supérieure consigne SPH 3000
35 Rampe sur consigne montée SLU 0
36 Rampe sur consigne descente SLD 0
6 Bande Proportionnelle PB (%) 20
8 Temps intégrale Ti (mn) 8
9 Temps Dérivée TD (mn) 0
37 Filtre sur Mesure TFiL (sec) 2
38 Décallage de Mesure INSH 0
33 Limite haute Sortie régul chaude OPH (%) 1000
10 Temps de Cycle sortie régul chaude TC (s) 1
6 Hystérésis sortie chaude HY (%) 20
39 Lancement AutoRéglage TUNE Non
0 Type signal entrée mesure PV Pt100 échelle -99.9...300.0 °C
105 Position Pt décimal SCDD 0
104 Unité de la mesure UNIT Celsius
0 Type de régulation P.I.D simple action, mode Inverse
0 Fonction Alarme 1 AL1 Désactivé
0 Fonction Alarme 2 AL2 Désactivé
32 Bande morte d'erreur DERR (%) 0
27 Valeur régul soft-start STOP (%) 0
34 Valeur sortie sécurité SOUT(%) 0
28 Durée activation SoftStart STTM (s) 1
0 Sortie(s) de régulation Relais
106 Valeur basse de l'échelle d'entrée SCLO 0
107 Valeur haute de l'échelle d'entrée SCHI 9999
110 Campo uscita continua 0-20 mA
43 Valeur basse retransmission RTLO 0
44 Valeur haute retransmission RTHI 9999
103 Valeur seuil AL3 Désactivé
112 Intensit‚ maxi (A) du TI 100
17 Gain relatif froid RCGA 10
18 Hystérésis sortie Froide HYC (%) 5
0 Temps dérivé Froid (mn) 100
21 Temps de cycle Froid TCC (mn) 20
22 Limite haute Sortie régul froide OPHC (%) 1000
20 Bande morte chaud-froid DBND 10
116 Mode de fonctionnement Timer/Start-up TMOD Désactivée
117 Action du Timer TACT 0. KB-OFF-SEC
45 Consigne de StartUp SPSU 0
47 Limite haute sortie StartUp OPHS (%) 1000
46 Temps maintien StartUp THSU (mn) 1
25 Réglage Durée Timer TIME (mn) 1
26 Consigne StandBy de TIMER SPSB 0
111 Variable retransmise RTH PV
118 Fonction entrée logique 1 IL1 Non utilisée
23 Temps de parcours servomoteur MVTM (sec) 60
24 Résolution de la sortie servomoteur MVHY (%) 10
1002 Auto / Man Auto
59 Acquittement ou inhibition alarme 1 A1LB Auto
Pge p
5835_60_C_N6
101 Remote Set Conf Auto
29 Reset Manuel MRES (%) 500
54 Ratio de consigne externe RTIO 100
55 Décallage de consigne externe BIAS 0
51 Valeur Mémoire consigne SP1 0
0 Fonction Alarme 3 AL3 OFF ou affectée au Timer
52 Valeur Mémoire consigne SP2 0
62 Délai alarme rupture de boucle LBA (sec) 0
5 Consigne SP 1070
3 Sortie 1000
63 Position relative de l'instrument Instrument intremédiaire sur
le rail DIN
49 T. Curr 0
1012 (O.lock) - Outputs lock/unlock Active
40 (O.C.r.b.) - Overshoot Control1 relative band 5
42 (At.b) - Auto tume with bias 0
220 Input Offset (Only read) 0
221 Input Span (Only read) 5150
222 ADDREG 223 8224
223 ADDREG 224 8224
224 ADDREG 225 8224
225 ADDREG 226 8224
226 ADDREG 227 8224
227 ADDREG 228 8224
228 ADDREG 229 -1
229 ADDREG 230 -1
100 Input Offset (Read Only) 0
56 Input Span (Read Only) 10000
Pge p







PIGNAT S.A.
6 rue Calmette BP11 Date de création : 28/12/2010
69 741 GENAS cedex France
Tél. : 33 478 905 003 Document N° : MIUTILAPPLI-DALLE-
Fax :33 478 906 388 A.doc
E-mail : pignat@pignat.com
Manual de utilización
de la pantalla táctil
A Création SM SM UTILE
Indice Action Rédaction Vérification Etat
Version
1
PIGNAT s.a. 6 Rue Calmette BP 11 69741 GENAS France
Document N° MIUTILAPPLI-DALLE-A.doc
Liste des modifications
Indice Date Page Modifications et motifs
Version
A 28/12/2010 9 CREATION DU DOCUMENT
2
Manual de utilizacion pantalla táctil :
Ejemplo : UNIDAD DE ABSORPCION/DESORPCION »
SUMARIO
1. Acceso al sinóptico 5
1. Utilización de las pantallas de control 6
2. Acceso a los parámetros asegurados 6
3. Pantalla Estado Alarmas y límites máximos 7
4. Acceso et Utilización de los históricos 8
5. Visualización de la pantalla táctil de un PC 9
3
Esta pantalla táctil tiene por objetivo:
- de poder visualizar las distintas medidas asociadas a esta instalación,
- de poder modificar los distintos parámetros de conducta,
- de ver graficos históricas/tiempo real y poder exportar bajo un formato
compatible Excel los datos historiados
A la puesta en marcha de la aplicación, la pantalla Inicial aparace, da las informaciones

genérales asociadas al planta piloto.
4
1. Acceso al sinóptico
Tocar sobre el “Sinoptico del equipo” en la página inicial para acceder al sinoptico. La
ventana siguiente se abre:
Parametros Clientes
Accessibilidad
Parametros de alarmas
Botón de acceso a los

parametros de control
Boton de acceso al
historico
El sinoptico permite ivisualizar el conjunto de los parámetros:

- Medidas en verde
- Consignas en amarillo
- Salidas del controlador en rojo.
Permite también modificar los valores de consigna directamente a partir de la pantalla

principal para los siguientes cierres: TIC04, TIC05, TIC06, LIC01.
En este ejemplo, las bombas de alimentación y las calefacciones se controlan a partir de la

caja eléctrica mediante los pulsadores de mando. Sólo el estado de marcha es resescrito sobre
la pantalla táctil.
5
1. Utilización de las pantallas de control
El acceso a las pantallas de control se hace apretando el boton de "reglaje de parametros".
Detalle de parámetros :
Boton AUTO/MANU : Boton TUNE : permite un

Eligir el modo de Auto réglaje de los PID cuando
Funcionamiento del el controlador es un modo AUTO
controlador
Medida Banda proporcional (P) : en
% de la escala total de medida
Consigna
Tiempo de integral(I) :en
minuto
Salida del controlador Tiempo de derivada (D) : en
minuto
2. Acceso a los parámetros asegurados
Los parámetros de alarma, los PID y los autorreglajes son accesibles en modo INGENIERO.
La pantalla siguiente permite conectarse a este método con la contraseña 4000.
Los parámetros PID son accesibles en método TÉCNICO.

La pantalla siguiente permite conectarse a este método con la contraseña 1111.
Al nivel OPERADOR, solamente los elementos de conducta esenciales son accesibles

(consignas, salida AUTO MANU,….)
6
3. Pantalla Estado Alarmas y límites máximos
Los límites máximos de alarma son modificables con la pantalla en modo INGENIERO.
Se encuentran también el estado de las alarmas y el estado de los actuadores.
7
4. Acceso et Utilización de los históricos
Los historicos permiten visualizar las distintas medidas registradas en el día de manipulación.
Éstos son accesibles tocando la tecla “Grafico”.
La pantalla siguiente permite entonces seleccionar un pre tipo de antecedentes configurado.
Ejemplo de histórico :
Este gráfico permite la visualización de las seis temperaturas; TI1, TI2, TI3, TI7, DPT1 ET
PT1. Corresponde a 60 mines de visualización, por tramo de 5 min.
8
Visualización de medida :
Un cursor vertical permite imaginar a cada momento seleccionado las distintas medidas del
gráfico. Para modificar la posición del cursor, Apoyando en otra zona del gráfico.
Visualización de las diferentes Escalas :

Tocando sobre sobre las medidas asociadas, la escala del gráfico oscila automáticamente
sobre el sensor seleccionado.
Volver de nuevo sobre una manipulación previa:

Es posible indicar los graficos de los días previos a través del menú que desenrolla (arriba y a
la derecha) sobre un límite de 7 días.
Exportación de los datos sobre memoria USB:

Las teclas “TODO” y “1 día” permiten la protección de los datos al formato “csv” sobre una
memoria USB, elegir entre: salvaguardar los datos del día en curso o todos los datos
registrados en la memoria de la pantalla táctil desde su alimentación (7 días como máximo).
De manera práctica, es necesario insertar una memoria USB en frente del panel de control. A
continuación, esperar que la pantalla táctil detecta la memoria USB e indica el siguiente
mensaje: “USB Disk/SDMMC card plugin”. Una vez indicado el mensaje, elegir “TODO” o
“1 Día”, al indicador verde se enciende el tiempo de la transferencia, una vez apagado la
memoria USB puede desconectarse.
5. Visualización de la pantalla táctil de un PC

Se proporciona un cable red con la unidad (se guarda en el gabinete). Permite conectar la
pantalla táctil a la carta red del PC.
Instalar sobre la PC el software VNCVIEWER (proporcionado con el manual de la unidad).

Instalar sobre la PC el software las librerías JAVA (proporcionado en el manual de la unidad).
Comprobar que la parametrización de su tarjeta red esté en método “Dirección IP Fija” con
dirección 192.168.69.60 (por ejemplo).
Etapa N°1
Abrir “Internet Explorer” y seguir la dirección IP del MMI: http://192.168.69.2, apretar en
“OK”
Etapa N°2 :
Una ventana se abre, en “server” escribir la dirección IP del MMI: 192.168.69.2.
Etapa N°3
Una 2nda pantalla se abre, entra la contraseña parametrada en el pupitre MMI (111111).
Una recopia de la pantalla del MMI se visualiza sobre la pantalla del PC, si volvemos a entrar
en una carta a partir del PC, la pantalla del MMI es modificada y vice versa. Se pueden ahora
encargar el API a traves de la PC o el MMI casisimultáneamente.
9
Ejemplo de conexión via Internet Explorer:
10
Classe B
Classe A
1/3 din
1/5 din
1/10 din
possibilité pt 1000
T°
Classe B Classe A 1/3 DIN 1/5 DIN 1/10 DIN
(C°)
+/-
+/- +/- ° +/- +/- ° +/- +/- ° +/- +/- ° +/-
ohm
°C C ohms C ohms C ohms C ohms
s
-200 1.30 0.56 0.55 0.24 0.44 0.19 0.26 0.11 0.13 0.06
-100 0.80 0.32 0.35 0.14 0.27 0.11 0.16 0.06 0.08 0.03
0 0.30 0.12 0.15 0.06 0.10 0.04 0.06 0.02 0.03 0.01
100 0.80 0.30 0.35 0.13 0.27 0.10 0.16 0.05 0.08 0.03
200 1.30 0.48 0.55 0.20 0.44 0.16 0.26 0.10 0.13 0.05
300 1.80 0.64 0.75 0.27 0.60 0.21 0.36 0.13 0.18 0.06
400 2.30 0.79 0.95 0.33 0.77 0.26 0.46 0.16 0.23 0.08
500 2.80 0.93 1.15 0.38 0.94 0.31 0.56 0.19 0.28 0.09
600 3.30 1.06 1.35 0.43 1.10 0.35 0.66 0.21 0.33 0.10
650 3.60 1.13 1.45 0.46 1.20 0.38 0.72 0.23 0.36 0.11
700 3.80 1.17
800 4.30 1.28
850 4.60 1.34
4
Reductores de presión inclinados
CALEFFI
serie 5330
01024/14 E
ACCREDITED
ISO 9001 FM 21654 ISO 9001 No. 0003
Función
Los reductores de presión son dispositivos que, instalados en la

red hídrica privada, reducen y estabilizan la presión de acometida,
que en general es demasiado alta y variable para el
funcionamiento correcto de los sistemas domésticos.
La serie 533. está realizada para pequeñas instalaciones, por

ejemplo en apartamentos, y como órgano de protección del
acumulador, donde tienen gran importancia las dimensiones y la
ausencia de ruido.
Gama de productos
Serie 5330 Reductor de presión inclinado medidas 1/2” y 3/4” H

Serie 5331 Reductor de presión inclinado medida 3/4” M x 3/4” H con tuerca
Serie 5332 Reductor de presión inclinado con manómetro medidas 1/2” y 3/4” H
Serie 5334 Reductor de presión inclinado con conexión para manómetro medidas 1/2” y 3/4” H
Serie 5336 Reductor de presión inclinado medidas Ø 15 y Ø 22 para tubo de cobre
Serie 5337 Reductor de presión inclinado con conexión para manómetro medidas Ø 15 y Ø 22 para tubo de cobre
Serie 5338 Reductor de presión inclinado con manómetro medidas Ø 15 y Ø 22 para tubo de cobre
Características técnicas Prestaciones

Presión máxima de entrada: 16 bar
Materiales Campo de calibración presión de salida: 1÷6 bar
Cuerpo: Tarado de fábrica: 3 bar
- Serie 5330/1/2/4; latón EN 12165 CW617N, cromado Temperatura máxima de servicio: 40°C
- Series 5336/7/8; aleación antidezincificación Escala de presión del manómetro: 0÷10 bar
EN 12165 CW602N, cromado Fluido utilizable: agua
Tapa: PA66GF30
Eje: aleación antidezincificación EN 12165 CW602N Conexiones
Cartucho: POM Conexiones principales: ver gama de productos
Componentes internos: latón EN 12165 CW617N Conexión para manómetro: 1/4” H
Membrana: NBR
Juntas: NBR
Filtro: acero inoxidable
Dimensiones Principio de funcionamiento
El funcionamiento del reductor de presión se basa en el equilibrio de dos fuerzas

contrapuestas:
1 El empuje del resorte hacia la apertura de la sección de paso
2 El empuje de la membrana hacia el cierre de la sección de paso
Funcionamiento con suministro

Cuando se abre una salida de agua, la fuerza del resorte supera la fuerza contraria
ejercida por la membrana, el obturador baja y abre el paso del agua.
Cuanto más aumenta la demanda de agua, tanto más disminuye la presión debajo de
la membrana, lo que permite un flujo mayor de líquido a través de la sección de paso.
4 6 4 6
2 8 2 8
0 bar 10 0 bar 10
Funcionamiento sin suministro

Cuando las salidas de agua están completamente cerradas, la presión aguas abajo
aumenta y empuja la membrana hacia arriba.
Como consecuencia, el obturador cierra la sección de paso manteniendo la presión
constante en el valor calibrado.
Si la fuerza ejercida por la membrana supera aun mínimamente la del resorte, el
dispositivo se cierra.
4 6 4 6
2 8 2 8
0 bar 10 0 bar 10
Características constructivas Funcionamiento silencioso
La amplia cámara ubicada a la salida de la válvula de reducción
Membrana conformada determina una zona de baja velocidad. Esta característica
La membrana tiene una forma especial que asegura una disminuye el ruido generado por la reducción del paso de agua
regulación más precisa al variar la presión aguas abajo. Esto que se produce al bajar la presión.
también garantiza mayor duración, puesto que el diafragma resiste
mejor a los cambios bruscos de presión y al envejecimiento por
desgaste. Tamaño reducido
La configuración inclinada hace que los reductores serie 533.
ocupen menos espacio, una particularidad muy importante para el
montaje en instalaciones domésticas.
Materiales antiadherentes
El soporte central ❶ , que
contiene las partes móviles,
está realizado en material
plástico con bajo coeficiente
de adherencia. Esta solución
minimiza la formación de ❶
depósitos calcáreos, que son
la causa principal de
problemas de funcionamiento.
Acoplamiento con el grupo de seguridad para acumulador

El modelo serie 5331 está específicamente diseñado para ser
acoplado con el grupo de seguridad para acumuladores Caleffi
serie 5261. La tuerca móvil de 3/4” facilita el montaje directo aguas
arriba del grupo de seguridad.
Cartucho extraíble
El cartucho interno de los reductores Caleffi serie 533 se puede
extraer para efectuar las operaciones periódicas de limpieza y
mantenimiento.
CALEFFI
Homologaciones
Los reductores de presión están homologados según las normas
WRAS del Reino Unido y ACS francesas.
Características hidráulicas Para realizar un dimensionamiento correcto, proceda del
siguiente modo:
· Calcule el caudal total sumando los caudales

característicos de todos los aparatos instalados.
Ejemplo:
Vivienda con 1 cuarto de baño

1 bidé G = 6 l/min
1 ducha G = 9 l/min
1 lavabo G = 6 l/min
1 inodoro con mochila G = 6 l/min
1 fregadero de cocina G = 12 l/min
1 lavavajillas G = 12 l/min
Gtot = 51 l/min
Nº de aparatos = 6
· Calcule el caudal de diseño mediante la tabla de

coeficientes de simultaneidad (utilice la correspondiente a
10 aparatos).
Ejemplo:
Gdis = Gtot · % = 51 · 41 % = 21 l/min
Al dimensionar los reductores, se aconseja mantener la

velocidad del flujo entre 1 y 2 m/s para evitar ruidos en las
tuberías y un desgaste rápido de los aparatos y grifos.
· En el gráfico 1, partiendo del caudal de diseño, determine

el diámetro del reductor teniendo en cuenta que la
velocidad ideal está comprendida entre 1 y 2 m/s (franja
azul).
Ejemplo:
para Gdis = 21 l/min se elige el diámetro de 1/2”

(vea las indicaciones en el gráfico 1)
· En el gráfico 2, también a partir del caudal de diseño,

determine la caída de presión en la intersección con la
Condiciones de referencia: Presión de entrada = 6 bar
Presión de salida = 4 bar
curva del diámetro escogido anteriormente (la presión
aguas abajo disminuye en un valor igual a la caída de
presión, respecto a la presión de calibración con caudal
Dimensionamiento nulo).
Para facilitar la elección del diámetro correcto, a

continuación se indican los caudales característicos de los Ejemplo:
aparatos más utilizados en las instalaciones de agua.
para Gdis = 21 l/min 1/2” Dp = 0,8 bar
Tabla de caudales característicos

(vea las indicaciones en el gráfico 2)
Bañera, fregadero de cocina, lavavajillas 12 l/min
Ducha 9 l/min
Caudales aconsejados
Lavabo, bidé, lavadora, inodoro con mochila 6 l/min
A continuación se indica el caudal de agua para cada
Para evitar el sobredimensionamiento del reductor y de las
diámetro con una velocidad media de 1,5 m/s.
tuberías, se debe utilizar un coeficiente de simultaneidad
apropiado. En general, cuantas más salidas tiene una
instalación, menor es el porcentaje de ellas que están Diámetro 1/2” Ø 15 3/4” Ø 22
abiertas al mismo tiempo. Caudal m3/h 1,2 1,2 2,1 2,1
Caudal l/min 20 20 35 35
Coeficientes de simultaneidad %
Número Viviendas Comunidad Número Viviendas Comunidad Número Viviendas Comunidad
aparatos % % aparatos % % aparatos % %
5 54 64,5 35 23,2 30 80 16,5 22

10 41 49,5 40 21,5 28 90 16 21,5
15 35 43,5 45 20,5 27 100 15,5 20,5
20 29 37 50 19,5 26 150 14 18,5
25 27,5 34,5 60 18 24 200 13 17,5
30 24,5 32 70 17 23 300 12,5 16,5
Montaje 2. Golpes de ariete
Esta es una de las principales causas de rotura de los
1. Antes de montar el dispositivo, abra todos los grifos para reductores de presión. En las instalaciones que tienden a
limpiar la instalación y expulsar el aire de las tuberías. presentar este inconveniente, se aconseja utilizar
dispositivos específicos para contrarrestarlo.
2. Instale válvulas de corte antes y después del reductor
para facilitar el mantenimiento. La válvula instalada aguas
arriba puede ser del tipo con retención incorporada
Problemas de funcionamiento
(Caleffi BALLSTOP).
3. El reductor de presión se puede instalar en un tubo vertical A menudo se atribuyen erróneamente al reductor de presión
u horizontal. ciertas anomalías que, en general, se deben a
La única condición es que no se monte en posición características de la instalación y pueden subsanarse con
invertida. recursos técnicos. Los casos más frecuentes son:
4. Cierre la válvula de corte aguas abajo.
1. Aumento de la presión aguas abajo del reductor en
5. Efectúe la calibración con el presencia de un acumulador
tornillo situado en la parte Este problema se debe al sobrecalentamiento del agua
superior de la campana de causado por el acumulador.
plástico: gire el tornillo hacia la La presión no se puede aliviar
derecha para aumentar la porque el reductor, como
presión o a la izquierda para corresponde, está cerrado. La
disminuirla. solución consiste en instalar
un vaso de expansión (entre el
reductor y el acumulador) que
“absorba” el incremento de
presión.
6. Compruebe la presión en el manómetro. Los reductores
serie 533 se taran en fábrica a 3 bar.
2. El reductor no mantiene el valor de calibración
En la mayoría de los casos, este problema se debe a la
Consejos para el montaje presencia de impurezas en el asiento del obturador, que
causan fugas con el consiguiente aumento de presión
1. Montaje en arquetas aguas abajo.
No se aconseja instalar los reductores de presión en una La solución consiste en instalar un filtro antes del reductor
arqueta, principalmente por tres motivos: y, en lo sucesivo, realizar el mantenimiento y la limpieza
- las heladas pueden dañar el reductor; del cartucho extraíble (vea el apartado Mantenimiento).
- se complican la inspección y el mantenimiento;
- se dificulta la lectura del manómetro.
Mantenimiento
Para la limpieza periódica del filtro y para controlar o sustituir el cartucho, proceda del siguiente modo:
1 Corte el paso de agua al reductor.

2 Desenrosque el tornillo de calibración hacia la izquierda hasta eliminar la tensión del resorte interno.
3 Desenrosque la tapa.
4 Extraiga el cartucho girando el hexágono con una pinza.
5 El cartucho puede volver a montarse después de la inspección y la limpieza, o bien sustituirse por uno nuevo.
6 Calibre nuevamente el reductor.
2 3 4
Esquemas de aplicación
ESPECIFICACIONES
Serie 5330
Reductor de presión inclinado. Conexiones roscadas 1/2” H (o 3/4” H). Cuerpo en latón. Cromado. Eje en aleación antidezincificación.
Tapa de nailon/vidrio. Membrana y juntas en NBR. Temperatura máxima de servicio 40°C. Presión máxima de entrada 16 bar. Campo
de calibración de la presión de salida: desde 1 hasta 6 bar. Cartucho y filtro extraíbles para el mantenimiento.
Serie 5331
Reductor de presión inclinado. Conexión roscada 3/4” M para 3/4” H con tuerca. Cuerpo en latón. Cromado. Eje en aleación
antidezincificación. Tapa de nailon/vidrio. Membrana y juntas en NBR. Temperatura máxima de servicio 40°C. Presión máxima de
entrada 16 bar. Campo de calibración de la presión de salida: desde 1 hasta 6 bar. Cartucho y filtro extraíbles para el mantenimiento.
Serie 5332
Reductor de presión inclinado con manómetro. Conexiones roscadas 1/2” H (o 3/4” H). Conexión para manómetro 1/4” H. Cuerpo
en latón. Cromado. Eje en aleación antidezincificación. Tapa de nailon/vidrio. Membrana y juntas en NBR. Temperatura máxima
de servicio 40°C. Presión máxima de entrada 16 bar. Campo de calibración de la presión de salida: desde 1 hasta 6 bar. Cartucho
y filtro extraíbles para el mantenimiento. Incluye manómetro con escala de 0÷10 bar.
Serie 5334
Reductor de presión inclinado con conexión para manómetro. Conexiones roscadas 1/2” H (o 3/4” H) Conexión para manómetro
1/4” H. Cuerpo en latón. Cromado. Eje en aleación antidezincificación. Tapa de nailon/vidrio. Membrana y juntas en NBR.
Temperatura máxima de servicio 40°C. Presión máxima de entrada 16 bar. Campo de calibración de la presión de salida: desde
1 hasta 6 bar. Cartucho y filtro extraíbles para el mantenimiento.
Serie 5336
Reductor de presión inclinado. Conexiones Ø 15 (o Ø 22). Cuerpo y eje en aleación antidezincificación. Cromado. Tapa de
nailon/vidrio. Membrana y juntas en NBR. Temperatura máxima de servicio 40°C. Presión máxima de entrada 16 bar. Campo de
calibración de la presión de salida: desde 1 hasta 6 bar. Cartucho y filtro extraíbles para el mantenimiento.
Serie 5337
Reductor de presión inclinado con conexión para manómetro. Conexiones Ø 15 (o Ø 22). Conexión para manómetro 1/4” H.
Cuerpo y eje en aleación antidezincificación. Cromado. Tapa de nailon/vidrio. Membrana y juntas en NBR. Temperatura máxima
de servicio 40°C. Presión máxima de entrada 16 bar. Campo de calibración de la presión de salida: desde 1 hasta 6 bar. Cartucho
y filtro extraíbles para el mantenimiento.
Serie 5338
Reductor de presión inclinado con manómetro. Conexiones Ø 15 (o Ø 22). Conexión para manómetro 1/4” H. Cuerpo y eje en
aleación antidezincificación. Cromado. Tapa en nailon/vidrio. Membrana y juntas en NBR. Temperatura máxima de servicio 40°C.
Presión máxima de entrada 16 bar. Campo de calibración de la presión de salida: desde 1 hasta 6 bar. Cartucho y filtro extraíbles
para el mantenimiento. Incluye manómetro con escala de 0÷10 bar.
El fabricante se reserva el derecho a modificar los productos descritos y los datos técnicos correspondientes en cualquier momento y sin preaviso.
Caleffi S.p.A.
S.R. 229 n. 25 · 28010 Fontaneto d’Agogna (NO) · Italy
Tel. +39 0322 8491 · Fax +39 0322 863723
info@caleffi.com · www.caleffi.com
© Copyright 2014 Caleffi
SDS M2012-20
BALANCED PRESSURE
THERMOSTATIC STEAM TRAP
MODEL LV21
BALANCED PRESSURE THERMOSTATIC STEAM TRAP WITH ‘FAIL OPEN’ DESIGN
Features
All stainless steel thermostatic trap suitable
for applications where the condensate load
is relatively small, e.g. tracing, vessels and
heaters. Preferably for vertical installation.
1. “Fail open” feature.
2. Rugged yet light construction withstands
superheat and water hammer.
3. Cyclic operation with fixed subcooling
throughout entire pressure range.
4. Outstanding air venting capability.
5. Compact, yet high capacity.
6. Easy to maintain and easy to clean.
7. Hardened stainless steel valve surfaces.
8. Built-in screen with large surface area.
Specifications
250 235 °C
Model LV21
Temperature (°C)
Connection Screwed 220

Size (mm) 8, 10, 15 200
Max. Operating Press. (MPaG) PMO 2.1 Saturated Steam Curve

Min. Operating Press. (MPaG) 0.01 150
Maximum Back Pressure 90% of Inlet Pressure
Max. Operating Temp. (°C) TMO see graph at right 100
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Subcooling of X-element Fill (°C) up to 6 (option: up to 22) 2.1
Pressure (MPaG)
Type of X-element B (option: T)
1 MPa = 10.197 kg/cm2
PRESSURE SHELL DESIGN CONDITIONS (NOT OPERATING CONDITIONS): Maximum Allowable Pressure (MPaG) PMA: 6.3
Maximum Allowable Temperature (°C) TMA: 425
To avoid abnormal operation, accidents or serious injury, DO NOT use this product outside of the specification range.
CAUTION Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
No. Description Material JIS ASTM/AISI*

① Body Cast Stainless Steel — A351 Gr.CF8
② Cover Cast Stainless Steel — A351 Gr.CF8
③ X-element Stainless Steel — —
④ Valve Seat Stainless Steel SUS630 AISI630
⑤ Screen Stainless Steel SUS304 AISI304
⑥ Nameplate Stainless Steel SUS304 AISI304
⑦ Spring Clip Stainless Steel SUS304 AISI304
* Equivalent
Dimensions
r LV21 Screwed LV21 Screwed* (mm)
Size L φW Weight (kg)
08
10 55 47 0.4
15
W
* Rc (PT), other standards available

L
Discharge Capacity
Differential Pressure (kg/cm2) 21
0.1 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 10 20
800
700 B
500
Discharge Capacity (kg/h)
300
200 T
100
70
50
30
20
0.01 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 2.0
2.1
Differential Pressure (MPa)
1. Differential pressure is the difference between the inlet and outlet pressure of the trap.
2. Recommended safety factor: at least 2.
SDS M2012-20 Rev. 6/2014

Products for intended use only.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference
LV SERIES - BALANCED PRESSURE
English
THERMOSTATIC STEAM TRAPS
EINBAU- UND BETRIEBSANLEITUNG

Gebrauchsanleitung leicht zugänglich aufbewahren
LV SERIE - THERMISCHE KAPSEL-
KONDENSATABLEITER
MANUEL D UTILISATION
Conserver ce manuel dans un endroit facile d'accès
GAMME LV - PURGEURS THERMO-
STATIQUES À PRESSION ÉQUILIBRÉE
Deutsch
LV5 / LV13 / LV13L / LV13N / LV21
Français
LV5 / LV13 / LV21 LV13L LV13N
Copyright (C) 2015 by TLV Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Before beginning installation or maintenance, please read this manual to ensure correct usage of
the product. Keep the manual in a safe place for future reference.
The LV Series steam traps can be used without adjustment for medium capacity applications up
to 0.5, 1.3, or 2.1 MPaG (75, 185, or 300 psig). These models are suitable for steam-using
English
equipment that discharges condensate at temperatures slightly below saturation temperature,

such as tracer lines, vessels and heaters.
1 MPa = 10.197 kg/cm2, 1 bar = 0.1 MPa
For products with special specifications or with options not included in this manual, contact TLV
for instructions.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
Einführung
Bitte lesen Sie die Betriebsanleitung vor Einbau und Inbetriebnahme sorgfältig durch und
bewahren Sie sie für späteren Gebrauch an einem leicht zugänglichen Ort auf, um einen
einwandfreien Betrieb des Kondensatableiters (KA) sicherzustellen.
Deutsch
Die Kondensatableiter der LV-Serie können ohne besondere Druckeinstellung für mittlere
Durchsatzleistungen bis 5, 13, 21 bar ü eingesetzt werden. Sie eignen sich besonders für
Anwendungen, bei denen Kondensat mit geringer Unterkühlung unter Sattdampftemperatur
abgeleitet werden soll, z. B. für Begleitheizung sowie Trocken- und Heizeinrichtungen aller Art.
1 bar = 0,1 MPa
Wenden Sie sich an TLV für Sonderausführungen, die nicht in dieser Einbau- und Betriebs-
anleitung enthalten sind.
Wir behalten uns vor, den Inhalt dieser Betriebsanleitung ohne Ankündigung zu ändern.
Introduction
Veuillez lire attentivement ce manuel afin d’utiliser correctement le produit.
Nous vous recommandons de le garder dans un endroit sûr pour de futures références.
Français
Les purgeurs de vapeur de la gamme LV peuvent être utilisés sans ajustement sur des
applications de capacité moyenne, jusqu’à 5, 13 ou 21 bar. Ces modèles conviennent aux pièces
d’équipement utilisant de la vapeur et évacuant le condensât à une température légèrement
inférieure à la température de saturation, telles les lignes de traçage, récipients et réchauffeurs.
1 bar = 0,1 MPa
Pour tout produit aux spécifications particulières ou comportant des options non reprises dans ce
manuel, veuillez contacter TLV.
Le contenu de ce manuel est sujet à modifications sans préavis.
―1―
1. Safety Considerations
• Read this section carefully before use and be sure to follow the instructions.
• Installation, inspection, maintenance, repairs, disassembly, adjustment and valve
opening/closing should be carried out only by trained maintenance personnel.
• The precautions listed in this manual are designed to ensure safety and prevent equipment
English
damage and personal injury. For situations that may occur as a result of erroneous handling,
three different types of cautionary items are used to indicate the degree of urgency and the
scale of potential damage and danger: DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION.
• The three types of cautionary items above are very important for safety; be sure to observe
all of them, as they relate to installation, use, maintenance, and repair. Furthermore, TLV
accepts no responsibility for any accidents or damage occurring as a result of failure to
observe these precautions.
Indicates a DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION item.
DANGER Indicates an urgent situation that poses a threat of death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates that there is a potential threat of death or serious injury.
Indicates that there is a possibility of injury, or equipment/product

CAUTION damage.
Install properly and DO NOT use this product outside the

recommended operating pressure, temperature and other
specification ranges. Improper use may result in such hazards as
damage to the product or malfunctions, which may lead to serious
accidents. Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below
the conditions quoted.
Take measures to prevent people from coming into direct contact
with product outlets. Failure to do so may result in burns or other injury
from the discharge of fluids.
When disassembling or removing the product, wait until the internal
pressure equals atmospheric pressure and the surface of the
product has cooled to room temperature. Disassembling or removing
the product when it is hot or under pressure may lead to discharge of
fluids, causing burns, other injuries or damage.
CAUTION
Be sure to use only the recommended components when repairing
the product, and NEVER attempt to modify the product in any way.
Failure to observe these precautions may result in damage to the product
or burns or other injury due to malfunction or the discharge of fluids.
Do not use excessive force when connecting threaded pipes to the
product. Over-tightening may cause breakage leading to fluid discharge,
which may cause burns or other injury.
Use only under conditions in which no freeze-up will occur. Freezing
may damage the product, leading to fluid discharge, which may cause
burns or other injury.
Use under conditions in which no water hammer will occur. The
impact of water hammer may damage the product, leading to fluid
discharge, which may cause burns or other injury.
―2―
2. Specifications Technische Daten Données techniques
Refer to the product nameplate for detailed specifications.
Die technischen Daten stehen auf dem Typenschild.
English
Les données techniques sont inscrites sur la plaquette nominative.

A Model
Typ LV5/LV13/LV21
Modèle
B Nominal Diameter B A
Größe/DN G
Dimension/DN
C Maximum Allowable Pressure*
Maximal zulässiger Druck* I
Pression maximale admissible* C
D Maximum Allowable Temperature* TMA
Maximal zulässige Temperatur* TMA D
Température maximale admissible* TMA F
E Maximum Operating Pressure
Maximaler Betriebsdruck E H
Pression de fonctionnement maximale
F Maximum Operating Temperature TMO
Maximale Betriebstemperatur TMO LV13L/LV13N
Temp. de fonctionnement maximale TMO
G Serial Number A
Deutsch
Seriennummer C
Numéro de série
D
H Valve No.** B
I Type of X-element I
X-Element-Typ E
Type d'élément X F
H
G
* Maximum allowable pressure (PMA) and maximum allowable temperature (TMA) are
PRESSURE SHELL DESIGN CONDITIONS, NOT OPERATING CONDITIONS.
** "Valve No." is displayed for products with options. This item is omitted from the
nameplate when there are no options.
* Maximal zulässiger Druck (PMA) und maximal zulässige Temperatur (TMA) sind
AUSLEGUNGSDATEN NICHT BETRIEBSDATEN.
** Die "Valve No." wird angegeben bei Typen mit Optionen. Bei Typen ohne Optionen bleibt
Français
diese Stelle frei.
* Pression maximale admissible (PMA) et température maximale admissible (TMA) sont les
CONDITIONS DE CONCEPTION, PAS LES CONDITIONS DE FONCTIONNEMENT.
** Le "Valve No." est indiqué sur les modèles avec options. Ce numéro ne figure pas sur les
modèles sans options.
―5―
Maximum Operating Temperature (stainless steel models)
Maximale Betriebstemperatur (Edelstahl-Typen)
Température de fonctionnement maximale (modèles en acier inox)
English
LV21
LV5
250 235 ˚C
225 ˚C 455 ˚F
437 ˚F
220 428
Temp. ˚C
Temp. ˚F
200 392
Saturated Steam Curve

Sattdampfkurve
150 302
Courbe de saturation
de la vapeur
Deutsch
100 212
0 0.5 1.0 1.3 1.5 2.0 2.1
(75) (150) (185) (215) (300)
Pressure MPaG (psig)

Betriebsdruck MPaG (psig)
Pression MPaG (psig)
1 MPa = 10.197 kg/cm2, 1 bar = 0.1 MPa
To avoid malfunctions, product damage, accidents or serious injury,

CAUTION install properly and DO NOT use this product outside the specification
range. Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the
conditions quoted.
Die Einbauhinweise beachten und die spezifizierten Betriebsgrenzen
Français
VORSICHT NICHT ÜBERSCHREITEN. Nichtbeachtung kann zu Betriebsstörungen

oder Unfällen führen. Lokale Vorschriften, können zur Unterschreitung der
angegebenen Werte zwingen.
Installer le produit correctement et NE PAS l’utiliser en dehors des plages
ATTENTION spécifiées. En cas de dépassement des limites données, des dysfonc-
tionnements ou accidents pourraient survenir. Il se peut que des
règlements locaux limitent l'utilisation du produit en-deçà des
spécifications indiquées.
―6―
3. Configuration Aufbau Configuration
LV5 (Stainless Steel Edelstahl Acier inox) No. Description R*
LV21 1 Body
q
English
2 Cover
3 X-element
t 4 Valve Seat
u
5 Screen
e 6 Nameplate
y 7 Spring Clip
8 Cover Gasket
r 9 X-element Guide
w * R: Replacement parts only for LV13L
and LV13N, available in this Repair Kit.
** For LV5, LV13 and LV21 the valve seat is
pressed in the cover and not replaceable.
Consult TLV if other parts are required.
LV5 (Brass Messing Laiton) Nr. Bauteil R*

LV13 1 Gehäuse
2 Verschlusskappe
i 3 X-Element
Ventilsitz
Deutsch
4
5 Schmutzsieb
6 Typenschild
7 Spannbügel
LV13N e y 8 Gehäusedichtung
i 9 X-Element-Halterung
w * R: Ersatzteile nur für LV13L und LV13N,
u erhältlich in diesem Reparatursatz.
r ** Die Ventilsitze von LV5, LV13 und LV21
o sind in die Verschlusskappe eingepresst
und nicht austauschbar. Für andere
q Ersatzteile wenden Sie sich bitte an TLV.
t No. Dénomination R*
1 Corps
2 Couvercle
3 Élément X
4 Siège de soupape
y
LV13L 5 Crépine
w
Français
6 Plaquette nominative
i 7 Menotte de ressort
u 8 Joint de couvercle
e 9 Guide de l’élément X
r o * R: Pièces de remplacement seulement
pour LV13L et LV13N, disponibles avec
le jeu de pièces de rechange.
q ** Pour les LV5, LV13, LV21, le siège de
t soupape fait partie intégrante du
couvercle et n’est pas remplaçable.
Consultez TLV si d’autres pièces sont
nécessaires.
4. Exploded View Einzelteile Pièces détachées
LV5 / LV13 LV5 / LV21
(Brass Messing Laiton) (Stainless Steel
Edelstahl Acier inox)
English
Body
Gehäuse
Corps
Screen
Schmutzsieb
Crépine
Spring Clip
Spannbügel
Deutsch
Menotte de ressort
X-element
X-Element
Élément X
Cover Gasket
Gehäusedichtung
Joint de couvercle
Valve Seat
Ventilsitz
Siège de soupape
Cover
Verschlusskappe
Français
Couvercle
4. Exploded View Einzelteile Pièces détachées
(Continued Fortsetzung Suite)
LV13L LV13N
English
Nameplate
Typenschild
Plaquette nominative
Cover
Verschlusskappe
Couvercle
Cover Gasket
Gehäusedichtung
Joint de couvercle
Spring Clip
Spannbügel
Menotte de ressort
X-element
X-Element
Deutsch
Élément X
Valve Seat
Ventilsitz
Siège de soupape
X-element Guide
X-Element-Halterung
Guide de l’élément X
Screen
Schmutzsieb
Crépine
Français
Body
Gehäuse
Corps
―9―
5. Proper Installation
CAUTION • Installation, inspection, maintenance, repairs, disassembly, adjustment
and valve opening/closing should be carried out only by trained
maintenance personnel.
English
• Take measures to prevent people from coming into direct contact with
product outlets.
• Do not use excessive force when connecting threaded pipes.
• Install for use under conditions in which no freeze-up will occur.
• Install for use under conditions in which no water hammer will occur.
1. Before installation, be sure to remove all protective seals from product.

2. Install LV5, LV13, LV21 and LV13N either vertically or horizontally, but make sure the arrow
on the product points in the direction of flow. LV13L should be installed horizontally in,
vertically out. DO NOT install the traps upside down.
3. Before installing the steam trap, blow out the inlet piping to remove all dirt and oil.
4. Install a bypass valve to discharge condensate, and inlet and outlet valves to isolate the trap
in the event of trap failure or when carrying out maintenance.
5. Install the trap in the lowest part of the pipeline or equipment so the condensate flows
naturally downward into the trap by gravity. The inlet pipe should be as short and have as
few bends as possible.
6. Install a check valve at the trap outlet whenever the condensate discharge pipe leads to a
tank or recovery line, or whenever the condensate collection pipeline is connected to more
than one trap.
7. In order to avoid excessive back pressure, make sure the discharge pipes are large enough
(the outlet back pressure allowance should be no more than 90% of the inlet steam
pressure).
8. The use of unions is recommended to facilitate connection and disconnection of the trap.
9. When completing the piping, support the pipes within 0.8 meters (2.5 ft) on either side of the
trap.
6. Piping Arrangement
Check to make sure that the pipes connected to the trap have been installed properly.
1. Has the piping work been done correctly, as shown on the next page?
2. Is the pipe diameter suitable?
3. Has the trap been installed with the arrow on the product pointing in the direction of flow?
4. Has sufficient space been secured for maintenance?
5. Have maintenance valves been installed at the inlet and outlet?
6. If the outlet is subject to back pressure, has a check valve been installed?
7. Is the inlet pipe as short as possible, with as few bends as possible, and installed so that the
condensate will flow naturally down into the trap?
― 10 ―
Requirement Correct Incorrect
Install a catchpot with the proper
diameter. Diameter is too
small.
English
Make sure the flow of

Diameter is too
condensate is not obstructed.
small and inlet
protrudes into pipe.
To prevent rust and scale from

flowing into the trap, connect Rust and scale flow
the inlet pipe 25 - 50 mm into the trap with
(1 - 2 in) above the base of the the condensate.
T-pipe.
When installing on the blind
end, make sure nothing Condensate
obstructs the flow of collects in the pipe.
condensate.
7. Operational Check
A visual inspection can be carried out to aid in determining the necessity for immediate
maintenance or repair, if the trap is open to atmosphere. If the trap does not discharge to
atmosphere, use diagnostic equipment such as TLV TrapMan or TLV Pocket TrapMan (within
their pressure and temperature measurement range).
Normal: Condensate is discharged intermittently with flash steam and the
sound of flow can be heard.
Blocked: No condensate is discharged. The trap is quiet and makes no noise.
(Discharge Impossible) The surface temperature of the trap is low.
Blowing: Live steam continually flows from the outlet and there may be a high-
pitched whistling sound.
Steam Leakage: Live steam is discharged through the trap outlet together with the
condensate and there may be a high-pitched whistling sound.
(When conducting a visual inspection, flash steam is sometimes mistaken for steam leakage. For
this reason, the use of a steam trap diagnostic instrument such as TLV TrapMan is highly
recommended.)
Flash Steam Live Steam Leakage
White jet Clear, slightly

containing bluish jet
water droplets
― 11 ―
8. Inspection and Maintenance
Operational inspections should be performed at least twice per year, or as called for by trap
operating conditions. Faulty steam traps may result in losses due to steam leakage. Follow the
instructions below for disassembly and reassembly when cleaning or repair is necessary.
English
CAUTION • Installation, inspection, maintenance, repairs, disassembly, adjustment
and valve opening/closing should be carried out only by trained
maintenance personnel.
• Before attempting to open the trap, close the inlet and outlet isolation
valves and wait until the trap has cooled to room temperature. Failure
to do so may result in burns or injury.
• LV13L and LV13N can be maintained without being removed from the
pipeline, on the condition that the surrounding pipes are securely
supported. If the pipes are not properly supported, they may be
damaged when torque is applied in the loosening or tightening of the
cover. Such damage could result in steam spraying out and causing
serious injury.
• If using a vise when dismantling the trap, screw a nipple or pipe end
into the outlet to prevent deformation of the threaded connection.
• Be sure to use the proper components and NEVER attempt to modify
the product.
Parts Inspection Procedure

Gasket Check for warping or damage (brass models)
Screen Check for clogging or corrosion damage
X-element Check for rust, scale, oil film, wear or damage
Valve Seat Check for rust, scale, oil film, wear or damage
Body, Cover Check inside for rust and scale
Disassembly/Reassembly (to reassemble, follow procedures in reverse)

Part & No. During Disassembly During Reassembly
Cover 2 Use an open-end wrench to Clean seating surfaces; coat threaded
remove portions of the stainless steel models with
anti-seize; tighten to the proper torque
Cover Gasket 8 Remove carefully Replace with a new gasket only if worn or
(Brass models) damaged
Spring Clip 7 Use pliers to remove Insert securely into the 3 slots in the guide
or cover (see Figure A, page 13)
X-element 3 Use pliers to grasp the ball at the Insert with right side up; make sure it
tip of the element and remove does not catch on guide or cover (see
Figures A and B, page 13)
Valve Seat 4 Use a socket wrench to remove Do not coat threaded portions with anti-
(LV13L, LV13N) seize, tighten to the proper torque
X-element Guide 9 Be careful not to bend the guide Fix with Valve Seat and make sure the
(LV13L, LV13N) X-element can be inserted smoothly
Screen 5 Be careful not to bend the screen Be careful not to bend the screen
― 12 ―
Installation of X-element
X-element
Spring Clip
Slots Slots
English
Cover
X-element Guide
Figure A Figure B
Tightening Torque and Distance Across Flats

Part Torque Distance Across Flats
N·m (lbf·ft) mm (in)
1 -1 )
/4 /2
Cover LV5, LV13 (Brass) 8 -15 ( 80 (59) 27 (1 1/16)
Cover LV5, LV13 (Brass) 20 - 25 (3/
4- 1 ) 80 (59) 41 (1 5/8 )
Cover LV5, LV21 (Stainless Steel) 120 (88) 27 (11/16)
Cover LV13L, LV13N 80 (59) 32 (1 1/4 )
Valve Seat LV13L, LV13N 35 (26) 19 ( 3/4 )
1 N·m ≈ 10 kg・cm
If drawings or other special documentation were supplied for the product, any torque
given there takes precedence over values shown here.
9. Troubleshooting
If the expected performance is unachievable after installation of the steam trap, read the "Proper
Installation" and "Piping Arrangement" chapters again, and check the following table for the
appropriate corrective measures to be taken.
Problem Cause Remedy
No X-element is stuck to the valve seat Clean
condensate is Valve seat is clogged Clean
discharged Screen is clogged with rust or scale Clean
(blocked) or Steam-locking has occurred Perform a bypass blowdown, or close
discharge the trap inlet valve and allow the trap
is poor to cool. Piping correction may also be
required.
Trap operating pressure exceeds Study inlet pressure
maximum specified operating pressure
Differential pressure is insufficient Study inlet / outlet pressure
Steam Valve closure is obstructed by rust, etc Clean (inspect screen as well)
leakage or X-element is worn or damaged Replace X-element
blow-off Valve seat is worn or damaged Replace valve seat (LV13L, LV13N) or
cover
Improper installation Correct the installation
Severe vibration of trap Reinforce trap piping supports
Leakage from Cover is loose or gasket is worn or Tighten cover or replace gasket
other location damaged
NOTE: When replacing parts with new, use the parts list on page 7 for reference, and replace with
parts from the respective replacement parts kits.
― 13 ―
12. Product Warranty
1) Warranty Period: one year after product delivery.
2) TLV CO., LTD. warrants this product to the original purchaser to be free from defective
materials and workmanship. Under this warranty, the product will be repaired or replaced at
our option, without charge for parts or labor.
English
3) This product warranty will not apply to cosmetic defects, nor to any product whose exterior
has been damaged or defaced; nor does it apply in the following cases:
1. Malfunction due to improper installation, use, handling, etc., by other than TLV CO., LTD.
authorized service representatives.
2. Malfunctions due to dirt, scale, rust, etc.
3. Malfunctions due to improper disassembly and reassembly, or inadequate inspection and
maintenance by other than TLV CO., LTD. authorized service representatives.
4. Malfunction due to disasters or forces of nature.
5. Accidents or malfunctions due to any other cause beyond the control of TLV CO., LTD.
4) Under no circumstances will TLV CO., LTD. be liable for consequential economic loss or
damage or consequential damage to property.
12. Garantie
1) Garantiezeit: Ein Jahr nach Lieferung.
2) Falls das Produkt innerhalb der Garantiezeit, aus Gründen die TLV CO., LTD. zu vertreten
hat, nicht der Spezifikation entsprechend arbeitet oder Fehler an Material oder Verarbeitung
aufweist, wird es kostenlos ersetzt oder repariert.
3) Von der Produktgarantie ausgenommen sind kosmetische Mängel sowie Beschädigungen
Deutsch
des Produktäußeren. Die Garantie erlischt außerdem in den folgenden Fällen:
1. Schäden, die durch falschen Einbau oder falsche Bedienung hervorgerufen werden.
2. Schäden, die durch Verschmutzungen, Ablagerungen oder Korrosion usw. auftreten.
3. Schäden, die durch falsches Auseinandernehmen und Zusammenbau, oder ungenügende
Inspektion und Wartung entstehen.
4. Schäden, verursacht durch Naturkatastrophen oder Unglücksfälle.
5. Unglücksfälle und Schäden aus anderen Gründen, die von TLV CO., LTD. nicht zu
vertreten sind.
4) TLV CO., LTD. haftet nicht für Folgeschäden.
12. Garantie
1) Durée de la garantie: Un an à partir de la livraison du produit.
2) Champ d'application de la garantie: TLV CO., LTD. garantit à l'acheteur originel que ce
produit est libre de tout matériau ou main d'oeuvre défectueux. Sous cette garantie, le
produit sera réparé ou remplacé, au choix de TLV CO., LTD., sans aucun frais de
pièces ou de main d'oeuvre.
3) Cette garantie ne s'applique pas aux défauts cosmétiques ni aux produits dont l'extérieur a
Français
été endommagé ou mutilé; elle ne s'applique pas non plus dans les cas suivants:
1. Dysfonctionnements dûs à toute installation, utilisation ou maniement impropre par un
agent de services autre que ceux agréés par TLV CO., LTD.
2. Dysfonctionnements attribuables aux saletés, dépôts, rouille, etc...
3. Dysfonctionnements dûs à un démontage et/ou à un rassemblage inconvenant, ou à tout
contrôle ou entretien inadéquat, par un agent autre que ceux agréés par TLV CO., LTD.
4. Dysfonctionnements dûs à toute catastrophe ou force naturelle.
5. Accidents ou dysfonctionnements dûs à toute autre cause échappant au contrôle de
TLV CO., LTD.
4) En aucun cas, TLV CO., LTD. ne sera responsable des dégâts économiques ou immobiliers
consécutifs.
― 22 ―
For Service or Technical Assistance:
Contact your representative or your regional office.
Für Reparatur und Wartung:
Wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihre Vertretung oder an eine der Niederlassungen.
Pour tout service ou assistance technique:
Contactez votre agent ou votre bureau régional .
USA and Canada:

Tel: [1]-704-597-9070
USA und Kanada: 13901 South Lakes Drive, Charlotte,
Fax: [1]-704-583-1610
E.U. et le Canada: NC 28273-6790, U.S.A.
Mexico:
Tel: [52]-55-5359-7949
Mexiko: San Andrés Atoto No. 12, Col. San Andrés Atoto 53500,
Fax: [52]-55-5359-7585
Mexique: Naucalpan, Edo. de México, Mexico
Argentina:
Argentinien: Adolfo Alsina 3276, B1603CQH Villa Martelli, Tel: [54]-(0)11-4760-8401
Argentine: Pcia. Buenos Aires, Argentina
Europe:
Tel: [49]-(0)7263-9150-0
Europa: Daimler-Benz-Straße 16-18,
Fax: [49]-(0)7263-9150-50
Europe: 74915 Waibstadt, Germany
United Kingdom:
Tel: [44]-(0)1242-227223
Großbritannien: Star Lodge, Montpellier Drive, Cheltenham,
Fax: [44]-(0)1242-223077
Royaume Uni: Gloucestershire GL50 1TY, U.K.
France:
Tel: [33]-(0)4-72482222
Frankreich: Parc d’Ariane 2, bât. C, 290 rue Ferdinand Perrier,
Fax: [33]-(0)4-72482220
France: 69800 Saint Priest, France
Oceania:
Tel: [61]-(0)3-9873 5610
Ozeanien: Unit 22, 137-145 Rooks Road, Nunawading,
Fax: [61]-(0)3-9873 5010
Océanie: Victoria 3131, Australia
Southeast Asia:
Tel: [65]-6747 4600
Südostasien: 36 Kaki Bukit Place, #02-01/02,
Fax: [65]-6742 0345
Asie du Sud-Est: Singapore 416214
China:
Tel: [86]-(0)21-6482-8622
China: Room 1306, No. 103 Cao Bao Road,
Fax: [86]-(0)21-6482-8623
Chine: Shanghai, China 200233
Malaysia:
Tel: [60]-3-8065-2928
Malaysien: No.16, Jalan MJ14, Taman Industri Meranti Jaya,
Fax: [60]-3-8065-2923
Malaisie: 47120 Puchong, Selangor, Malaysia
Korea:
Tel: [82]-(0)31-726-2105
Korea: #302-1 Bundang Technopark B, Yatap, Bundang,
Fax: [82]-(0)31-726-2195
Corée: Seongnam, Gyeonggi, 463-760 Korea
Other countries:
Tel: [81]-(0)79-427-1818
Andere Länder: 881 Nagasuna, Noguchi, Kakogawa,
Fax: [81]-(0)79-425-1167
Autres pays: Hyogo 675-8511, Japan
Manufacturer:
Tel: [81]-(0)79-422-1122
Hersteller: 881 Nagasuna, Noguchi, Kakogawa,
Fax: [81]-(0)79-422-0112
Fabricant: Hyogo 675-8511, Japan
Printed on recycled paper. Auf Recycling-Papier gedruckt. Imprimé sur du papier recyclé.
Rev. 3/2015 (M)
Ref.: 31
CIM 81L
BRONZE GLOBE VALVE P.T.F.E. DISC - COMPACT TYPE
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS:
The CIM 81/L globe valve is manufactured in accordance with BS 5154/B - PN 16 and EN ISO 9002 and can be used in a wide range of
plants, in any industrial and agricultural application: heating plants, sanitary systems, plumbing services, waterworks, steam, gasoline
networks, petroleum and other hydrocarbons where fine regulation is required.
CROSS SECTION
BODY : CAST IN BRONZE UNI 7013-8°-ISO 1338
BONNET : HOT FORGED BRASS EN12165 CW 617N
STEM : MACHINED FROM DRAWN BRASS BAR EN12164
CW 614N
GLAND NUT : MACHINED FROM DRAWN BRASS BAR EN12164
CW 614N
GLAND : MACHINED FROM DRAWN BRASS BAR EN12164
CW 614N
GLAND PACKING : AF 15/MA
BODY PACKING : NA 1100
DISC HOLDER : MACHINED FROM DRAWN BRASS BAR EN12164
CW 614N
DISC : P.T.F.E.
DISC NUT : MACHINED FROM DRAWN BRASS BAR EN12164
CW 614N
NUT : SELF LOCKING TYPE
HANDWHEEL : ALLUMINIO AL/SI 12
© Cimberio S.p.A. Last update : 02/02/2005 Rev. : 7
28017 SAN MAURIZIO D'OPAGLIO (Novara) - Italy

Société Lyonnaise de Robinetterie -14, rue Crépet - 69363 LYON cedex 07 - FRANCE
Tel. +39 0322 923001 - Fax +39 0322 967216 / 967755
Tél. : 04 78 58 34 81 - Fax : 04 78 69 50 98 - Internet : www.solyro.com
www.cimberio.com - e.mail: info@cimberio.it
FLOW AND PRESSURE DROP PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATINGS
Flow and pressure drop Pressure / temperature ratings

1 l/min = 0,06 m3/h 1 bar = 14,5 p.s.i.
1 m3/h = 16,67 l/min °C = 5/9 ( °F-32)
°F = 32+9/5 °C
TECHNICAL DRAWING
Connection: On request:
ISO 228 ANSI B.1.20.1 (NPT)
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
KV = Capacity in m³/h at pressure drop of 1 bar

KVS = Water flow generated by a pressure loss of 1 bar measured on the test points.
© Cimberio S.p.A. Last update : 02/02/2005 Rev. : 7
28017 SAN MAURIZIO D'OPAGLIO (Novara) - Italy

Société Lyonnaise de Robinetterie -14, rue Crépet - 69363 LYON cedex 07 - FRANCE
Tel. +39 0322 923001 - Fax +39 0322 967216 / 967755
Tél. : 04 78 58 34 81 - Fax : 04 78 69 50 98 - Internet : www.solyro.com
www.cimberio.com - e.mail: info@cimberio.it
SERIES GB-200 1 0
Global Valve,
1
4 -2" 200LB
MATERIALS LIST
H(OPEN)
N O . PART NAME SPECIFICATION Q'TY
1 Body ASTM A351 Gr. CF8M 1
2 Disc SS 316 1
3 Stem SS 316 1
4 Bonnet ASTM A351 Gr. CF8M 1
5 Gasket Packing TEFLON 1
6 Washer SS 304 1
T
7 Stem Packing TEFLON 1 SET
A
8 Gland SS 304 1
9 Gland Nut SS 316 1
1 0 Handle Wheel MICO STEEL 1
1 1 Name Plate ALUMINUM 1
1 2 Handle Wheel Washer SS 304 1
1 3 Handle Wheel Nut SS 304 1
SIZE A L H W T W(kg)
1 1
4 1 1 5 2 8 9 7 0 4 - NPT.PF 0.27
8 1 1 5 2 8 9 7 0 8 - NPT.PF 0.26
1 1
2 1 2 5 2 8 9 7 0 2 - NPT.PF 0.28
3 3
4 1 5 6 0 9 7 8 0 4 - NPT.PF 0.40
1 " 2 0 7 2 107 8 0 1 "- N P T . P F 0.60
1 1
4 " 2 5 8 0 125 9 0 1 1
4 "- N P T . P F 0.85
1 1
2 " 3 2 9 1 140 9 0 1 1
2 "- N P T . P F 1.20 Page 1 of 1
GB-200.cdr
2 " 3 8 101 165 100 2 "- N P T . P F 1.70 4/10/2000
RACCORDS PFA AstiPure® • AstiPure® PFA FITTINGS
CARACTÉRISTIQUES SPECIFICATIONS
Depuis plus de 25 ans, la conception de nos raccords AstiPure® For more than 25 years, our AstiPure® fittings have been used to
permet de réaliser des circuits pour fluides corrosifs. Ils sont deliver corrosive fluids: they are leak proof and reliable under a wide
étanches, fiables, et ce dans une large plage de températures et de range of temperatures and pressures.
pressions.
Plus l'environnement est exigeant, plus The more demanding the environment gets,
nos raccords sont performants. Le corps the better AstiPure® fittings perform. The
des raccords AstiPure® est en TEFLON® PFA body of AstiPure® fittings is molded from
HP et le manchon en PFA HP, PVDF ou C- TEFLON ® PFA HP. The retaining nut can be
PVDF. Nos raccords sont traités pour made from PFA HP, PVDF or C-PVDF. Our
résister aux variations de températures, de fittings are annealed for greater resistance to
pression, aux chocs et vibrations. temperature cycling, pressure cycling, shock
and vibration.
COURBE PRESSION/TEMPÉRATURE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE DATA CURVE

Ces courbes permettent de définir les pressions de service pour nos These curves enable to determine the working pressures for our
raccords en fonction de la température du fluide. fittings at various fluid temperatures.
Pour une température supérieure à 100°C, nous recommandons For temperatures above 100°C, we recommend nuts made from PFA
l'utilisation de manchons en PFA référence MS2 (cf. page 10). part number MS2 (see page 10).
FLUID TEMPERATURE (°F)

104 158 212 266 320 374 428
20 285
4 x 6 mm 5/32” x 1/4”
16 228
PRESSURE (PSIG)
PRESSION (bar)
6 x 8 mm 1/4” x 5/16”
12 171 8 x 10 mm 1/4” x 3/8”
8 114 10 x 13 mm 3/8” x 1/2”
16 x 19 mm 5/8” x 3/4”
4 57.1
22 x 25 mm 7/8” x 1”
0 40 70 100 130 160 190 200
TEMPERATURE DU FLUIDE (°C)
CODIFICATION CODING SYSTEM
Type de raccord Page Code Type de raccord Page Code Type de raccord Page Code Type de raccord Page Code
Type of Fittings Type of Fittings Type of Fittings Type of Fittings
Raccord union droit 3 RU1 Raccord tube - Taraudage 5 RT1 Té - Gain de place 7 TG3 Raccord à souder - Filetage 9 RWF1
Straight union Female tube connector Space saver tee Male pipe connector
Raccord union coudé 3 RU2 Raccord coudé tube - Taraudage 5 RT2 Té - Gain de place branche et ligne 7 TG4 Raccord à souder - Taraudage 9 RWT1
Union elbow Female elbow tube connector Space saver run & branch tee Female pipe connector
Raccord réduction droit 3 RR1 Bouchon raccord 5 BF1 Raccord coudé à souder 8 RW2 Raccord tube - Bride 10 RB1
Straight reducer Connector cap Pipe elbow Tube connector - Flange
Raccord gain de place droit - Réduction 3 RG1 Bouchon tube 5 BF3 Té à souder 8 TW1 Clapet anti-retour 10 CAR
Straight space saver reducer Space saver tube cap Pipe tee Check valve
Raccord gain de place coudé - Réduction 3 RG2 Té - Trois tubes 6 TP1 Raccord tube droit - Tube à souder 8 RW1 Support filtre à disque 10 FD1
Elbow space saver Union tee Straight tube piping adaptor Disc filter support
Raccord réduction coudé 4 RR2 Té - Piquage réduction 6 TR1 Raccord droit tube à souder - Réduction 8 RWR1 Liaison tube 10 TL1
Elbow reducer Union tee reducer Straight union piping reducer Mini tube union
Raccord union passe-cloison 4 RC1 Té - Filetage branche en ligne 6 TF1 Raccord gain de place à souder droit 8 RWG1 Manchon de serrage 10 MS
Union panel mount Male thread run tee Straight tube pipe space saver Nut
Raccord tube - Filetage 4 RF1 Té - Filetage branche perpendiculaire 6 TF2 Té à souder gain de place 9 TWG2
Male tube connector Male thread branch tee Space saver branch tee pipe
Raccord coudé tube - Filetage 4 RF2 Té - Gain de place sur branche 7 TG1 Té à souder - Tube 9 TWP1
Male elbow tube connector Space saver branch tee Tube pipe union tee
Raccord gain de place - Filetage 5 RGF1 Té - Gain de place en ligne 7 TG2 Té tube à souder - Piquage réduction 9 TWR1
Male space saver connector Space saver run tee Union tee piping reducer
2
RACCORDS PFA AstiPure® • AstiPure® PFA FITTINGS
RB1* Raccord tube - Bride • Tube connector - Flange
Référence Ø tube - Tube size Bride L A B
Part N° mm inch Flange mm mm mm
RB1 06 08 6x8 1/4 x 5/16 PN 6 DN 10 46 75 12
RB1 10 13 10 x 13 3/8 x 1/2 PN 10 DN 10 62 90 17
RB1 16 22 16 x 19 5/8 x 3/4 PN 10 DN 15 88 95 27
RB1 16 20 16 x 19 5/8 x 3/4 PN 10 DN 20 88 105 27
RB1 16 25 16 x 19 5/8 x 3/4 PN 10 DN 25 88 115 27
* En PTFE / made of PTFE
CAR Clapet anti-retour • Check valve

Référence Ø tube - Tube size Ø passage ØA L Pression d’ouverture
Part N° mm inch I.D. mm mm mm Opening pressure
CAR 04 06 UP 4 x 6 5/32 x 1/4 4 35 80 0,05 bar
CAR 06 08 UP 6 x 8 1/4 x 5/16 5 35 91 0,05 bar
CAR 08 10 UP 8 x 10 1/4 x 3/8 7,6 52 107 0,04 bar
CAR 10 13 UP 10 x 13 3/8 x 1/2 9 52 126 0,04 bar
FD1 Support filtre à disque • Disc filter support

Référence Ø tube - Tube size Ø membrane Ø A L Ø F Ø grille
Part N° mm inch Diaph. size mm mm mm Ø grid
FD1 06 08 6 x 8 1/4 x 5/16 47 mm 70 85 14 1 mm
FD1 10 13 10 x 13 3/8 x 1/2 47 mm 70 115 22 1 mm
TL1 Liaison tube • Mini tube union

Référence Ø tube - Tube size A B
Part N° mm inch mm mm
TL1 04 06 4x6 5/32 x 1/4 80 120
TL1 06 08 6x8 1/4 x 5/16 80 130
TL1 08 10 8 x 10 1/4 x 3/8 80 130
TL1 10 13 10 x 13 3/8 x 1/2 80 150
TL1 16 19 16 x 19 5/8 x 3/4 80 160
TL1 22 28 22 x 25 7/8 x 1 80 160
MS Manchon de serrage • Nut

Ø tube Référence
Tube size Part N° ØA L
mm inch PVDF PFA C-PVDF mm mm
4x6 5/32 x 1/4 MS1 04 06 MS2 04 06 MS3 04 06 16 20

6x8 1/4 x 5/16 MS1 06 08 MS2 06 08 MS3 06 08 18 25
8 x 10 1/4 x 3/8 MS1 08 10 MS2 08 10 MS3 08 10 21 25
10 x 13 3/8 x 1/2 MS1 10 13 MS2 10 13 MS3 10 13 25 35
16 x 19 5/8 x 3/4 MS1 3/4” MS2 3/4” MS3 3/4” 38 40
22 x 25 7/8 x 1 MS1 1” MS2 1” MS3 1” 46 40
Toutes les références de raccords sont disponibles avec des manchons en PFA. Rajouter -3 à la fin de la référence. Exemple : TL1 08 10-3.
10 All fittings part numbers can be supplied with PFA nuts. Add -3 at the end of part number. For instance: TL1 08 10-3.
Courbe étalonnage clapet 6x8
3000
2500
2000
Débit (L/min)
1500
1000
500
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Pression (mbar)
PIGNAT SAS Tel : 00 33 4-78-90-50-03
6 Rue Calmette Fax : 00 33 4-78-90-63-88
B.P. 11 E-mail :pignat@pignat.com
69 741 GENAS Cedex Site Web : www.pignat.com
FRANCE
OPCIÓN O2
CALDERA DE VAPOR
EVV/2000
DOCUMENTATIÓN
TÉCNICA
Cod.2561
COSTRUZIONE MACCHINE DA STIRO

Via Don L. Sturzo,6 – 42021 Barco (RE) (ITALY)
Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA: IT 01363800358
Numero REA: 180051 C.C.I.A.A. di Reggio Emilia
Capitale sociale: Euro 10.400 i.v.
Tel. 0039 (0) 522 875159 Fax 0039 (0) 522 875579
e-mail: reverberi_a@libero.it
ISTRUZIO NI D’USO ED INSTALLAZIONE

LIVRET D’EMPLOI ET D’ENTRETIEN
USE AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
LIBRETA USO Y MANUTENCION
GEBRAUCHS UND WARTUNGSHANBUCH
Modelli Modeles Models Modelos Modelle

GAK 25
Manuale del d’uso ed installazione – GAK 25
SIMBOLOS PRESENTES EN LA MAQUINA
(E)
ATENCION, IDENTIFICA UNA FUENTE DE CALOR, QUE

PUEDE SER UNA TEMPERATURA PELIGROSA
ATENCION, IDENTIFICA UN PELIGRO GENERICO, QUE

PUEDE SER UNA CONDICION PELIGROSA
IDENTIFICA EL CONDUCTOR DE TIERRA
• No utilizar la máquina para usos no previstos por el

fabricante.
• Llevar siempre DPI conforme a las disposiciones de prevención de
accidentes.
• No acercarse a la máquina con material inflamable.
• No dejar nunca la caldera con la plancha encendida y apoyada en la
funda de cobertura.
• Sólo puede usar la máquina las personas autorizadas y de todas
maneras adultas.
• Prohibido limpiar o lubrificar durante el movimiento.
• Prohibido usar agua para apagar incendios sobre equipos eléctricos
bajo tensión.
• No apoyar sobre la máquina materiales con un tamaño y peso que
puedan desestabilizarla.
• No encender la máquina con personas alrededor que,
debido a contactos accidentales, podría comprometer las
condiciones de seguridad de la plancha.
• No encender nunca el aparato cuando el cable o la
estructura estén dañados.
• Este simbolo significa que el producto esta bajo la Directiva Europea
2002/96/CE.
• Debera informarse sobre el sistema de reciclaje local separado para
productos electricos y electronicos.
• Siga las normas locales y no se deshaga de los productos usados
tirandolos en la basura normal de su hogar. El reciclaje correcto de
su producto usado ayudara a evitar consecuencias negativas para el
medio ambiente y la salud del las personas.
Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 18 di 38
CARACTERISTICAS TECNICAS
DESCRIPCION U.m. M501 M502 M503 M504 M508 M509 M510 M511
Tensión de alimentación V 400
Frecuencia de alimentación Hz 50
Potencia electrobomba W 600
Deposito de l’agua lt / / / / 34 34 34 34
Número de revoluciones de la Rpm 2900
electrobomba
Potencia grupo resistencias KW 12 15 18 21 12 15 18 21
Presión del vapor Bar 6.5
Capacidad en el nivel mínimo lt 12.5
Dimensiones totales mm 560x790x H=760
Dimensiones embelaje mm 800x900x H=1050
Peso máx. Kg. 105 105 105 105 110 110 110 110
INSTALACION
Quitar el embalaje en carton y destornillar los 4 tornillos que fijan los pies a las paletas. Dejar
deslizar lentamente la caldera y montar los 4 pies en goma incluidos en el equipamiento.
Durante la ejecucion de esta operacion, haj que tener cuidado con manejar la caldera,
evidando eventuales choques.
CONEXION AGUA
El tubo de goma tipo lavadora incluido en el equipamiento tiene que ser conectado a un grifo de
la red del agua. Para los modelos provistos de deposito, hace falta facilitar el primer relleno
vertiendo una cantidad de agua igual a la mitad de la capacitad del deposito.
CONEXION DESCARGA
Conectar el grifo de descarga de la caldera (10) a tubo de goma en tela o a un tubo de cobre
(no utilizar tubos en plastico).
Descargar en el exterior del ambiente o en un contenedor provisto para el efecto.
CONEXION ELECTRICA
Estos generadores de vapor son construidos estandar tres fases con tension de trabajo de 400
Volt (50Hz).
Los componentes de mando funcionan con tension 230 V monofase, por lo tanto hace falta
usar un cable adecuado de 5 conductores y un interruptor general que respecta las actuales
normas de seguridad.
A) Remover el panel.
B) Introducir el cable en el presacable.
C) Conectas los hilos en las abrazaderas marcadas provistas para el efecto.
D) Cerrar nuevamente el panel.
Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 19 di 38

OPERACIONES POS EJECUTAR PARA LA PUESTA EN MARCHA

DE LA MAQUINA
A) Insertar el interruptor general previsto en la linea de alimentacion.
B) Para las maquinas desprovistas de deposito, abrir el grifo en el tubo de envio agua (el del
acueducto).
Para las maquinas provistas de deposito: llenar el deposito de agua (solo para la primera
operacion) y abrir el grifo en el tubo de envio agua (el del acueducto).
C) Accionar el interruptor de encendido (1): tienen que encenderse las lamparas rojas (2 y 4)
acompanadas por el silbido de la bomba (A). (Si no se oye el silbido de la bomba, significa que
esta ultima esta bloqueada, por lo tanto consultar la pagina "averias a la maquina").
Cuando el nivel del agua ha alcanzado la altura justa, se apagan las lamparas (2 y 4) se
enciende la luz piloto (3). Despues de algun instante se enciende la lampara (6) que indica la
puesta en marcha del grupo de resistencias. Esperar que el manometro (7) indique la presion
de trabajo para abrir el grifo vapor (8).
El grifo (8) tiene que ser abierto lentamente y es necesario esperar algun instante para permitir
a la intalacion o la maquina conectada ir bajo presion.
Se recomienda tener particular cuidado con los puntos de la maquina que se
encuentran a alta temperatura tanto durante el funcionamiento que en periodo
posterior al apagamiento.
Normalmente, hace falta esperar despues del apagamiento al menos 30 minutos
para que ocurra el enfriamiento completo.
Los presóstatos cód.5160 indicados en la lámina de la pág. 31 con el número 30
están tarados a 5 y a 5.7 bar respectivamente y precintados por Reverberi. Está
terminantemente prohibido retirar los precintos de los presóstatos.
Este equipo a presión ha sido inspeccionado y está equipado con dispositivos de
seguridad y accesorios. Dichas pruebas e inspecciones cumplen con los requisitos
esenciales de seguridad previstos en el anexo I de la directiva 97/23CE aplicable.
Este equipo a presión debe ser sometido a controles y comprobaciones periódicas
durante su funcionamiento, según las reglas y las normas de ley en materia.
OPERACIONES POR EJECUTAR AL FINAL DEL TRABAJO

A) Desconectar el interruptor (1).
B) Desconectar el interruptor general en la linea de alimentacion.
C) Cerrar el grifo de envio agua.
D) Cerrar el grifo (9) situado sobre la bomba (A).
E) Esperar que la presion de la caldera se haya bajado a 1 bar, luego vaciar la caldera con el
grifo de descarga (10).
F) Despues de cerca de un minuto, cerrar nuevamente el grifo de descarga (esta operacion es
muy importante, por lo tanto que ser ejecutada cuidadosamente, si possible todos los dias).
NOTA: Para tener una caldera desprovista de incrustaciones y un generador que se mantenga
durante mucho tiempo y en buen estado, Les aconsejemos que siempre ejecuten las
operaciones antes mencionadas.
Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 20 di 38

OPERACIONES DE CONTROL Y MANUTENCION
CALDERA:
Todas las noches hay que descargar la caldera. De esta manera, se elimina buena parte de los residuos
que se forman en el fondo della caldera.
BOMBA:
ATENCIÓN! Limpiar el ventilador de enfriamiento de la bomba cada dos años.
DEPOSITO ALIMENTACION:
Para los modelos provistos de deposito, aconsejemos que lo mantengan limpio de eventuales residuos
que se pueden acumular en el fondo.
FILTRO AGUA:
El filtro (17) (P.23) montado en la bomba la protege de la posible entrada de substancias extrajeras. Es
indispensable al menos una vez cada 6 meses controlar que no este atascado, de manera a no
comprometer la aspiracion de la bomba.
CONTROL NIVEL AUTOMATICO:
Desmontar al menos dos veces por año la sonda cód.0427 indicados en la lámina de la pág. 31 con el
número 3 que mide el nivel del agua. Para poder funcionar correctamente, tiene que estar desprovista
de todo residuo que comprometeria su sensibilidad.
CONTROL VALVULAS DE SEGURIDAD:
Es necesario un control periodico a la valvula de seguridad cód.0416 indicados en la lámina de la pág.
31 con el número 19 para garantizar su funcionalidad en caso de sobrepresion. Verificar que no se
formen incrustaciones que puedan obstruir la total abertura del dispositivo.
PRESOSTATO:
Este es el istrumento que conecta o desconecta el grupo de resistencias, controlar al menos una vez
por año que el tubito de cobre que lo conecta a la caldera este' seimpre libre.
INSTALACION ELECTRICA:
Verificar periodicamente que no haya hilos con signos de quemaduras. Si existen, substituirlos
inmediatamente.
AVERIAS A LA MAQUINA
LA BOMBA FUNCIONA PERO NO ENTRA AGUA EN LA CALDERA
A) Falta de agua en la red o en el deposito,
- añadir agua en el deposito o abrir el grifo.
B) Valvula de alimentacion defectuosa:
- limpiarla y restablecerla o substituirla con una nueva.
C) Filtro entrada agua obstruito:
- desmontar la goma (17) y limpiar cuidadosamente el filtro.
LA BOMBA NO FUNCIONA
A) Centralita electronica de nivel perjudicada:
- substituir la centralita.
B) Motor bomba quemado:
- substituir el motor.
C) Condensador de puesta en marcha quemado:
- substituir el condensador.
D) La bomba esta bloqueada:
- Batir delicadamente la bomba para desbloquear el girante.
LA CALDERA NO VA BAJO PRESION AUNQUE SE ENCIENDA LA LUZ PILOTO (6).
A) Las resistencias estan quemadas:
- substituir el grupo de las resistencias con la empaquetadura.
B) Los presostatos estan defectuosos:
- substituir los presostatos
C) El tubo de conexion de los presostatos esta' obstruido:
- desmontar el empalme de conexion y limpiarlo de la incrustaciones.
SALE VAPOR DE LA VALVULA DE SEGURIDAD
A) El manometro (7) indica una presion correcta y la valvula de seguridad continua a descargar:
- limpiar y restablecer la valvula y, si el defecto ne desaparece, substituirla.
B) El manometro (7) indica una presion elevada:
- limpiar los tubos del presostato y, si el defecto no desaparece, substituirla.
Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 21 di 38
Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 22 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 23 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 24 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 25 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 26 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 27 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 28 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 29 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 30 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 31 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 32 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 33 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 34 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 35 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 36 di 38

Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 37 di 38

CONFORMITY DECLARATION
(According to European Directive 97/23/EC – Annex VII)
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA’
(ai sensi della Direttiva Europea 97/23/CE – Allegato VII)
The company REVERBERI ARNALDO s.r.l. - Via Don Luigi Sturzo n°6 42021 BIBBIANO (RE) Italy
La società REVERBERI ARNALDO s.r.l. - Via Don Luigi Sturzo n°6 42021 BIBBIANO (RE) Italy
DECLARE
DICHIARA
That the unit:
Che l’insieme:
Definition: Generatore di vapore
Definizione: Generatore di vapore
Model:
Modello:
Serie N°:
N° di serie:
MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF DIRECTIVE 97/23/EC

E’ CONFORME AI REQUISITI DELLA DIRETTIVA 97/23/CE
1.Conformity assessment procedure used: Modules A1 (Category II)
Procedura di valutazione di conformità utilizzata: Modulo A1 (Categoria II)
2.Notified Body charged of the conformity assessment: TÜV Italia Via Carducci, 125 pal. 23 -20099-
Sesto San Giovanni (MI) – (Notified Body Number 0948)
Organismo Notificato incaricato della valutazione di conformità: TÜV Italia Via Carducci, 125 pal. 23 -20099-
Sesto San Giovanni (MI) – (Notified Body Number 0948)
3.Registration number of certificate issued by the Notified Body charged of valutation procedure
“Module A1”: TIS-PED-MI-02-09-005636-017
Estremi del certificato di approvazione dell’Organismo Notificato incaricato della procedura di valutazione
“Modulo A1”: TIS-PED-MI-02-09-005636-017
4.Component of assembly / Componenti dell’unità
Description of equipment PED category Conformity assessment apply
Descrizione del componente Categoria PED Valutazione di conformità applicata
Boiler II A1
Caldaia
Safety valve’s IV H1
Valvola di sicurezza
5.Harmonized standards applied to designing and manufacture: VSR’95
Norme armonizzate applicate alla progettazione ed alla costruzione: VSR’95
6.Others European Directives applied to the equipement: 97/23/EC, 93/68/EC, 2006/42/EC, 94/62EC
Eventuali altre Direttive Europee applicate all’insieme: 97/23/CE, 93/68/CE, 2006/42/CE, 94/62CE
The President
Il presidente
(Arnaldo Reverberi) BARCO DI BIBBIANO (RE)
………………………………………………….
Del 25-05-2011 - Pag. 38 di 38

Documentación Técnica - Evaporador de Doble Efecto PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Documentación Técnica - Evaporador de Doble Efecto PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PIGNAT SAS Tel : 00 33 4-78-90-50-03

6 Rue Calmette Fax : 00 33 4-78-90-63-88

ARCHIVO : 214 12 247

EVAPORADOR DOBLE EFECTO

EVAPORADOR DOBLE EFECTO

PIGNAT s.a. 6 Rue Calmette BP 11 69741 GENAS France

1. PRESENTACIÓN TÉCNICA ................................................................. 5

2. INFORMACIONES SEGURIDAD ......................................................... 7

3. REPASOS TEÓRICOS .......................................................................... 10

4. MONTAJE, INSTALACIÓN Y PUESTA EN MARCHA.................. 20

5. PRESENTACIÓN DE LA UNIDAD ..................................................... 24

6. CONCENTRACIÓN DE UNA DISOLUCIÓN ACUOSA AZUCARADA

EVAPORADOR DOBLE EFECTO

1.1. OBJETIVOS PEDAGÓGICOS

La unidad permite estudiar la tecnología y el principio de funcionamiento de un evaporador con

La instalación de evaporación doble efecto permite determinar la influencia de los siguientes

1.2. ESTUDIO PROPUESTO

Evaluación de la eficiencia de la evaporación en cada caso estudiado.

Estudio del intercambio térmico.

EVAPORADOR DOBLE EFECTO

durante las manipulaciones de productos químicos.

almacenado de productos químicos en lugar apropiado.

Sobre la canalización de introducción de la fase concentrada en el ciclón C1, la válvula de descarga

Los riesgos residuales

EVAPORADOR DOBLE EFECTO

3.1. GENERALIDADES SOBRE LA EVAPORACIÓN

La evaporación es un método de concentración de una solución que contiene :

La concentración de las soluciones por evaporación parcial (o total) de un solvente es un

Esta evaporación permite por lo tanto la regeneración del solvente y su reciclado en un

El solvente es en la mayoría de los casos el agua.

3.1.1. Principio de funcionamiento de un evaporador

El principio del evaporador consiste generalmente en aumentar la superficie de contacto de la

La creación de esta película puede efectuarse :

La evaporación es un procedimiento particularmente adaptado al tratamiento de productos

El dominio y el conocimiento de los siguientes parámetros permiten disminuir los tiempos de

Influencia de la presión reducida

3.1.2. Propiedades físicas de los productos

3.1.3. Diferentes tipos de evaporadores

Evaporador rotativo de lecho delgado

Evaporador a múltiples efectos

3.2. LOS EVAPORADORES A EFECTOS MULTIPLES

Su principal ventaja es la comodidad de utilización.

3.2.1.2.Alimentación a corrientes paralelas

Solución alimentación Solución concentrada

Es el método más utilizado.

El inconveniente de esta alimentación es que es necesario recalentar la solución a la temperatura de la

Solución concentrada Soluciones

La circulación a contra-corriente consiste en introducir la solución a evaporar en la última etapa,

La ventaja de esta alimentación es su utilización para las soluciones muy viscosas.

3.2.2. Comparación de los métodos

3.2.3. Número de etapas económicas

3.3. CALCULO DE LOS EVAPORADORES

La ecuación que rige el balance global es la siguiente :

Qma = Qmc + Qme (1)

Qma = caudal másico de alimentación

3.3.1.2. Balance materia en el constituyente

constituyente disuelto en la solución inicial = constituyente disuelto en el

Qma × Ca = Qmc × Cc + Qme × Ce (2)

Ca =concentración en constituyente de la solución de alimentación

3.3.2. Balance energético

E1 energía de la solución de alimentación

E1 = Qma × Cpa × Ta (3)

E2 energía de la solución evaporada